PA 



2ft 



«S> 



" , '"% 










.^ 



«xV </> 









^ Jl\ * 



<H ^ 









V 



•^ ^ 









Appletons' Catalogue of Valuable Publications. 

CLASSICAL &, SCHOOL BOOKS. 

RNOLD.— A FIRST AND SECOND LATIN BOOK 

id Practical Grammar. By Thomas K. Arnold, A.M. Revised and carefully 
erected, by J. A. Spencer, A.M. One volume, 12mo., neatly bound, 75 cents. 
#Cr If preferred, the First Latin Book, or the Second Latin Book and Grammar, 
q be had separately. Price 50 cents each- 

The chief object of this work (which :s founded on the principles of imitation and frequent 
etition) is to enable the pupil to do exercises from the first day of his beginning nis accidence 

RNOLD.— LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION: 

Practical Introduction to Latin Prose Composition- By Thomas K. Arnold, A.M. 
vised and Corrected by J. A. Spencer, A.M. One volume, 12mo., neatly 
ind, 81,00. 

'his work is also founded on the principles of imitation and frequent repetition. It is at once 
vntax, a Vocabulary, and an Exercise Book ; and considerable attention has been paid to the 
|ect of Synonymes. 

iXOLD.— A FIRST GREEK BOOK ; 

th Easy Exercises and Vocabulary. By Thomas K. Arnold, A.M. Revised and 
-rected by J. A. Spencer, A.M. 12mo. 621 cts. 

IXOLD.— GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION: 

3 ractical introduction to Greek Prose Composition. By Thomas K. Arnold, A.M. 
rised and Corrected by J. A. Spencer, A.M. One volume, 12mo. 

his work consists of a Greek Syntax, founded on Buttmann's, and Easy Sentences translated 
Greek, after given Examples, and with given Words. 

tNOLD.— A GREEK READING BOOK; 

luding a Complete Treatise on the Greek Particles. By Thomas K. Arnold, A.M. 
ised by J. A. Spencer, A.M. One volume, 12mo. (In Press.) 

LVOLD.— CORNELIUS NEPOS ; 

:h Practical Questions and Answers, and an Imitative Exercise on each Chap 
By Thomas K. Arnold, A.M. Revised, with Additional Notes, by Prof. John 
, Professor of the Latin Language in the University of the City of New- York 
i neat volume, 12mo. 62£ cts. 

Arnold's Greek and Latin Series. — The publication of this valuable collection of cla3 
school books may be regarded as the presage of better things in respect to the mode of teach 
\nd acquiring languages. Heretofore boys have been condemned to the drudgery of goin<* 
Latin and Greek Grammar without the remotest conception of the value of what thay we-re 
ting, and every day becoming more and more disgusted with the dry and unmeaning task; 
low, by Mr. Arnold's admirable method — substantially the same with that of Ollendorff- -the 
]ent they take up the study of Latin or Greek, they begin to learn sentences, to acquire ideas, 
a how the Romans and Greeks expressed themselves, how their mode of expression differed 
ours, and by degrees they lay up a stock of knowledge which is utterly astonishing to those 
have dragged on month after month in the old-fashioned, dry, and tedious way of learning 
j ages. 

Mr. Arnold, in fact, has had the good sense to adopt the system of nature. A child learns his 
language by imitating what he hears, and constantly repeating it till it is fastened in the 
ory ; in the same way Mr. A. puts the pupil immediately to work at Exercises in Latin and 
k, involving the elementary principles of the language — words are supplied — the mode of 
rig them together is toJd the pupil — he is shown how the ancients expressed their ideas ; and 
, by repeating these things again and again — iterum iterumgue — the docile pupil has them 
ibly impressed upon his memory and rooted in his understanding. 

The American editor is a thorough classical scholar, and has been a practical teacher for 
i in this city He lias devoted the utmost care to a complete revision of Mr. Arnold's works, 
rjrrecled several prors of inadvertence or otherwise, has rearranged and improved various 
ers in the early volumes of the series, and has attended most diligently to the accurate print- 
.:. mechanical execution of the whole. We anticipate most confidently the speedy adoption 
ere works in our schools and colleges." — Cour. ($- Enq. 

h Arnold's Series of Classical Works has attained a circulation almost unparalleled in EngJcnd, 
I introduced into nearly all the great Public Schools and leading Educational Institutions. 
• are also very highly recommended by some of the best American Scholars, for introduction 
theClassicalSchoolsof the United States. They are already used in the University of the 
of New-York, Rutger's Fema le Institute, N. Y. ; Union College, Schenectady ; Mt. St. 
'« College, Md. ; Yale College, New-Haven ; and numerous large schools throughout th* 

80 



Ajr])Jetons y Catalogue of Valuable Publications. 



CLASSICAL 8c SCHOOL BOOKS— Continue] 
ARNOLD.— LECTURES ON MODERN HISTORY. 

Arnold, D.D. With an Introduction and Notes, by Prof. Henry Ree 
One < olum L2mo , $1 £5. 

ft^- Thk volume has already been adopted as a text-book in the University of Pennsylvai! 
B ihenectady. 

ADLER.— A NEW GERMAN READER; 

With Reference U) Ollendorff'! German Grammar. By G. J. Adler, Prof, of t 
German Language and Lit. in the University of the City of New- York. (In Press: 

GR VHAM. -ENGLISH SYNONYMES ; 

' ifiedand Explained, with Practical Exercises. By G. T. Graham, author 

[pa to English Grammar," etc Edited, with illustrative authorities, by Hen 

R< • d, Prof, of LLng. Lit. in the University of Pennsylvania. One volume, 12mo 

" It is impossible not to praise both the design and execution of this work. It fills a chasm 

ratUTB. Previous to this publication, we had but three works of the ki 

whether lor young or old students, (Trussler, Taylor, Crabb,) and not one of them is practi 

enough for elementary purposes." — London j2the?i<Bum. 

GESENIUS.— HEBREW GRAMMAR, BY RODIGER. 

lius's Hebrew Grammar. Enlarged and Improved by E. Rodiger, Prof. 
Oriental Literature in the University of Halle. Translated by Benj. Davies, Do 
in Philosophy of the University of Leipsic ; with a Hebrew Reading Book, prepar 
by the translator, carefully reprinted from the fouteenth edition, (just published 
London, by Bagster.) Complete in one handsome 8vo. volume. 

" The excellence of Gesenius's Grammar is universally acknowledged. Its adaptation, b 
in matter and method, to meet the wants of Hebrew students, is triumphantly established by 
fact that no fewer than thirteen editions have been sold. The new edition, from which this tra 
lation has been made, was prepared by Prof. Rodiger, and appeared in 1845. Among living P 
klogists, there are but few names in higher repute than Rodiger's. His edition of this Gramn 
therefore be supposed to contain some real improvements, as well as changes and additio 
and this presumption is fully borne out by a comparison with the thirteenth edition, which v 
itself improved by the author's last revision. The addition of the Reading Book, as an int 

in to the translating of Hebrew, will prove (the compiler hopes) of material service to 
Undent in mastering the Grammar and acquiring the language." — Ext. from Translator's Pr 

GU1ZOT.— GENERAL HISTORY OF CIVILIZATION 

in Europe, from the fall of the Roman Empire to the French Revolution. Trai 

■led from the French of 31. Guizot, Professor of History to la Faculte des Lett, 

i 1 Minister of Public Instruction. Third American edition, with No 

S Henry, D. D. One volume, 12mo , $1,00. 

" M. Guizot, in his instructive Lectures, has given us an epitome of modern history, distinguish 

by all the merit which, in another department, renders Blackstone a subject of such peculiar t 

— a work closely condensed, including nothing useless, omitting nothing essi 

Hal ; written with grace, and conceived and arranged with consummate ability." — Boston Tr 

KEIGHTLEY.— THE MYTHOLOGY OF GREECE 

And Italy; designed for the use of Schools. By Thomas Keightley. Numer« 
vrood-cul illustrations. One volume, ISmo., half bound, 44 cents. 

'• Thil is ■ neat little volume, and well adapted to the purpose for which it was prepared. 
I \. ry eompendfottl and convenient form, every tiling relating to the subject, of 
pOttnnee to the young student " — /.,. /. &iar. 

MICHELET.— HISTORY OF THE ROMAN REPUBLIC. 

I;. M Rfichelet, Professor of History in the College of France, author of iir i 
I 1 I race," etc. One vol., !2mo. 

"1 - Michelet'i Roman History in the original, with the admiration which 

Un •■■■ mutt inspire. It u in many respects admirably adapted to the J 

pose* of instruction in our higher seminaries of learning, &.O. " ALONZ J p OTTEfi 

•' l.'n 

MANDEVILLE— NEW ENGLISH READER: 

A Course of Reading for Common Schools and the Lower Classes of Academi*' 
on a Scientific plan ; being in part an abridgement of the author's "Elements 
Reading and Oratory." By II. Afandeville, Prof, of Moral Philosophy and Bel 
Lettres in Hamilton College, N. Y. One volume, 12mo. 

31 



//4. 



PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION 



TO 



GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION. 



BY 



THOMAS KERCHEVER ARNOLD, M. A., 

RECTOR OF LYNDON, 
AND LATE FELLOW OF TRINITY COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE. 



CAREFULLY REVISED AND CORRECTED 

BY 

REV. J. A. SPENCER, A. M. 

( 




V 

FROM THE FIFTH LONDON EDITION. S \ 






Tf- 



D. 



NEW-YORK: 

APPLETON & CO., 200 BROADWAY, 

PHILADELPHIA: 

GEO. S. APPLETON, 148 CHESNUT-STREET. 

MDCCCXLVII. 




%& 






Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1846, by 

D. APPLETON & COMPANY, 

In the Clerk's Office of the District Court for the Southern District of 

New- York. 



PREFACE. 



The plan and object of the present volume are so fully 
and so satisfactorily stated by Mr. Arnold in his Preface, 
that it is quite superfluous for the American Editor to add 
any thing to what he has there said. It is simply incum- 
bent on him to state, that he has bestowed much care and 
attention upon the volume in order to perfect its arrange- 
ment and render it uniform with the other works of the 
series, and also to ensure, as far as possible, correctness, 
neatness, and even elegance of typography. While he can 
hardly dare to promise himself that there is an entire 
absence of errors of this kind, he ventures to express the 
hope that nothing of consequence has escaped attention, and 
that, the Practical Introduction to Greek Prose Composition 
will be found equally acceptable and equally valuable with 
any of its predecessors in the Arnold Series of Classical 
Books for Schools and Colleges. 



J. A. S. 



New-York, Nov. 20th, 1846. 



PEEFACE 



ENGLISH EDITION, 



The plan of this Introduction requires some ex- 
planation. Its object is to enable the student, as soon 
as he can decline and conjugate with tolerable facility, 
to translate simple sentences after given examples and 
with given words ; the principles trusted to being those 
of imitation and very frequent repetition. It is at 
once a Syntax, a Vocabulary, and an Exercise-book; 
the Syntax being in substance that of Buttmann's ex- 
cellent School Grammar. 

One object I have steadily kept in view, that of 
making the general construction of sentences of more 
importance than the mere government of cases, which 
is nearly all that most Exercise-books pretend to teach. 
The Exercises are adapted for viva voce practice ; but 
if the book is so used, they should by all means be 
written down afterwards. The Vocabularies, if possi- 
ble, but at all events the Examples, should be com- 
mitted to memory and carefully kept up. 

It is due to Mr. Ollendorff, whose Introduction to 
German has appeared in English, to state that the pub- 
lication of a work like the present was suggested to me 



Vlll PREFACE. 






by the advantage I myself derived from the use of his 
book. I had originally drawn it up exactly on his 
plan ; but the probable expense of publication deterred 
me, for some time, from publishing it in that shape.* 
The present work differs therefore from his, in requir- 
ing from the pupil a general acquaintance with the 
Accidence. 

For the convenience of those who may wish to use 
the Syntax as such, I have added a complete set of 
Questions to the work. 

T. K. A. 
Lyndon, 1841. 



* The very great success of this work, and the similar one on 
" Latin Prose Composition? — which are now used at all, or nearly all, 
our public schools, — has encouraged the author to send to press the 
more elementary Exercises here alluded to, under the title of a " Prac- 
tical Introduction to Greek Accidence." [This volume forms the 
" First Greek Lessons," carefully revised and improved by the Ameri- 
can Editor.] 



CONTENTS. 



SECTION PAGE 

1. On the Tenses— The Article ,11 

2. The Article continued 13 

3. The Article continued 16 

4. The Article continued 18 

5. The Article continued 20 

6. The Article continued . . . . . . . . 22 

7. The Article as demonstrative Pronoun — Pronouns . . .24 
Pronouns continued . V ....... 27 

9. Pronouns continued . , 29 

10. Of the Neuter Adjective 31 

11. Subject and Predicate [Words with which the copula is often 
omitted], 33 

12. On the Moods 35 

13. The Moods continued [d, &v, &c] 38 

14. The Moods continued ,,,,.... 40 

15. The Moods continued . 43 

16. The Moods continued 46 

17. The Moods continued 47 

18. The Moods continued 49 

19. nv and \xr\ 50 

20. Verbals in reog ... * 53 

21. Double Accusative 55 

22. The Accusative after Passive and Neuter Verbs ... 57 

23. The Accusative continued 60 

24. The Genitive 63 

25. The Genitive continued 65 

26. The Genitive continued [Voc. of Verbs governing the gen.] . 69 

27. The Genitive continued [Voc. of Verbs governing the gen.] . 71 

28. The Genitive continued 73 

29. Comparison 75 

30. Comparison continued 78 

31. The Dative [Voc. of Verbs governing the dat.] ... 80 

32. The Middle Voice [Voc. of middle Verbs] . . . . . 84 

33. Middle Voice continued [Voc. of middle Verbs] . . . .87 

34. On the Perfect 2. [Voc. of second Perfects] .... 89 

35. Additional Remarks on some of the Moods and Tenses . . 91 

36. On the Infinitive 94 

37. The Infinitive continued [Voc. of 'Ek] * 97 

38. The Infinitive continued 101 

39. The Participle [Voc. on the use of some Participles] . . . 103 

40. The Participle continued [Voc, of Verbs that take the Participle] 195 



CONTENTS. 



41. The Participle continued : rvyxdvo> } Xavdavu, (pOdyo) [Voc, on 'A^tf 

and Una], 108 

42. The Genitive Absolute, &c. [Voc, of Words used in Norn. Absol.] 110 



43. The Relative [Voc. on 'E*, 'Ai/a, Ets] 

44. The Relative continued [Voc. on Aid.] 

45. b olog ov dvi)p [Voc. On Kara] .... 

46. oviiig bong ov ,.,... 

47. olog, it io, p&Au [Voc. on ' Ap<i>i ,Tlepi] 

48. oiro)g } ov pfi [Voc. on 'E^t] .... 

49. \ii], nn ov [Voc. on MeraJ .... 

50. /<»'/ with Relatives, Infin., &c. [Voc. on Tlapd ] 

51. Some Adverbs of Time, &c 

52. On Interrogative Sentences [Voc. on Hp6g] 

53. Indirect Single Questions [Voc. on 'Yn6] 

54. Double Questions 

55. Observations on «, Idv 

56. Condensed Questions .... 

57. Various Constructions 

58. Various constructions continued 

59. List of Particles, &c 

[Tables of Prepositions in Composition] 
Table of Differences of Idiom 
Questions on the Syntax .... 

Index I. (English) 

Index II. (Greek Phrases explained) 
Index III. (Irregular Nouns and Verbs) 



113 
117 
120 
123 
125 
128 
130 
133 
136 
139 
143 
145 
146 
148 
150 
152 
154 
168 
169 
181 
197 
231 
235 



EXPLANATION OF ABBREVIATIONS, &c. 

B., K., M., R., T., denote respectively the Greek Grammars of Butt- 
mann, Kvhner, Matthia, Rost, and Thiersch. Kr. stands for Krilger. 

E. refers to the Eton Greek Grammar. 

R., after a declinable word, stands for root. Thus, y6w, R. y6var t 
means, that the regular terminations are to be added to yovar. 

V. refers to Vdmel's Synonymisches Wdrterbuch. 

A Greek letter added after a verb, shows that the simpler root (as it 
appears, for instance, in aor. 2 ) ends in that letter. 



PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION 



GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION, 



<§> 1. On the Tenses. — The Article. 

1. It is taken for granted that the student knows : — 

(1) That the verb agrees with its nominative case in number 
and person* 

(2) That every adjective word — whether adjective, participle, pro- 
noun, or article — must agree with its substantive in gender, num- 
ber ', and case. 

(3) That the transitive verb is followed by the accusative. 

(4) That one substantive depending upon another is put in the 
genitive case. 

(5) That any verb may have the same case after it as before it,, 
when both words refer to the same person or thing. 

2. The Imperfect, besides the usual meaning of 
that tense,t is used to express continued or repeated 
actions, taking place in past time. 

3. The Aorists express actions completed in past 



* But a dual nominative is often joined with a plural verb ; and a 
neuter plural generally takes a singular verb. 

t The Imperfect expresses 1) an action continuing during another 
action which is past ; 2) an action continued by being frequently re- 
peated ; and (occasionally) 3) an action begun or intended, but not 
completed. (See Jelfs Greek Gram. Vol. II. p. 53.) — Am. Ed. 

X The Aorists mark actions simply past, without reference to other 
actions, at the same or a different time ; as eypaxpa ty]v emaTo\fiv, " I 
wrote the letter (without specifying time or circumstance). Hence, the 
aorists referring to time past indefinitely, are used to denote momentary 
acts, and also actions repeatedly done in past time. In this latter case 
it may be rendered by the present or by the phrase " to be wont, or ac- 
customed," &c. (See Jelfs Greek Gram. Vol. II. p. 57 ) — Am. Ed. 



12 THE ARTICLE. 

Hence the Aorist is used of momentary and single actions; the 

Imperfect, of continued and repeated ones 

The dog bit hi in [aor ) : the dog hoxcted all night (imperf.) 

Obs. The Imperfect (of habitual actions) is often rendered by 

* used /o,' &c. 

4. The Perfect expresses actions continued or re- 
maining in their effects up to the present time. 

a) Hence the aor. is nearly our perfect indefinite 
(the perf. formed by inflection): the />er/*. our perfect 
definite (or perfect with 'toe'). 

6) But when the connection of the past with the 
present is obvious from the context, the aorist may be 
used for the perfect ; or, in a narrative, for the pluper- 
fect. 

c) It is only when a particular stress is to be laid on 
the time of the occurrence, that the perfect or pluperf. 
mnst be used. All this is, however, greatly influenced 
by euphony. 

5. A governed genitive is often placed between an 
article and its noun. 

6. to t7^ aQtrl}^ yjillo^y the beauty of virtue. 

6 ju zijg TzoXtcog nQiiy^ara nQatxwv, he who trans- 
acts [or manages) the affairs of the state. 

In this way two and even three articles stand together. 

7. 6 7iQdTZ(ov, (the person doing =) he who does. 

Hence the artic. with a participle is equivalent to a personal or 
demonstrative pronoun with a relative sentence. 
Thus, 

b rrpirrcov, equivalent to ekcTvos os rcoarTEi : he who does. 
tov irparrovros, of him who does. 
&c. 

PI. oi TroiiTTovTts, equivalent to LkzXvoi oi TrpaTTovai, those who do. 
Tcov TrpaTToi/rwV) of those who do. 
&c. 

8. Vocabulary 1. 

Virtue, fary, /%•, rj. 

Beauty, xaUov, eog, to. 

City, tidXtg, tco^, /). 

Thing or affair, nQiiypu,* Uzoy', to. 

» Nouns in 1 1 from verbs, generally denote the thing produced by the 
act. They may be compared with the pass, participle (rd ircirpayntvop). 



THE ARTICLE. 13 

To do, transact, manage, nodrrco. 

Wonder, or am surprised ) ^avfid^m (with fut. mid n 

at, admire, \ but aor. 1 act.). 
Well, el. 

Ill, aaxoog. 

Often, frequently, noMdxig. 

Citizen, noting* ov, 6. 

Judge, HQittjg, ov, 6. 

TTparrw, do, has also the intransit. meaning of our to be doing well 
or {//: i. e. to be prosperous or unfortunate. In this sense it has 
the per/. 2. iriKpaya. The a is long throughout. 



Exercise 1. 

9. I admire the beauty of the city. The citizens are 
doing well. I have often admired the beauty of the 
cities. The judge often admired the beauty of virtue. 
I admire those who transact (7) the affairs of the state. 
He transacts the affairs of the state ill. The citizens 
are doing ill. I have often admired the virtue of the 
citizen. The citizens admire the virtue of the judge. 



§ 2. The Article continued. 

10. (a) Proper names often take the article, if they 
are the names of persons well known. 

Hence the names of Deities, Heroes, &c, generally take the arti- 
cle ; and the names of persons recently mentioned. 

11. (0) But if the proper name is followed by a de- 
scription which has the article, the proper name is 
without the article, unless it is to be expressed em- 

b Nouns in r^ of the first decl. from verbs, denote the male doer of 
the action : those from substantives denote a person standing in any 
near relation to what is denoted by the substantive: as ttoMt^s from 
ttoXis. Those in irns from subst., have the i long. Kpm/j is from Kpivu, 



14 THE ARTICLE. 

phaticalli/, as being well-known, or as having been 
previously mentioned.* 

12. (c) The Greek has no indefinite article (our 'a'). 
(d) Our <a' should be translated by rig, when a 

■particular person or thing is meant, though not 
named : in other words, wherever we might substitute 
; a certain ' for •' a \ 

13. (e) The subject* generally has the article, the 
predicate not. 

14. (a) 6 ^cnxQarrig, Socrates ; at 'A&lqvai, Athens. 

(b) £cQXQar?iQ 6 cpiloaoyog, Socrates the Philoso- 

pher. 

(c) Innog hexe laywv, a mare brought forth a 

hare. 

(d) yvvfi Tig oqviv £l%£v, a rooman (or, a certain 

woman) had a hen. 

(e) rj xoqtj iywero a6n6g, e the girl became (or, was 

turned into) a leather bottle. 

15. Vocabulary 2. 

Socrates, JZcoxodr/ig,* ovg, 6. 

Athens, 'Ad^vai, cov, aL 

Philosopher, qiloaocpog, ov, 6. " 

Horse, mare, Innog, ov, 6 et rj. 

tj ^ Xaycog, go, 6 (ace. laycov or 

1 ) lay •co). 
Woman, yvvt], yvvcuxog, rj (voc. yvvcu). 

Hen, oQvig^ oQvT&og, 6 et rj. 

Water, vdcoo, vdaiog, to. 

c Kr. who quotes Bacch. 1314: vvv Ik 66fioiv Uripos sK0ep\wonai \ b 
Kai5/jo5 o peyas. 

d That is, the nominative before the verb. The predicate is what is 
affirmed or said of the subject. (See note e ). 

e Or, dfTKns tyivcTo f] Kopr). So, Geo? tjv b Aoyo?, the Word was God. 
This nrises from the nature of a proposition. We usually assert of a 
particular thing that it is included, as an individual, in a particular 
class ; not that it is the whole of that class. 

f Eo'K-.oarr/?, G. ovs, D. ei, &LC. A. HcoKparrj (Plato), HoiKparriv (Xeno- 
phon), V. H'.iKparcs. 

e ' Bird,' but in Att. generally cock, hen ; just as we use fowl. G. 
SpvlQoi, &,c. A. a and v. Plur. reg., but also tioveis, G. dpviw, D. 8pvi~ 
<7((i/) only, Ace. opuns (opvis). 



THE ARTICLE. 



15 



Wine, 

Boy, son, 

To have, 

To bring forth, or (of birds) 

to lay, 
Damsel, maiden, 
Leather-bottle, 
Become, 
An egg, 
Three, 



ohog 9 ]l ov, b. 
Tiaig, ncudog, o. 

77X7co k (tex). 

aaxog, ov, 6. 
yiyvofxat^ (yev). 
mov, ov, to. 
TQetg, rqug, rgia. 



Exercise 2. 

16. I admire the beauty of the hen. A (14. (d) boy 
had a hare. The water was turned into (= became) wine 
(14. (e). The hen laid three eggs. A certain damsel 
had three hens. I admire the virtue of the maiden. 
The hare was turned into (= became) a horse. The 
boy admires the beauty of Athens. The citizens ad- 
mire the beauty of the woman. I admire those who 
transact 1 * the affairs of Athens. I have often admired 
the virtue of Socrates. I admire Socrates the philoso- 
pher. The woman shall have a hen. The water has 
been turned into ( = become) wine. A certain judge 
has three hens. 



h ohos, with the digamma £oTvos y vinum. So u>6v, wFoV, ovum. 
1 t^w, £^co and a^/fiaoj, £o-%ri'<a. Imperf. ^x ov '• aor ' Z<?x ov > £<rx^ r i v * 

[ecr^oy, c%£g ( a X* * n Compounds) , 0-^0671/ , 0"%^, cy&v* ff X™ p 1' 

k tikto), (re£w) re^ojxatj Hroxa, ctekov, irexofirjv. 

1 yiyvopai, jevfiaonai, yeyevr\\iai and yeyova, eyevo/jiriv. All intrans. for 
am horn; become, eyevo^v and yeyova also serve for preterites of the 
verb " to be." When yeyova may be construed ' I am,' it means, c I am 
by birth,' ' have become.' (B.) — yeivofxai, am born, poet. : aor. iyeivapnv, 
begot, bore (in prose as well as poetry). 

* Numerals like this at the top of the line refer to the Table of Dif- 
ferences of Idiom at the close of the volume. 



10 THE ARTICLE. 



$ 3. Article continued. 

17. (a) When the my, thy, his, their, &c. are em- 
phatic they are to be translated by possessive pronouns, 
with the article. 

IS. (b) My, your, Ids, &c. are to be translated by 
the article, when it is quite obvious whose the thing in 
question is. 

Whenever there is any opposition (as, when mine is opposed to 
yours or any other person's) the pronouns must be used. 

19. (c) When an adj. without the article stands be- 
fore the article of the substantive, the thing spoken of 
is not distinguished from any thing else, but from 
itself under other circumstances." 1 

(d) When a noun which has just preceded, is to be 
repeated again, the article belonging to it stands alone. 
19*. (a) 6 obg dovlog, thy or your slave (emphatic 
and precise); but obg dovlog, a slave of 
yours (indefinite). 

(b) alyoj T/jv y.ecpal^v ([ am pained as to the 

head= ) I have a pain in my head. 

(c) ?jdeto im nlovGioig toig noXlraig, he rejoiced 

(or teas glad), when the citizens were 
wealthy, (or, on account of the citizens 
who were wealthy). 

(d) 6 ifibg natrjQ xcu 6 xov cpi'lov, my father and 

my friend's, (literally, my father and 
the of my friend). 

20. Vocabulary 3. 

Slave, dovlog, ov, 6. 

To feel or suffer pain ; to ) , n , 

be pained at, \ aX ? 8C0 ' 

Head, xeqah], ijg, fj. 

m Thus in the example following it is not, ' rich citizens, 1 as op 
posed to other citizens; but 'he rejoiced in their being rich; or in the 
wealth of . . ,' &,c. 



THE ARTICLE. 



17 



To rejoice, be glad, or to %do{iai (with dative). 
take pleasure in, 



Wealthy, rich, 


nlovGiog," a, ov. 


Father, 


narrjQ, tQog (oog), 6. 


Friend, 


Cfilog, ov, 6. 


Thine, thy, 


cog, G%, oov. 


Mine, my, 


ifiog, r\, ov. 


Jaw, 


yvd&og, ov, rj. 


Tooth, 


odovg, ovtog, 6. 


Ear, 


ovg, corog, to. 


Foot, 


novg, Tzodog, 6. 


Hand, 


X&Q, Z«e<fe, V (root yzq for 




G. D. dual and D. plur.) 


Knee, 


yovv, yovaiog, to (R. yovar). 


Brother, 


adtlcpog, ov, 6. 


Daughter, 


dvydxr^, egog (oog), r\. 


Mother, 


\irpnp° ?Qog (oog), rj. 


Wise, clever, 


cocpog, ?], ov. 


Happy, 


evdai'ficov, cov, ov. 


To love, 


cpilt'cx). 


To be vexed at, 


a%i}o{AU(, 8G0[iai, ifl&sG&qv 




(dative). 


Beautiful, 


%al6g, t], ov. 


Bad, 


xaxog, tj, ov. 



Obs. 1. rjSeadai and a^deaOac are more commonly followed by the 
dat P (without a prepos.) except in the construction explained in 19. c. 

Obs 2. 'That? when it stands for a subst. before expressed, is to 
be translated by the article. (See 19*. d.) 



Exercise 3. 

21. The mother of the beautiful daughter has a pain 
in her jaws. I am glad that my brothers are happy. 5 

n Adjectives in u»$ denote what belongs to, concerns, or comes from 
what, the root expresses. They are formed from substantives, and some- 
times from other adjectives in og. When the root ends in r it is some- 
times changed into o- : -Xovrog, wealth, -rXovamg. 

° Ylji-no, nfiriio, Ovyimp, yarrrfip, throw away e in G. and D. sing, and 
I), pi. They have V. f.o, and insert a before ai in D. pi. 

? ! 'A^Oincu, and in the poets riSofxai., are also followed by the ace, 
especially of neut. pronouns. 



18 THE ARTICLE. 

The father rejoiced in his son's being wise (c). My 
friend and my brothers (d). I often have a pain in my 
foot My mother was suffering from a pain in her 
hands (6). I am vexed that the bad are wealthy (c). 
The daughter loves her mother. My slave loves my 
brother's. I admire your virtue and that of your 
friend. The beautiful damsel shall be turned into a 
horse. I am pleased with those who transact 1 the 
affairs of the state. He was vexed that the citizens 
were rich. I take pleasure in my daughter's being 
beautiful (c). 



§ 4. Article continued. 

22. a) The Greeks often place the genitives between 

the noun governing and the article ; or they 
repeat the article after the noun. 
b) A noun or participle is often understood, so 
that the article stands alone. 

23. a) r\ tov noir\Tov ooq)ia, q or r\ (jocpia rj rov ttoitjiov, 

the wisdom (cleverness &c.) of the poet, fj 
xaXi] neqalrj, or rj xsyalrj rj xalT] r vqg xoQtjg, 
the beautiful head of the m.aiden. 
b) "A)J£av§Qo$ 6 &i1l7Z7iov, Alexander the son of 
Philip (viog, son, understood). 6 JZcocpQovicxov, 
the son of Sophroniscus. elg x\v QHlinnov, 
into Philip^s country (jmqciv, country un- 
derstood), ra ttjs 7r6l£cog y the affairs of the 
state (nQayiiaxa understood), ra i^d, my 
affairs, my property, ol iv aarsi, the people 
in the city, those in the city, ol avv ico 
PaatXtT, those with the king. 

q Substantives in ia are derived from adj., and express the abstract 
notion of the adj. — The other positions of the gen. are frequently met 

with: Mty$£tf)f rhv apwayf)v. (Herod, i. 3.) // dva^cjpnaig rcju 'A-drjvaicjv. 

(Thuc. i. 12.) For a partitive gen. these are the only correct positions. 
r The latter position gives emphasis to the adjective or dependent 
genitive. 



THE ARTICLE. 



19 



24. Vocabulary 4. 

Poet, 

Wisdom, cleverness ; 

Alexander, 

Philip, 

Sophroniscus, 

Son, 

Country, 

Our, 

Your, 

March an army (when 
spoken of its general), 

March (of the army, and 
of a person undertaking 
an expedition) also jour- 
ney, set out, &c, 

Persian, 

Scythian, 

Cyrus, 

King, 

Madness, 

People, 

Army, 

Geometer, 

With, 

City, town, 



7TOl7]T7]g, OV, 0. 

ooqia, ag, if. 
'A)J%avdQog, ov, 6. 
0ili7i7zog, ov, 6. 
^coygovioxog, ov, 6. 
vlog, ov, 6. 
Xcoga, ag, fj. 

TjtlETtQOg, a, ov, 

vfxeiSQog, a, ov. 
ilavvco.* 

noQBvofiai (with aor. lpass.; 
km riva, against a per- 
son). 

ntQGtjg, ov, 6. 
£xvdijg, ov, 6. 
Kvqog, ov, 6. 
fiaoilevg, tcog, 6. 
\iaviaj- ag, rj. 
drjpog, ov, 6. 
G7QciT8V(Jta, n arog, ro. 
yeco(A,ETQTjg, ov, 6. 
ovv (dative). 
aorv, y eog, to. 



Exercise 4. 
25. I admire the wisdom of the geometer. The peo- 

8 eXavvojj zXaaoj (a), IXfiXuKa, cX^Xa/xat, T]\aBr}v. Att. fut. i\u>, as, 5, &c, 
infin. iXuv. It is trans, (drive, urge on), but used as intrans. (march, 
ride), by omission of ace. 

1 This word was formed from an adj. paves, mad, which is quoted 
by Suidas. 

u oTpaTOS, arparia, army i (rrpareia, expedition. crpartvpa has both 
meanings ; the latter often in Herodotus. 

v aarv never means the state, as rroXis does. It is often used of an 
old or sacred part of a rrdAtj, as Londoners speak of ' the City,' as a part 
of London, 



20 THE ARTICLE. 

pie in the city admire the beautiful mother of the dam- 
sel. The people in the city admire the very beautiful 
daughter of the very beautiful mother. The king 
marches into the country of the Scythians. The army 
of the Persians marches into the country of the Scythi- 
ans. Cyrus marches against the king of the Persians. 
The son of Sophroniscus is astonished at the madness 
of the people. The poet admires those who manage 1 
the affairs of the state. I rejoice in the king's being 
wealthy. 5 I am vexed when the bad are wealthy. The 
people in the city (d) admire the son of Philip. The 
king has the toothache (i. e. suffers pain in his teeth 4 ). 
The clever geometer has a pain in his knees. A certain 
poet had a very beautiful horse. Those with the king 
will march against the son of Philip. 



§ 5. Article continued. 

26. An adverb with the Article is equivalent to an 
adjective. 

27. ol nalcti™ the long ago men = the men of old. 

6 fiEra^v xqovog, the between time = the intermediate 
time. 

r\ avQtov, adv. (wtoa, day, understood), the morrow, 
the next day. 



28. Vocabulary 5. 




Long ago, 


nalai. 


Man, 


av\}pat7Tog ov r 6 (—homo). 


Between, 


fiercely. 


To-morrow, 


avQtov (adv.) 


Time, 


XQovog, ov, 6. 


Near, 


TitXag : ttXtjgiov. 


One's neighbour, 


6 7llt]6lOV. 


Then, 


TOTS. 



So in English, ' the then Mayor.' 





THE ARTICLE. 21 


Now, 


vvv. 


Here, 


iv&dds. 


There, 


ixsT. 


Up, upwards. 


avco* 


Down, downwards, 


nazci). 


Move, 


HIVSOO. 


Crocodile, 


xQoxodeilog, ov, 6. 


Both, 


afxopco : afAcpotsQog : (the lat- 




ter often in the plur.: 




apyoreQcc ra aza, both his 




ears. Xen.) 


Life, 


@iog, ov, 6. 


This, 


ovzog, avrrj, tovto, &c. 



Exercise 5. 

l^flii doing the exercise, consider which of the adverbs comes 
nearest to the meaning of the adjective or equivalent phrase. 

29. The men of old did this. They did this the next 
day (dat.) The crocodile moves its upper jaw. The 
son of Sophroniscus has a pain 4 in both his ears. I am 
surprised at the madness of the Persians of old times. 
I wonder at the men of the present day J I admire the 
wise men of old. They love the present life. We won- 
der at the madness of our neighbours. Thepeople there z 
are astonished at the madness of those with the king. 
I am astonished at the cleverness of those who manage 
my affairs. 

Exercise 6. 

30. He had a pain (imperf) in both his knees. The 
people here admire the son of Sophroniscus. The cro- 
codile was turned into a hare (14. e). The people here 



x Of countries, avu> is used of marching into the interior; Kara), of 
marching down to the coast. 

y The now men. 

z People = persons must not be translated by <5^oj. The people 
there, ol kxeX. 



22 THE ARTICLE. 

admire my daughter and my brother's. The people 
there are doing well. I have often wondered at the wis- 
dom of our present geometers. The crocodile lays eggs. 
The king of the Scythians has a pain in 4 his lower jaw. 



§ 6. Article continued. 

31. a) To express that a person ' has a very beau- 

tiful head,' the Greeks said : ' has the head 
very beautiful/ 11 

32. b) to xaXov, is: Hhe beautiful]* 'the honorable] 

in the abstract; beauty. ia xaXd, are: 
beautiful (or honorable) things ; whatever 
things are beautiful; what is beautiful; 
or simply, beautiful things. 

Obs. We learn from (34*. b), that the first person plur. of the 
pres. subj. is used in exhortations ; and from (34*. c), that ^ is 
used with it for 'not. 3 (See 107*. 1.) 

33. d) The infinitive with the article becomes a 

substantive declinable throughout, and an- 
swering to the English 'participial sub- 
stantive' in — ing. 

34. e) Abstract nouns, and the names of materials, 

generally take the article. When a u;hole 
class, or any individual of that class, is 
meant, the noun, whether singular or plural, 
takes the article. 
34*. a) 6 qivoxeqcqq rrjv doQccv ioyyQoxdTriv fyei, the rhi- 
noceros has a very strong hide. 
b) cpevycofxevra ala^Qoi ' Sioixcofiev ra xald, let us fly 

* The article must not be used, unless it is assumed that the thing 
in question has the property, the object being only to describe of vihat 
kind it is. If the writer wished to inform us that the rhinoceros had a 
hide, which was moreover a strong one, he would not use the article. 
Thus of the crocodile : e%ei 6i teal ovv^as KapTepovs, it also has strong 
claws. 

b Thus in English, " Burke on the Sublime and Beautiful." 



THE ARTICLE. 



23 



from what is base ; let us pursue what is 
honorable. 

c) fxrj dtoixcopev ra ala^gd, let us not pursue what 

is base. 

d) to ta%v XaleTv, talking fast ; rov rayy XaXeTv,of 

talking fast, &c. ; to navrag xaxcog Xiyeiv, 
the speaking ill of every body. 

e) fj aQEii], virtue; 6 XQvoog, gold ; oi aya&oi, the 

good ; ol aeToi, eagles. 

f) to 7eXev7aiov,at last; to anb 70v§ef henceforth. 

35. Vocabulary 6. 



Rhinoceros, 
Nose, 

Horn, 
Hide, 

Strong, 

To fly from, 

Base, disgraceful, 

To pursue, 
Fast, quick, 

Talk, 

Speak, say, 

Speak ill of, 

Speak well of, 

Treat ill, behave ill to, 

Treat well, do kind offices 

to, confer benefits on, 
Elephant, 
Stag, 
Gold, 



QlVOXEQCOg, C070g, 0. 

Qig, qivog, fj {jplur. "nos- 
trils"). 
xeQctg, a7og (aog, wg), to. 
8oQci, d ag, rj. 
IcjyyQog, a, 6v. 
cpEvyco. 
aiaxQog, a, 6v : alatfcov. ui<5~ 

%L6T0g. 
dl(6xG). c 

7a%vg, ecu, v (neut. adj.= 

adv.) 
XaXsoo. 
Xeyco. 

xaxcog Xeysiv (ace.) 
£v Xt'yeiv (ace.) 
xuxoog tioieTv (ace.) 

ev noteiv (ace.) 

iXscpag, avrog, 6. 
tXacpog, ov, 6. 
IQvaog, ov, 6. 



c Literally, ' the from this' (lime). 

d Nouns in a and rj, from verbal roots, are generally oxytone. The 
abstract notion predominates in them (B.) ; the vowel of the root is 
often changed into o, as in perf. 2. (mid.) ^w, flay ; copa. 

e The jut . mid. is the more common in Attic Greek. 



24 PRONOUNS. 

Good, aya&og, q, 6v : a[X8iv(av, aoi<J- 

jog. 
Eagle, dezog, ov, 6. 

StdJKciv is also, to prosecute; (pevyeiv, to be prosecuted: Siwkciv nva 
(povov, to prosecute a man on a charge of murder; tyevyetv tydvov (un- 
derstand d'iKr)i>, cause, trial), to be tried for murder. 



Exercise 1. 

36. The elephant has a strong hide. The maiden 
has very beautiful hands. The stag has very beautiful 
horns, 12 The Persian's boys pursue what is honorable. 
Let us fly from those who pursue 1 what is disgrace- 
fid. Do not let us fly from what is honorable. Let us 
avoid {fly from) talking fast. Let us fly from the mad- 
ness of speaking ill of every body. Let us do kind 
offices to our friends. The citizens prosecute Philip 
on a charge of murder. 17 Sophroniscus was tried for 
murder. 17 Let us henceforth pursue the honorable. 
Let us not treat our (18) slaves ill. He took pleasure 
in doing kind offices to the good {Obs. 1. p. 17). The 
Scythians admire the beauty of gold. The boy won- 
ders at the horn of the rhinoceros. 



<§> 7. Article as a demonstrative pronoun. Pronoun. 

37. a) 6 \iiv — 6 dt, f this — that; the one — the other, 

&c. ol \xiv — ol 8t, these — those ; some — 
others. (More than one 6 ds may follow.) 

38. b) In a narrative 6 ds stands (once) hi reference 

f p£y, indeed; — 6£, but. Often, however, there is no considerable 
opposition between words so connected, the use of fiiv being principally 
to prepare us for a coming 6i. It need not be translated, except when 
the context plainly requires an indeed. — In translating from English 
into Greek, whenever the second of two connected clauses has a but 
the first should have a jxiv. 



PRONOUNS. 25 

to an object already named. So xcu og, when the refer- 
ence is to a person. 

39. d. 1) avrog is 'self' when it stands in the nom. 
without a substantive, or, in any case 
with one. 

2) avrog is him, her, it, &c. in an oblique 
case without a substantive. 

3) 6 avrog is ' £Ae same? 

4) cwtoV standing alone in an oblique case, 
is never 'self? except when it is the 
first word of the sentence. 

40. a) ra avra rovg ph Ivnel, rovg ds tsgnei, the 
same things pain some persons, but de- 
light others. 

b) Xvxog a\ivbv idiaxEv ' 6 ds elg vaov xarsq}vys, s a 
wolf was pursuing a lamb ; and (or but h ) 
it fled for refuge into a temple. 

c) xal og tianarrfoeig diwxei ava xgdrog, and he, 
being deceived, pursues at full speed (lit- 
erally, ' at or with force or strength'). 

d) avrog scpy, he himself said (it), avrog 6 dovlog, 
or, 6 dovlog avrog, the slave himself: 6 avrog 
dovXog, the same slave, pallov rovro qofiov- 
-fiai tj rbv -davarov avr ov, I fear this more 
than death itself, sdaxev avrotg rb tivq, 
he gave them the fire, avr op yao eldor, 
for I saw the man himself: ddov yaq av- 
t 6 v, for I saw him. 

41. Vocabulary 7. 

Same, 6 avrog, r h 6. 

Some — others, ol \iiv — ol de. 

To pain, annoy, Xvtzsoo. 

Delight, riqnco. 



5 Karatpevyo}. (2. aor.) 

h 6i is not only but, but also and, and in Homer for. It is used 
where no other particle is required, to avoid having a proposition in the 
iddle of a discourse unconnected with what goes before. It is often, 
therefore, omitted in translating into English. 

2 



26 



PRONOUNS. 



Wolf, 


IVXOQ, OV, 6. 


Lamb, 


a(Avog, ov, b. 


Fly for refuge, 


xaraqisvyco. 


Temple, 


vaog, 1 ov, 6. 


More — than, 


pallor — r\. 


To fear, 


tyoftiofxcu*. 


Death, 


fidvarog, ov, 6. 


Fire, 


nvQ, nvQog, to. 


Say, 


cprjfxL 


Give, 


did co fit. 


Sheep, 


oig, oig. 1 


Dog, 


y.vtov, uvvog, 6 et fj (m. if 




the sex is not to be spec- 




ified. R. KVV, V. v.vov). 


House, 


olxog, ov, 6. 


Deceive, 


anaTdco, Qcmardco (the lat- 




ter being stronger, to de- 




ceive thoroughly). 


At full speed, 


dvd xodrog [at force). 


Force, strength. 


xodtog, sog (ovg), to. 


Ride, 


iXavveiv (to drive on, Innov 




understood). 


For, 


ydq. 


r^ Can ydp begin 


the sentence? (No.) Can U 1 (No.) Can/uv? 


(No.) 






Exercise 8. 



42. A dog was pursuing a sheep, and it fled-for-re- 
fuge into a house. Some admire the mother ; others the 
daughter. Cyrus rides at full speed. I m myself say it. 
I admire the mother more than the daughter herself 
They will give him the gold. I will give the gold to 
(the man) himself (39. 4). I deceived the slave himself 



1 veats, Alt. 

k In act. frighten. It has /. mid. and pass. ; aor. pass. 

1 The forms in Attic Greek are ; S. o?s, ouU, oii, Stp, — D. olc, oloiv. 

P. ous } oioiv, oiai, o7as and o7g. (It is m. and/.) 
m The nom. of the personal pron. is not to be expressed. 



PRONOUNS. 27 

And they (40. c), being deceived, fly-for-refuge into a 
temple. And he, riding at full speed, flies from those 
who 1 are pursuing him. n The wolves fly at full speed. 
Let us pursue the wolves at full speed. The same dogs 
are pursuing the hares. Let us pursue them n ourselves. 
Let us not deceive our neighbour. The Persians of 
those days [[ pursued honorable things. 13 Speak well 
of those who 1 have done you kind offices. 16 



§ 8. Pronouns continued. 

43. The noun with owog, ode (this), ixstvog (that), 
takes the article ; the pronoun standing before the arti- 
cle, or after the noun. 

44. nag in the sing. without the article (= sxaarog), 
'each,'' 'every f with the article, c whole? L all.' 

45. a) ovrog 6 avriQ, or 6 avrjo ovrog [not 6 ovrog avrjo], 

this man. ixelvog 6 mvtJq, or 6 avr](j ixeivog, 
that man. avrog 6 fiaailevg, or 6 (taatlebg av- 
rog, the king himself. 

b) n a a a noltg, every city ; naoa r\ noltg, the whole 

city, all the city. 

c) allot, others ; ol allot, the others ; ol ersQot, the 

others (with a stronger opposition), the other 
party. 

d) rj allrj xcoqa, the rest of the country. 

e) 7zolloi, many ; ol nollot, the many, the mul- 

titude, most people. 

46. Vocabulary 8. 

Others, allot. 

The others, ol allot. 



n The ace. of the pronoun is seldom expressed when the person 
meant is quite obvious. 

In the plur. iravres must have the article* when there is reference to 
particular objects : when not, the usage is variable. 



28 



PRONOUNS. 



The other party, 
The rest of. 

Many, much, 

Great, 

The many, the multitude, 

Most people, 

Every, each, 

The whole, all, 



01 8T6Q01. 

6 allog (agreeing with its 

subst.) 
nolvg, p noVkr], nolv. 
peyag, fAtydlrj, [ze'ya. 

ol nolloi 

nag (in the sing, without 

the art.) 
nag 6, or 6 nag (in the sing. 
PI . ndvrsg : see note on 44.) 

This, ovrog: ode. 

That, exeTvog, rj, o. 

Man, avrjQ, Soog : av&ownog, ov, 6. 

To cut, 78[tvoo, q (of a country to rav- 

age or lay waste by cut- 
ting down its trees, crops, 
&c.) 

The enemy, ol nofo'pioi (adj.) 

Obs. dvfip T (vir), man as opposed to woman, and used in a good 
sense. avOpoiiros (homo), man as a human being, opposed to other 
animals; and often used, like homo, when contempt is to be ex- 
pressed. 



Exercise 9. 

I^Obs. With 'this,' 'that,' the order is, 
Pron. Art. 

(or,) Art. Noun, 



Noun. 
Pron. 



47. The enemy laid waste the whole country. The 
other party are laying waste the rest of the country. 
My brother is pursuing the same Persians. I admire this 
city. I often admired that city. The many do not (ov) 
admire the beauty of wisdom. The king himself is lay- 
ing waste the rest of the country. A certain man was 
pursuing his slave ; bat he fled for refuge into the upper 1 1 



P Tr6\vg, 7roXXr/, -no\v, 

TToWov, TToAAr/f, 7ToAAoi), &C. 

V T£[JLI>0), T£/id5, TCTfJUJKa, CTC/XOl/, CT^OrfV. (RoOtS '. T£JJt^ Tfxe.) 

r See Jelfs Greek Gram., Vol. I. p. 81, 97. 



PRONOUNS. 29 

city. The others were turned into eagles. I will give 
the whole egg to my brother. He gave all the water to 
his (18) horses. I feel pain 4 in every part of my head 
(in my whole head). Most people rejoice when 5 their 
friends are wealthy. The other party manage the 
affairs of the city. 



§ 9. Pronouns continued. 

48. a) In the reflexive pronouns (iftavtov, &c.) s the 
avrog is not emphatic. To express 'self emphatically, 
avTog must precede the pronoun, avibv <js, &c. 

49. b) ' Own' is translated by the gen. of the reflex- 
ive pronoun (savzov). 'His' by the gen. of avrog. (So 
1 their' by gen. plur.) 

50. c) savrov is often used (like sui) in a dependent 
sentence, or in a clause having ace. and infin .^ for the 
subject of the principal sentence.* 

But the simple avrov is often used, or I (o£, ol, &c. vcpeTs, <r^%, 

oi is never simply reflexive in Attic prose, but is confined to 
this kind of reflexive meaning. (B.) u The forms oy, 2 occur in 
Plato, but not in the other great Attic prose-writers. (Kr.) 

51. a) e&& aavrov, accustom yourself. 

b) fiW ndvzag zovg av&qconovg ra savrav ayanav, 
he said that all men loved* their own things. 



6 G. ifjLavrov, ijxavTrjg, 

A. hfJLavTOv, ifxavrnv. 

t Of course only when it cannot be mistaken for the subject ot the 
infin. or dependent verb. '_ 

u This passage is misconstrued, and so made incorrect, by tne &ng. 
Translator of Buttmann, p. 325. 

v It is an idiom of our language to use a past tense m a sentence 
beginning with 'that 3 (and other dependent sentences), when the verb 
on which they depend is in a past tense. The pres. infin. must be used 
in Greek, whenever the action to be expressed by it did not precede the 
time spoken of. 



30 



PRONOUNS. 

c) ropiest tovg noliiag vnrjQereTv iavrcp, he thinks 

that the citizens serve him. 

d) GTQarriyog™ tjv SevoxXeidqg, ni[inrog avrog, 

Xenoclides ivas their general [himself the 
fifth = ) with four others. 

52. Vocabulary 9. 

eiOiGfxai or eiw&a (a perf. 2. 
from e&co : xazd to elm&og, 
neut. part. accg. to ray, 
his, &c. custom ; as my, 
his, &c. custom was.) 

ay an dm : also, with ace. or 
dat. "I am contented 
with." 

VOUL^CO. 

vnrjQEiecaJ 
CTQairjyog, ov, o. 

OTQaTT]y803. 

TQiTog, t], or. 

zeraoTog, i], ov. 

nag rig. 

naQ-eifxi. {ra naqovxa pres- 
ent things, circum- 
stances, or condition.) 



Accustom, 

I am accustomed, 



Love, like, am fond of, 



Think, am of opinion, 

Serve, perform service, 

General, 

To command fan army), 

Third, 

Fourth, 

Every body, 

I am present, here, &c, 



To perform this service, virrjpzTcXv tovto. 
u these services, v-rrrjpeTeTv ravra. 



Exercise 10. 

53. Accustom yourself to confer benefits upon 16 the 
good. Every body loves his own things. I accustom 
myself to serve the state. Cyrus, as his custom was, 
was riding at full speed. I will give the gold to you 



w From arpar6g army, ayoj lead. 
x Augment, i, e\di$ov, eidta/tai. It is used in pass, 
y vtt6j IplrnSj rower, properly, to row for a person, or at his com- 
mand. 



NEUTER ADJECTIVE. 31 

yourself (48). Philip was their general with two others. 
He thinks that the citizens have conferred benefits upon 
him. Accustom yourself to be contented with your (18) 
present condition. Let us not treat those ill who 1 have 
done good to us. He accustomed himself (imperf.) to 
perform these services for the good. I will perform this 
service for you. He has a 12 large head. I am accus- 
tomed to perform you these services. 



<§> 10. Of the Neuter Adjective. 

54. a) In Greek, as in Latin, the neut. plur. of an 
adjective is used without a substantive, where we 
should rather use the singular. 

55. b) The neut. article with a gen. case, is used 
in an indefinite? way for any thing that relates to, or 
proceeds from, what the gen. expresses. 

56. c) Neuter adjectives are used adverbially ; and 
generally, 

The neut. sing, of the comp. ) serve also for comp. 
The neut. plural of the sup. ) and sup. of the adv. 

57. d) When an adjective is the predicate, it is often 
in the neut. singular, when that is not the gender, or 
even number, of the subject. 

This can only be, when the assertion is made of a class or gener- 
al notion ; not of a particular thing. It may be supposed to agree 
with thing understood. 

58. e) nolvg (jtltwv or nlucov, Tzletarog), superlatives, 
and the adj. raxiavg z stand in the gender of the gen. that 
follows them, when we might have rather expected the 
neut. adj. (Not to nolv rijg ytjg, but fj nollrj.) 

59. a) dns ravta, he said this. 

z Ace. plur. els and eas. G. ovs in later writers. 



32 



NEUTER ADJECTIVES. 



b) r« r wv dear cpegeiv dtl, we should bear what 

conies from the gods. 

c) aocpcortQov noiug, you act more wisely. I 

alti^iGT a diezelsaev, he lived in a most 
disgraceful way. 

d) r) aQsrrj &gtiv ett aiver 6v, virtue is praise- 

worthy. 

e) r) no llrj rrig %MQag, the greater part of the 

country. 6 ypiovg %ov %oovov y half the 
time. 



60. Vocabulary 10. 
We ought, should or must, 
To bear, 
Said, 
To live, 



Praiseworthy, 
To praise, 
To act, 
Forwardness, zeal, 



Peloponnesus, 



dsT* (oportet). 

Cp?QCO. b 

el7iov. c 

dia-7 eleco, iaco (properly fin- 
ish, go through ; fiiov or 
Xqovov understood). 

maivziog, q, ov. 

maiv£to. d 

7TOISQ). 

rb TToo&vpov (adj. for r) ttqo- 

fivfAia). 
TleXonovvriaog, ov, r). 



Exercise 11. 

61. The others laid waste half the country. The 
other party 19 act more wisely. The rest 19 of the 
Scythians act more wisely. He spent half his life in a 
most disgraceful way. The others are doing betters 
The rest of the citizens are doing very well. e The 
king of the Persians has ravaged the greater part of the 



a ccl ( — Scot, Ser], Self, 6iov) y def/aci. Imperf. eSst. 

b 0£f)6j, o'iVoj, cvf]vo^a\ aor. 1. i'lieyxa. Pass. ivz^r](yo\xai and oiadfiao- 
fiaiy evfivey/jiai, Y]vi-)(0r]v. 

c tl-rrov (cirri, &c.) an aor. 2. Also e7ira aor. 1., of which siirare, rf- 
7rdrw, and also cixag, are used by Attic writers. 

d — etroi (Xen. but generally eo-inai,) yvsaa, rjveKa, rjpcOr)v : but jjvr}[Aai. 

e By 56 the compar. and superl. of good must here be used. 



SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 33 

Peloponnesus. Wisdom is praiseworthy (57. d). The 
son of Sophroniscus 9 said this (54. a). Let us bear 
what comes from the gods. The son of Philip will 
command (the army) with three others. 21 Accustom 
yourself to bear what comes from the gods. One ought 
to like one's own things. A certain man had a hen. 
Eagles 15 have a 12 very beautiful head. 



§11. Subject and Predicate. 

62. a) The nom. neut.plur. generally has the verb 
in the singular ; but often not b) when persons or liv- 
ing creatures are spoken of. 

63. c) The verb 'to be' is often omitted. 

64. a) to, Jooa tqsx s l > the animals run. toov ovrcov 
r« [it'v iativ iqj r^lv, ik $ ovx £qp' tjfuv, of existing 
things some are in our power } and others are not in 
our power. 

b) roadde e&v?] iatQarevov, so many nations went 
on the expedition. 

c) ra roov cpiltov xoiva, the property of friends is 
common. 

65. Vocabulary 11. 

Animal, £aov, ov, to. 

Run, ?Q£%w f (dQafx). 

In a person's power, ml with the dat. of the per- 

son [in ipol, in my pow- 
er ; in ipov, in my time ; 
im rov nargog, in my fa- 
ther's time). 

So many, rooog, rocjoods, toaovrog. 

Nation, s&vog, eog, to. 

Go on an expedition, atQajevro. 

f TjOe^o), dpapovixiii SsSpdiirjKa^ edpajiov. 

2* 



34 



SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 



id ovra (part, from elfil. rq> 
ovri, in reality, really.) 



Existing things, things, 

that are, or (54, a) what is, 
To go away, 
Now (= already, at once, 

without waiting any qdrj. 

longer), 

(Words after which the omission of the copula ( { is' ' are 1 &c.) 5 is 
very common.) 



Ready, 

Disappeared, vanished, 

(It is) time, 

Easy, 

Hard, difficult, 

Worthy, 

Possible, 

Impossible, 

Necessity, 

Lawful, 

&c, &c. 



sroi/biog, t], ov. 
WQovdog, 1 7], ov. 

WQCi. 

Qadiov (neut. of gadiog). 

Xalenov (nent. of ictlmog). 

d^tog, a, ov. 

dvvarog, r\, ov, 

ddvvarog, og ov. 

avdyxrj (=it is necessary). 

defiig, &8[Mdog, r\ (=fas). 



Exercise 12. 

66. These things were not in my power. These 
things took place in our fathers' times. This (plur.) is 
good. It is now time to go away. They are ready to 
do this. The judge is worthy of death {gen.) The 
boys have disappeared; 11 the father has disappeared. 
Many nations will go on the expedition. It is easy to 
the wise, to bear what comes from the gods. 25 It is ne- 
cessary to bear what comes from the gods. Let us go 
away at once. Socrates, the son 9 of Sophroniscus, was 
really wise. For it is not lawful to speak ill of the gods. 
It is hard to deceive the wise. 



s el/jii has a jut. meaning, and is more common in this sense than 
Vhzvaoyai, jut. of cp^o/^at. In the moods it is used as pres. or jut. (B.) 
h Afterwards 'iroinog. 

1 From npo, b66s '• only found in nom. of all numbers. 
k Begin with adj. Have, has, are not to be translated. 



ON THE MOODS. 85 



§ 12. On the Moods. 

67. a. 1) The moods of the aorist do not refer to 
past time, and are therefore rendered by 

. the present in English. 

2) The moods of the aorist express moment- 
ary^ actions; those of the present, con- 
tinued ones. 

3) But the participle of the aorist does refer 
to past time, neocov, having fallen. 

68. a) \iri when it forbids, takes the imperative of 
the present, the subjunctive of the aorist. m 

[In doing the exercises, consider (1) whether a sijigle 
definite action is spoken of; or a continued action, or 
habit. Having thus determined whether the aorist 
should be used, or the present, (2) if 'you use the present, 
you must also use the imperative ; if the aorist, the sub- 
junctive.] 

Of course the subj. of the present must be used for the first person 
(when the present is to be used), as the imperaL has no first person. 

69. £d=> The optative is the regular attendant of the 
historical tenses. Hence, 

70. b) The relatives and particles (except the com- 
pounds of &v) see 77,89), which take the subjunctive, 
after the present said future, take the optative after the 
historical" tenses. 

The optative is thus, in fact, the subjunctive of the historical tenses, 
answering to the imperfect and pluperfect of the Latin subjunctive. 

71. c) So the particles and pronouns, which go with 
the indicative in direct, take the optative in oblique 
narration. 

1 Momentary is here used in a somewhat loose way., to express sin- 
gle definite actions, not contemplated as continuing. 

m fjfi with imperative present tells a man to leave off what he has 
already begun : prj with aor. subj., tells him not to begin the action. (H.) 
This is a consequence of the distinction pointed out, not a new dis- 
tinction. 

n i. e. Imperf., aorists, and pluperf. 

° Oblique narration {sermo obliquus) is when the opinions, asser- 



36 



OxN THE MOODS. 



72. a) fi?j xfo'Tire, do not steal (forbids stealing gener- 
ally). 
m xMytSt do not steal (forbids stealing in a 
particular instance). 

b) { fidget ft i, Iva t'd co, I am here to see. 
( 7TaQrjv, iW id 01 in, /was there to see. 
f ovx fyco (or ovx olda), onoiP TQanrnpcu, I dorCt 

know which way to turn myself, 
ovx zfyov (or ovx ijdeiv), onoi* TQanoifxriv, I did 
not know which way to turn myself. 

c) riQsro, si ovrag tx°h he asked if it were so. 
Ue%8 [xoi, oil rj odog cpSQOi eig rrjv nohv, r\vmq 

0Q(pri v,he told me that the road led to the 

city which I saw. 
73. Vocabulary 12. 
Steal, xtimco. 

1 heft, xlonfi, rig, r). 

Know, fo a#q 

Whither, no i . ([ n dependent ques- 

________ t * ons o noi -) 

tions, &c of another are related in the third person. « He said that he 
thought, &c. --« He said, ' / think/ &c." would be in direct narration 
{sermo rectus). 

? In dependent (or indirect) questions, the regular rule is to use, 

not rroaos J ttoios J 7rr,\iKog ; 

(quantus ?) (qualis ?) how old or big ? 

but briaos, biroios, bnr,\i K o S . 

bonotnori; vol; ttov} «fr • nodev, nPj; 

when ? whither ? where ? how ? whence ? how ? whither ? 
Dut orrore, Snot, ottov, 6Vco ? , bnoBeu, fa n . 

bo, also, not Ws, but Sang. But the direct interrogates are very 
oiten^used m t/i^rcci questions, as: fjptora _« T i s dr,v, he asked me who 

q P '. ope v rly a per f' from dSoi > s ee. I have perceived=I know. 
oid a, \ff6i, eideiqv, did, eidevai, eiScog. 
Plup. Jjfeig. Fut. ehoixai (eiSrjau) . 
Perf. oTSa, 7ada, o7Se \ Xctov, Xarov | Xcpisv. Hare, Xadai. 
Plup. b. rjdeiv, Att. js n (from ffat). 

fieis, commonly fjfciada, Att. rjSwda. 

ijn % Att. fiSctv, and jj6n. 

P. jjScinev and rjafjiev. 
M'lTS, 'pjarc. 



yfcaav, 



V 



cav. 



ON THE MOODS. 37 

i urn TQ87TCQ (Mid. turn myself). 

i as k riQoMv, aor. 2 : (^wraw used 

for the other tenses.) 
toad, ^o?, ov, ^ 

,ead(ofaroad), fk*- 

5 ee bgdco.* 

p be so ovtws ^ ( t0 have * Acm " 

selves so.) 

To be found or brought in ^-„ a4 . ( w [ X h gen.) 

guilty, 
Battle, "««> W» ?• 

That, in order that, tva (.== ^0 

That, after verbs of telling ori, (with iwdic. unless the 
&c.,forLatinaccw5.with optative is required by 
tn/iniffoe, 71. The aca with iw>. 

also occurs. See 91. 6.) 

For what is e " %& > sometimes used? {to know: so 'non habeo quo 
me vertam') What are strengthening particles, and with what 
words are they often used 7 ( y l, of Zeas£ ; tte'p, wry ; «5f7, now- 1 ney 
are frequently used with relatives.) 

Exercise 13. 

74. I am here to see the battle. I was here to see the 
battle. Do not pursue what is disgraceful. 13 The 
road leads to Athens. The boy says that the road leads 
to Athens. The boy told me that the road led* to Athens. 
Do not deceive your father (of a particular instance of 
deceit). The Persian was found guilty of murder. I 
asked him what he was doing. He asked me who I 
was. Who are you (plur.) ? I asked them who they 
were. He told me that Xenoclides commanded them 

r The tenses supplied from the roots ott, elS: tyaw, Hiponai, ewpa*a, sw- 
panat (fypai), <ty0„*. Imp. idpw. For aor. bUov, 16s, &c. and dSdpnv, 
i6ov, &c. . t ,« 

» aYicKoimi {am taken or caught), AXwo-o/xai, sa\uK<i. JLor. eaMov 

(fjXwi/), a\oir,v, aXoj (wj, &C.), aXwi/at, aXofo. 

The a is Zor^ in' the augmented, s/*or* in the unaugmented iorms. 
1 See note on 51. b. 



38 ON THE MOODS. 

with two others. 21 Do not steal these things. Do not 
accustom yourself to deceive your mother. I was there 
to fight. He asked me whether (e^ these things were 
so. 



§ 13. The Moods continued. 
On si and av. Conditional Propositions. 

Introductory remarks on av. 

75. This particle (of which Hermann considers the 
real meaning to be by chance, perhaps ; but Hartung, 
else, otherwise) gives an expression of contingency and 
mere possibility to the assertion. 

76. Its principal use is in the conclusion of a hypo- 
thetical sentence ; and when it stands in other sentences, 
it often refers to an implied condition. 

77. It coalesces with several particles, so as to form 
one word with them. 

ThUS With 81, 0T8, 8778l8i] 

it forms lav, t\v, av, orav, Ineiddv. 

78. The av = lav, el av, regularly begins the sen- 
tence, and is thus distinguished from the simple av, 
which must have some words before it. 



79. el (like our 'if) has the two meanings of if* and 
whether : it goes with the indie, or optative ; but not, in 
good writers, with the subjunctive. — (See example in 
72. c.) 

80. a) Possibility without any expression of uncer- 

tainty ; el with indie, in both clauses. 

* See 334. 



ON THE MOODS. 



39 



b) Uncertainty with the prospect of decision; 

lav with subjunctive in the conditional, and 
the indie (generally the future) in the con- 
sequent clause. 

c) Uncertainty without any such accessary no- 

tion: si with the optative in the conditional 
clause, and &v with the optative in the con- 
sequent clause. 
d) Impossibility, or belief that the thing is not 
so : si with imperfect or aorist indie, in the 
conditional clause ; av with imp erf. or aor- 
ist indie, in the consequent clause. 

1) The imperfect is used for present time, or when the time is 

qU 2\ t 7f n bothVondition and consequence refer to past time the aor- 
ist must be used, at least in the consequent clause ; unless the con- 
sequence is to be represented as continuing. 
3) The condition may refer to past, and the consequence to pres- 

6nt e;Mv, ov K Sv ^arov^iflhad (then) been persuaded, I should 
not (now) be out of health. 

81. a) ( si i^QovtTjae xal ijargaxpsv, if it has thunder- 

} ed it has also lightened. 

{ nlv i 'ixeig, 8 6 g, if you have any thing, give 

it. 

b) sdv it %i^\isv, dwvojisv, if we have any 

thing, we will give it. 

c) si rig ravta agar tot, fisya p av cocpslrjvsie, 

if any one should do this, he would do me a 
great service. 

d) si ti efyev, ididov av, if he had any thing," he 

would give it. 
si ii fo%sv, edcoxsv av, if he had had any 
thing, he would have given it. 

82. Vocabulary 13. 

To benefit, to do a service, wcpsleco. 
Hurt, injure, ^lanrco. 

Kill, put to death, ano-KTsivco. 



u It is implied, that he has not any thing. 



40 

ON THE MOODS. 

Speak the truth, <^ /lW 

Talent, (»«, fi»*S, * 

xNot on y_but also * — T' % ? 0> . 

Even Lmiai t>o, ovxoTf—uXXcoicci. 

Noteven, ^ 

peyMa, pupa, pelfa T & piyiaTa. y ' 

Exercise 14. 

83 If I have any thing, 8 " I will give it. If you 
were to do this you would confer the greatest benefit 
upon me (c). If any one should do this, he would 
greatly injure i me If I had a mina, I would give it to 
the slave. If he had had even three talents, he would 
have given them to his brother. If any one were to do 
(c) this, he would do the greatest 28 injury to the state 
If you speak the truth (i. e. if w hat you say should 
V i ove true), I will give you three talents. If the wise 
were to manage the affairs of the state, they would con- 
fer a great benefit 28 upon all the citizens. If this be 
so, < I will go away at once. If you were really wise 
you would admire the beauty of virtue. I am here to 
see not only the city, but also the whole 20 country If 
the citizens were wise, they would have killed not only 

fnZ ' f ' V lS ° u PhHip - If y° U should be f™* 
guilty of murder, the citizens will put you to death 



§ 14. The Moods continued. 

84. a) The optative with «V is equivalent to our 
may, might, would, should, &c. 

son " kf.Tnll T b "i 7 d ° "/°r f' i^nderstood: I saw, not that my 
abo' &c SaW ( n0t SaV) that {1 Saw) m ? son > but 



ON THE MOODS. 41 

It properly refers (as our would, &c.) to a condition supposed. 
Thus in (86*. a), ^1 would gladly see ft* ifil were possible; in (86*. b) 

i l one could not,' &c. if one were to look. 
85. b) The optative with av is often translated by- 
he future. 

The Attics were peculiarly fond of expressing themselves in a 
doubtful way ; of avoiding all positiveness in their assertions ; and 
hence the optative with av is used of the most positive assertions. 

86. c. d. e.) av gives to the infinitive and the parti- 
dple the same force that it gives to the optative. 

Thus (as in 86*. d) the injin. gets the force of an infin. future.™ 
This is the common way of expressing the future after verbs of 
hoping thinking, trusting, praying, knowing, confessing, &c, when 
it is dependent on a condition expressed or implied. 

Of a positive unconditional expectation, &c. the infinitive without 
av is to be used ; the future, if future time is to be strongly mark- 
ed ; if not, the aor. or present, according as the action is momentary 
or continued. (K.) 

86*. a) l]dt(og av d^eaaai^rjv ravza, /would gladly 
see this , or, i" should like to see this, av- 
&QCQnov avaidearegov ova av rig svooi, a 
man, or, one could not find a more shame- 
less fellow. 

b) ova av cpsvyoig, you will not escape. 

c) 7106OV av oi'ei evqsiv ra oa xifyara tzcoXov- 

fisva ; how much do you think your pos- 
sessions would fetch (literally, find) if 
they ivere sold ? 

d) ova eanv era avdoa av dvvrj&ijvai tzote anavra 

ravza noa^ai, it is not possible that one man 
should ever be able to do all this. 

e) ralla* aiconoj, tto/J! av tjcov dnuv, I hold my 

tongue about the rest, though /should have 
much to say. aizu (mg&ov, cag TZEQiyevops- 

w ypa<bnv av=scripturum esse. 

ysypatpivai av= scripturum fuisse. 
ypdxpai av=(a) scripturum fuisse, or 

as pres. (b) scripturum esse, 
ypaxpetv av= script urum fore. (K.) 
ypaxpav av is proved, I think, to be correct by Hartung, against Por- 
son, Hermann, &c. Kuhner and Rost both agree with Hartung. 
For to. aXka. 



42 



ON THE MOODS. 



vog av\ tS)v 7zolefA,icov, he asks for pay on 
the plea that lie could then conquer his 
enemies. 



87. Vocabulary 14. 

1 Would (or should) like 
to ' (how trans- 
lated?) 

See, behold, 

Shameless, 

Shamelessness,impudence, 

Find; (of things sold) fetch, 

Possession, 

Acquire, get, 

Sell, 

Can, am able, 

How is Ht is possible' 

sometimes expressed ? 
One, 

Hold my tongue about, 
Ask for: in mid. ask for 

myself, 
Pay, 
Conquer, get the better of, 



rjdtojg/ gladly. {rfiiot av 
, ? should like ex- 
tremely ; rfiTov av 

$, I would rather than.) 

d°euo[A,(u. 

dvaid^g, qg, sg. 

dvaidsia^ ag 3 rj. 

svqioxco.* 

xTr/i*a, h arog, to. 

xTaopcu, (perf. xs'xTtj[iui = I 
possess.) 

TTColsG). 

dvvapcu. c 

by sot w. 

sig, fiia, sv. G. ivog, piag, &c. 
oicQ7zcico, (with fut. mid.) 

air sco. 

[Aio&og, ov, 6. 
nsQiyiyvoficu, (with gen. See 
15, note 1.) 



t Literally ' as thus being -likely -to- conquer. 1 

y From h&vs, sweet. Adverbs in (as are formed by adding wg to the 

root; Kd\-6s, Ka\<og' ra^-t!?, ra^i-og, ra^f-coj. 

z The termination ia becomes eta when derived from adjectives in 
m t hy contraction with the s of the root ; dvai8m, dvai6e-og, dvaldeia. The 
a is then shortened, and the accent thrown back to the last syllable but 
two. a is an inseparable particle, meaning ' not ' in compound words. It 
generally takes v before a vowel : a, not, aid, the root of words denoting 
reverence, respect, shame, &c. 

H cvpicKW, cvpfiao, evprjKa, cvprjfxai. evpov, evpdfjrjv, evpiQrjv. Verb adj. 
cvpcrog. 

h See 8. note a. 

c Svt/afxai } dvirjcrofxai) decvvrjixai, r]hvvi]Qr\v. (2 sing. Svvaaat.) 









ON THE MOODS. 43 

Escape from, cpevyco, (ace. fut. mid.) 

Black, ptlag, awa, av. 

Flatterer, xola%, axog, 6. 

Flatter. xolaxsvco. 

Ever, at any time, 7Tozs, d 

Just, dixaiog, a, ov. 

Faithful, matog, t\^ 6v. 

How much, noGov, (neut.) 

Think, o'loiiai. e 

Hope, iXni^co. 

Exercise 15. 

88. One cannot find a more shameless flatterer. One 
cannot find a blacker dog. You will not escape from 
those who are pursuing you. If I possessed a talent, I 
would not ask you f for pay. It is not possible that you, 
being a man, should be able to deceive the gods. You 
will not deceive God, the judge of all. I should like to 
find these things. I should like to see the old geometers. 
Let us fly from the shamelessness of wicked men. You 
will not find a juster judge. Do not steal the poet's gold. 
Do not flatter. If ybu do this, you will conquer your 
enemies. How much do you think the eagle will fetch, 
if offered for sale ? I asked him how much (72, note) 
his possessions would fetch, if sold? I will ask for 
three talents, on the plea that I shall then conquer 
(86*. e) all my enemies. I hope that you will be able to 
do all this (86*. d). 



<§> 15. The Moods continued. 

89. a) The compounds of av (idv, orav, inuftav, (fee. 

d 7t6t€ ; interrog. when ? 

e o'lofxai and olfxai (2 sing, oiei), oifjaonou, o)f]dt]v. Imperf. co6j*r]v, (piLY)v, 

f See 123, arid 124. a. 



44 ON THE MOODS. 

77) regularly take the subjunctive. The 
same rule applies to relatives with av. 

90. 6) When they come into connection with past 
time or the oblique narration, they either remain \ 
unchanged, or the simple words [d, ore, mtiSq — og, ooTig, 
ovog, &c.) take their place with the optative (69). j 

90*. c. d. e) When these compounds of av, and rela- 
tives with av, go with the subjunctive of the aorist, they 
answer to the Latin future perfect {futurum exaction). 

91. a) 7zaQEGO[A.at idv xi ft/fl* (60, a ), / will come to you 

(or, be with you), if lam wanted. 

b) scprj 7TaQtoea&ai : si rid so i or dsrjaoi, he said 

that he would come, if he were wanted. 

c) tots dt], h oTav a iqi] ! noi^g, svzv%sTg, then only 

are you prosperous, when you do what you 
ought, tot e dq, ozav a %Qrj noirjorig, svTv^asig, 
then only will you be prosperous, when you 
have done k what you ought (turn demum, 
quum officia tua expleveris, felix eris). 

d) STTSidav anavTa axovarjT s, xoivaTs, when (or 

after) you have heard all, decide. 

e) diacp&eoei o,ti av Xa^ he will destroy whatever 

he takes or lays hold of (ceperit). 

92. Vocabulary 15. 

At all, ti, (neut. of rig). 

Also, y.ai. 

One ought, XQ 7 ?- 

If there is any need, or oc- , , * , „ * , 

^„ - „ J 7 SaV Tl OSTI, Or 81 Tl 0801. 

casion. i " 

Am prosperous, or fortun- , , 
ate; prosper, Evrv * sm - 

e T l=at all. idv n Set], if it should be at all necessary. 

h Then truly (and not before) =then only. 

1 XP^ (oportct) — xP e ^i XPVi XPv vai ) part. neut. (to) ^picov. Imperf. 

lXP*i v or X Q ^ V ( n °t> ^XP* 1 ) '• f ll >t. xpr/aei. 

k Properly, ' when you shall have done :' but in English a future 
action, that is to precede another future action, is generally put in the 
present or perfect tense. We do not, that is, mark that it is now fu- 
ture, but consider ourselves as removed by the * when,' &c. to the time 
of its happening. 



ON THE MOODS. 45 



■ortune, ™M> W, n- 

ear, "T 40 - 1 

hdge, decide, *&*<»• 

When, or , s - m 

'•'hen rote ' 

Then'? ^r«; # 

:, estr0 y dLaq>9etQ(o.» 

i a j ce ita/iSarco. 
Whosoever, whatsoever, o<nts-' „ , , 

Vhen after S7i£i8r h or with at; sneidav. 

(rantivai, to be present (here or there), is often used o( being present 
to Zt; where we should use ' come to you,' or 6e with you. ) 

} 

Exercise 16. 

& When the consequent verb is in the fut, how is Hf transla- 
ted 1 with what mood 7—81. b. 

93. He says that he will come, if he is wanted (91.6). 
f we do what we ought, we shall he happy. If the 
•itizens were to do- what they ought, they -would be 
Prosperous. If the citizens had done what they ought 
imperfX they would be prosperous (noio). When 1 
,ave any thilg, I will give it. When they see this, 
:hey will fear. When you have managed the affairs of 
the state well, you shall manage mine also He hopes 
that he shall (thus) be able to deceive the «?£*■£* 
am glad that the enemy are destroyed' If ^eeneroy 
had done this, they would have been destroyed The 
judge said, that he would come, if he were wanted. 

1 Fut. AKoiaouiU (but aor. 1. !«.«a), ««»«, ««w/-«'- 
- Srav when the subj. should be used with a». 
" StatbBdfia, Sia<p8c{>Ci, 6ii<p6apKa. 

o Xau'/?diw, X#o/»ai, ei'X^a. t'Xa/?ox. , nmm „ (called 

P The neut. of i.ns has sometimes a mark like a comma (called 
diastole or hypodiastole) after the o, to distinguish it from or., that. (!,«.) 



46 ON THE MOODS. 



§ 16. The Moods continued. 

94. a) The optative is used of what happened often, 
when the time spoken of is past. 

1) For pres. or future time, the relatives with av and compounds 
of av could be used. 



av 



2) To relatives av gives in this way the force of our ever. 8s av 
(== quicumque, siquis) whoever, any man who; in plur. all who. 

95. a) v7T8QeQ0v q el%Ev ottot iv darei Y d i a r q //? o i, s he 

had an upper chamber whenever he stayed 
in town. 

b) moazTEv a dossier aire*), he did what (in each 

case) seemed good to him. 

c) ovg (ftsv) id o i evrdxrcog xcu oico7zri iovzag, mrpu^ 

he used to praise those whom (at any time) 
he saw marching in good order and in si- 
lence. 

96. Vocabulary 16. 

Upper chamber, vtzeqqjov, ov, to. 

Whenever, onore. 

Stay (in a town), diazgi^co. 

It seems good, doxe? 1 (= videtur ,videntur , 

a doxu poi, what seems 
good to me : what I please 
or choose to do). 

In good order, svrdxrwg. 

Rank, id%ig, eoog,* %. 

q vxepoJov, adj. understand oiKrj/jia. vTrepdy'Cos, aioj from virep, as rra- 
rpco'Cog, o)og from Trarfip. (P.) 

r aarv is used of Athens as we use ' town ' of London. 

8 diarpifisiv, to rub (or wear) away, XP° V0V ) $' l0v (conterere tempus, 
terere vitam) Without ace. to linger, stay, &c. 

1 The imperfect of an habitual action ; translated by 'used to/ &c. 
See 2. Obs. 

u doKeto (seem and also think), 66fa, SiSoy/xat (visus sum), aor. 1. 
eSo^a. (The 3 sing. Sokcl, imperf. eSokci, So^ei, edo£e(v), SsSoKTai). 

v rao-o-co, real root ray. Hence ray-as^ra^s. Nouns in ais, via. 



ON THE MOODS. 47 

Drder, arrange, rdaaca, £00. 

Dining-room, dvc6yecov, w co, to. 

March (of a single soldier), sifii* 

Silence, oiamrj, rjg, rj. 

Horse-soldier, innevg, ecog, 6 (plur. caval- 

■ ry). 
To charge an enemy, iXavvew elg (with ace, some- 

times, mi). 



Exercise 17. 



13* What is tYiefut. of Eiraiveu ? — 60, note d. 

97. He had a dining-room whenever he stayed in 
rtown. The judge had an upper chamber whenever he 
stayed in town. I praise all whom I see (94. 1) acting 
well. The judge praised all whom he saw acting well. 
(I will do whatever (94. 1) I please. 33 Whenever he 
.took any city, he used to kill all the citizens. When I 
have taken 32 the city, I will kill all the citizens. When 
you have taken the city, do not kill the citizens. I praise 
those who march in silence. If you march in good or- 
der, I will praise you. Who would not admire cavalry 
marching (riding) in order ? The cavalry of the Per- 
sians charge the ranks of the enemy. / should like to 
see 29 cavalry charging the enemy. 



§ 17. On the Moods. 

98. The subjunctive is used in doubting questions 
either alone, or after fiovlzi, fttXeig (do you wish ?). 

So also after ovk lyu> (or olSa: 72. &), and dnopco (sco) I am at a loss, 

from verbs, denote regularly the abstract notion of the verb. Hence 
rd|is=the putting in order; but also, order, a place assigned, &c. 

w =dvu)yaiov from avw, yaTa, earth, ground. 

x elfii, ibo, (not to be confounded with si/xi, sum). 



48 ON THE MOODS. 

Ipoirco (uco) ask $r)Tco (ecu) seek. (Optat. after the historical tenses, 
72. b.) 

99. a) fiovlei? ovv axon co per ; do you, wish then, that 
we should consider (the question)? 

b) no&tv fiovlti a q £ oo \i a i ; what do you wish me 

to begin with ? 

c) n no in ; what shall I do? what am I to do? 

Tiol tQancofiai ; whither shall I turn myself? 

d) si7T(o ovv aoi to aiziov ; shall I then tell you 

the cause! 

e) vvv axovGca* av&ig — ; shall I now hear 

again — ? 



100. Vocabulary 17. 




Wish, 


fiovlofjiai, &eX(» or i&elco. 


Consider, examine, 


GX07T8G). 


Whence. 


7T0&EV. 


Begin, 


aopiiai, 


Cause, 


ai'riov* ov, to. 


Again, 


av&ig. 


Then {of inference), 


ovv. 


Am at a loss, 


anootcoS 


Seek, 


tyreo*. 


(dp' vjjtcjv, dKo cov, &c. djo|a^ej/osd (having begun withyou =) and 
you among the first ; and you as much as any body.) 



J 2. sing, of PovXofxai, which with oTrro/xai and o'lofxai always make ei 
in 2. sing. pres. (oxpet, ohi). 

2 The subjunctive used in this way (subjunctivus dubitativus or de- 
libcralivus) must not be mistaken for the future. 

a WeXto (the most general expression for wishing) denotes particu- 
larly that kind of wish in which there lies a purpose or design : conse- 
quently the desire of something, the execution of which is, or appears 
to be, in one's own power. fiovXopcu, on the other hand, is confined to 
that kind of willingness or wishing, in which the wish and inclination 
towards a thing are either the only thing contained in the expression, 
or are at least intended to be marked particularly. Hence it expresses 
a readiness and willingness to submit to what does not exactly depend 
upon oneself. — (Butt. Lexilogus, Eng. Trans. 194.) 

b Properly adj. 

c From a, not, -nopoq, passage, outlet. 

d The dptdfxcvos must be in the case of whatever it refers to. 






ON THE MOODS. 



Exercise 18. 



fjf After what tenses must the opt be used in dependent sen- 
tences ? 

101. What shall I say? Do you wish, then, (that) 

nq should go away? What shall we do? Do you 

jyrish, then, that we should tell you the cause? Do you 

vish that I should hold-my-tongue-about this ? Do you 

vish, then, that I should begin ? All men, and you as 

| nuch as any body, praise this man. This eagle has a 12 

>,)lack head. They praise not only 28 the mother, but also 

he daughter. Not only you, but also your friends, will 

prosper, if you do this. We must bear what fortune 

sends (what comes from for time 25 ). You yourself shall 

iiear. I am at a loss what (72, note p) to do. They are 

it a loss which way to turn themselves. They did not 

enow which way to turn themselves. 



§ 18. The Moods continued. 



ex- 



I 102. a) eUt £oi (or far.), * n ««,W- 1 Com e 

b) a r i qp h ecprj dovvai av. \ ^^ {n gl 

C) ei z i u%ev, Ecprj oovvai av. ) r 

103. a) When conditional propositions become de- 
pendent on another verb, the consequent 
clause is in the infinitive. 

b) Instead, therefore, of the optative with av (in 
81. c) we shall have the infin. with av. 

c) Instead of the imperfect or aorist with av (81. 
d) we shall have the present or aorist infin. 
with av. 

104. a) Instead of the indie, future (81. b) we shall 
have the infin. future ; and el with opta- 
tive instead of lav with subj., if in connec- 
tion with past time. 



Also ell n I'^et (or £%ot), ecprj Saiaeiv av. See 86. note w. 

3 



50 OV AND 117]. 



105. Thus where we should have had in the conse- 
quent clause, 

, { noiol\l av, { TTOirjaaip av, 
aoirjGCQ, j l no l ovv av, ( moirjaa av, 

we shall have, 

rtoirjceiv, noiuv av, noiiqaai av, 7T87ioit]X8vai av. 



Ttsnoirjxoifji av, 

i7tS7TOlt]X8lV CCV, 



Exercise 19. 

106. He said that, if you were to do this, you would 
do him the greatest service. 28 I said that, if any one 
should do this, he would greatly injure me. He said 
that, if he had a mina, he would give it to the slave. 
He said that, if any one were to do this, he would do the 
greatest injury 28 to the state. He said that he was there 
to see the battle. How much do you think that your 
horses would fetch, if they were sold (86*. c) ? Who 
would not wonder at the shamelessness of this basest 
flatterer ? He told me, that his daughter had very beau- 
tiful hands. 12 I should extremely like to see 29 the wise 
men of old. 11 If the Persians of the present day 11 were 
wise, they would be doing better. I should wish to be 
contented with what comes from the gods. 15 



§ 19. ov and \ii\. 

107. 1) ov denies independently and directly. 

2) \ir\ does not deny independently and directly, 
but in reference to something else ; to some 
supposed case, condition or purpose ; or in 
the expression of some fear, solicitude, or 
care. 
107* 1) \iy\ is used in all prohibitions (see 32. Obs.) 
2) With all conditional particles, el, lav (jqv, av), 



j 



01) AND fir;. 51 

oiav, s7T8iddr, &c, and with or 8, bnors, 
'when? if a condition is implied (111. d). 
3) With all particles expressing intention or 
purpose ; iva, oncog, cog, &c. 
Note. — In the same cases the compounds of ur\ will 
be used when required. 

108. But ov is used with on, cog (that) : and also with 
insi, meibri (when, after, and as causal conjunctions, as, 
since), because they relate to actual facts. 

109. a. h.) ov is also (generally) used when the 
opinions, &c. of another person are stated in oblique 
narration. 

For though these seem to be dependent, they are only distinguish- 
ed from direct assertion in form. 

110. c) In negative propositions, positive pronouns 
and adverbs should be translated into Greek by the cor- 
responding negative forms. 

Hence the particles for neither — nor are to be used for either — or 
after a negative ; and no, nobody, nowhere, for any, anybody, any- 
where, &c. (See note t " Questions on the Syntax. § 19.) 

111. a) ovh i&sleiv f yrjoiv, he says that he does not 
choose. 

b) vofAi&i ov xulbv ehai, he thinks that it is not 

honorable. 

c) ov dvvarat o v x sv Xtyziv, ovz 8v noiuv rovg cpl- 

lovg, he cannot either speak well of his 
friends, or treat them well. 

d) ovk i'Sjqv sioel&elv naqa %bv azQarrjyov, 07X0X8 \ir\ 

G%ola^oi, persons were not allowed to go in 
to the general, when he was not at leisure. 
(Here a condition is implied: if he was not 
at leisure at that time.) 

112. Vocabulary 18. 

Nobody, ovdsig, [Atjdsig, -pia, -&v. 

i Not a single person, ovds slg, p^ds elg. 



f Of cdsXio, de\oi (see 100, note a), the former is the common prose 

form '. WeXoj, — fjaoj, — rjKa. 



52 



OV AND [X,rj. 



No longer, 

Not even, 

Neither, nor, 

Neither, nor yet, 

Both, and, 

Unless, 

Go into, 

Go away, 

Company (= intercourse 

with), 
Bid, order, 

One is allowed {licet), 
To be at leisure, 
Leisure, 



OVX8TI, flTJXSTlJ 

ovds, firfii. 

OVT8 OVT8 I flTjTS [IT]T8. 

0VT8 — ovd8l [1^X8 fAt]d£. 

v.ai — v.ai, or %& — nal. 

si \ir\. 

slaeQxoficu. 

dfiillu, ag, rj. 

8<;86Tl. 
G^olaQcO. 

cxolrj (o^oAjJ, slowly : with 
a verb = am slow to do a 
thing, &c.) 



Obs. ri — kcli is very often used, where we should only use 'and.' 
— The notions are thus brought into closer connection, and the re 
prepares us for the coming kolL 



Exercise 20. 
f^ 3 When should py kIstttc be used 1 when jxrj K^expys 1 72. 

113. I will go away (65, note g), that I may not see 
the battle. Let us no longer pursue what is disgrace- 
ful. 13 He told me, that the road did not lead to Athens 
(108). Do not think, that the citizens serve you. If you 
do not do what you ought (91. c), you will not prosper. 
No longer accustom yourself to deceive your father. I 
will not take it, unless you bid (me). Let no one steal 
this. Let not a single person go away. He says that 
the boys do not wish to go away. Let us not fly-from 
the company of the good. He said that, unless the citi- 
zens performed him this service 22 , he would lay waste 
the rest' 9 of the country. I shall be slow to do that. 35 



8 en is yet, still ; with negatives, any longer. 

k £p%0fxai) eXevcoiiai, £\fi\vda, (rj\vdov) rj\&ov. See 65. note g. 



VERBALS IN 780Q. 53 



$ 20. Verbals in riog. 

114. These verbals are formed both from trans, and 
intrans. verbs: and also from mid. {deponent) verbs, 
since they are sometimes used in a passive meaning. 

115. a) They are passive, and take the agent in the 
dative ; but they also govern the object in the same case 
as the verbs from which they come. 

116. a) When used in the neuter (with the agent in 
the dat. omitted), they are equivalent to the participle in 
das used in the same way, and express: 'one mast, 
ought? &c. ; 'we, you, <fcc. must, ought? &c. ; or, 'is to 
be? &c. 

117. b) When formed from transitive verbs, they may 
also be used in agreement with the object, the agent 
being still in the dative. Here, too, they exactly agree 
with the participle in dus. 

118. Two peculiarities in Attic Greek deserve notice : 

1. The neut. plur. is used as well as the neut. 

sing. 

2. The agent is sometimes put in the accus. 

as well as the object. 

119. c) When a verb has two constructions with* 
different meanings, the verbal adjective sometimes has 
both : thus nsiarsov with accus. has the meaning of per- 
suade (nsi&siv rivd); with the dat. that of to obey 
(nsi&sa&ai * Tin). 

120. a) G. ini#v\iriiiov sari rrjg uQSTjjg, we, you^ 

&c. should desire virtue. 
D. in ixeiQTjteov sari rq> 8oyq),we,you,&,c. 

should set about the work. 
A. xoXaar sov sari rov ncuoa, we, you, &c. 
should punish the boy. 
t \ 5 a,, v , ) you should 

b) awrjteov «m cm ryaQeryv, f % ultivat evir- 
aax?]r sa san aot rj ccQsrrj, (, 

1 Perf. 2. (or mid.) TtitroiOa, I trust, or feel sure : I am persuaded. 



54 VERBALS IN Ttog. 

c) TTEiGT&ov zgtIv avrov, we must persuade him. 
7isio7£ov iatlv avr% we must obey him. 

N. B. These examples may all be translated passive- 
ly. Virtue should be cultivated, &c. 



121. Vocabulary 19. 
To practise, exercise, culti- , , 

vate. a ™™' , 

Desire im-d-vfjiim (gen. from mi, 

on, ftvpog, mind, passion). 
Set about, take in hand, eWj^Wj (dat. from mi, 

Work, task, production, bq?ov, ov, to.^ 

Parent, yovevg, ecog, 6. 

Attempt, endeavour, try, nuQaopai, (verb. adj. netga- j 

reog). 

Permit, suffer, idm k (verb. adj. iazeog). 

Restrain by punishment, , ,«. , f . , N 

.i_./*. xolaico, (tut. -aaoucu). 

punish, chastise, ' v r J 

Run or fly to the assistance § ^ ,_ 

of, assist in the defence ot, r * K ' 

Obs. These verbals should be formed from aor. 1 pass™ by reject- 
ing the augment, turning Qr\v into rios, and therefore the preceding 
aspirate (if there is one) into its mute (i. e. nr, kt } for <p®, %6). 

fjf Form verbals from Jew/cco pursue, <peoy<o Jly from, w^eAew 
benefit. 



Exercise 21. 

122. The great work must be set about. We must 
not shun the labour. All the citizens should confer 
benefits on the state. He said that all the citizens 
ought to confer benefits on their country (state), when 
there is any occasion. We must fly-to-the-assistance of 

k Augment i. 
1 From 0ofi cry, 0t'o> run. 

m For if the aor. 1. has a different vowel, &c. from perf. pass., the 
verbal adj. follows it, and not the perf. 



DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 55 

our country. We must set about the task of chastising 14 
the boy. If the slave had done this, it would 36 be ne- 
cessary to punish him. If the boy should do this, it 
'would be necessary to punish him. He told us, that if 
this were so, 27 we ought to set about the task. We must 
punish not only 2 * my boy, but also my brother's. 6 Pa- 
rents 15 and poets n love their own productions. He said 
that virtue should be cultivated by all. Whoever (oang 
av, 94. 2) is 32 caught, shall be punished. We must not 
be slow 35 to obey our parents. 



$ 21. Double Accusative. 

123. Verbs of taking away from, teaching, conceal- 
ing, asking, putting on or off, take two accusatives. 

124. a) OrjftaiovQ %Qq par a riTrjaav,? they asked 

the Thebans for money. 

b) ov ae aTroxovxpco tccvtcc, I will not hide this 

from you. 

c) i ov g noXsfiiovg rrjv v avv aTTScyreQ^xafiSv, 

we have deprived the enemy of their ship. 

d) diddaxovai zovg naidag (JwcpQoavvtjv, they teach 

the boys modesty {moderation or self-re- 
straint.) 

e) xov nalda i^t'dvae zbv %ir6i)va, he strip t the boy 

of his tunic. 

125. Vocabulary 20. 
Thebans, OrjfiaToi, ol 

; Money, xQW aTa ^ r <* (p'« °fXQW a )- 

n The art. must be repeated before 'poets/ or the meaning would 
be ( those who are parents and poets ;' in other words, both attributes 
would be spoken of the same subject. 

° From %?d'j//ai (see 8, note a). It is only in the plur. that it 
means money, etc. Properly, a thing used. 

P aireTadai in the mid. (sibi aliquid expetere) does not take two ac- 
cusatives, but one ace. ard irapd, or one noun and an infin. (Poppo.) 



56 



DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 



Hide, 

Ship, 

Deprive of, 

Take away from, 

Teach, 

Modesty, moderation, self- 
restraint, 

To be wise, (i. e. prudent), 
or in one's right mind, 

To be mad, 

Die, 

Mortal, 

Immortal, 

Strip, or take off, 

Put on, 

Tunic, 

Misfortune, 



XQV7Tzco, q ano-XQvnrtQ. 
vavg 9 T vewg, rj. 
anoGTZQs'co. 
acp-aiQ8CQ. B 
dlddaxoi). 1 

GWCpQOOVVT]," qg y fj. 

6G)q)Q0V8CQ. 
fiCUVOfACUJ 

Vvrjoxod™ aTio&vrjaxG). 

fivriTog, r\, ov. 

ad dvat og, og ov. 

axWco,* ) in mid. " on or off 

ivdv(o y x ) myself." 

%iTcov, y wvog, 6. 

dvCTZQayi'a, ag, r\. 



But for, 
All bat, 



Phrases. 



el I*}] did (ace.) 
Saov ov (i. e. just as much 
as not). 



vavaif vavs. These are the forms 



•3 In aor. 2. this verb has for charact. 

T vav$, K'lif, vr\i', vai)V) viJ£S, vecov, 

as used in Attic Greek. 

8 aloeu) (i7<ro), &C.), zihovj ypeOnv. 

1 didii<rK<o, SiSdi-u), -opai, SeSiSaxa. Act. I teach. Mid. I have (them 
taught. 

Q Hoxpporrvvrjv .... quam soleo equidem quum temper antiam turn 
moderationem appellare, nonnunquam etiam modes tram. (Cic.) — -rvvrj, 
abstract nouns from adj in ow (especially) and others, ecoeppuv (from 
o-cDf salvus, (bof\v mens), moderate, temperate, — prudent. 

v fjaiuofxai, fiavovjiai^ fxifxrtva (with meaning ofpres.), aor. i[xdvr]v. 

w 9i>fi(TK(o, davovfjiaii riOvri<a. h'Oauov. The perf and aor = I am dead. 

x Svo), go into, and also make to go into, — sink, enclose. Act. fut. 
and aor. with the trans meaning. Mid. Stopm, (Svcrofxai, iSvffdfirjv) en- 
close ?nyself=put on (a garment). I'dvu (Sv9i — Svvai, 60s) has also this 
meaning Hence ivSvw, put on : e^ow, put off, strip (with fut. and 
aor.); both of another : mid of myself. 

y And under-garment with sleeves, over which a mantle was worn 
out of doors. 



THE ACCUSATIVE AFTER PASSIVE, &C. VERBS. 57 

Outside, without, s^w (gen.) r« e|co, external, 

outward things. 

Externa], 6 ?£« (27). 

Within, svdov (also, in doors, at 

home ; evdov Kurakafiuv, 
to find a man in, or at 
home). 



Exercise 22. 
I^T What is the literal English of si p/ Sid 1 

126. I will put on my tunic. Do not hide your mis- 
fortunes from me. We will teach our daughters mod- 
jesty. O mother, do not teach your daughter impudence. 
We will take away this from the woman. Let us not 
teach these most disgraceful things to our boys. The 
rest of the Thebans were there to see the battle. He 
would have died 37 but for the dog. Let us not fly from 
the all but present war. I will put his tunic on the 
boy. If the enemy do this, 36 we will deprive them of 
their ship. I should have died 37 but for my faithful 
slave. This man has stript me of my tunic. If you do 
not perform me this service, 22 1 will deprive you of your 
pay. If we find him at home, we will kill him. He 
killed all who were within. Let us love the company 
of the temperate. Let us not fear external evils. 



$ 22. The Accusative after Passive and Neuter Verbs. 

127. The accus. of the active becomes the norti. of 
the pass. 

128. a) If the verb governs two accusatives, that of 
the person becomes the nomiyiative ; that of the thing 
continues to be the object of the passive verb, as in Latin. 
But also, 

129. b) The dat. of the active sometimes becomes 

3* 



58 THE ACCUSATIVE AFTER PASSIVE, &C. VERBS. 

the nom. of the passive ; the object of the active con- 
tinuing to be the object of the passive in the accusative 
(IniTQtneiv, moreveiv ziviti). 

130. d) Intransitive verbs take an ace. of a noun of 
kindred meaning ; and (as in geTv ydla) of one that 
restricts the general notion of the verb to a particular 
instance. 

e) Here the ordinary accus. of the object is found together with 
this limiting accusative. 

131. a) acpatQS&Eig* itjv agxrjv, having had his 

government taken from him. 

b) o ^congai^g mirginsrai i r\ v d i atrav, Socra- 

tes is entrusted with the arbitration ; 
Tranter ev [a ou* rovro, this is entrusted to me, 
or lam entrusted ivith this. 

c) ixxonitg r ovg 6 y>& al po vg, having had his 

eyes knocked out. 

d) guv ydla, to flow with milk ; ffp b fiiov, to live 

a life ; xivdvvsvsiv xivdvvor, to brave a dan- 
ger ; aalepov tzoIe^uv, to wage a war ; 
vnvov xotpaa&cu, to sleep a sleep. 

e) irixqae t ovg |S ag(l dgovg rrjv iv Magadan 

[jidyr]v,he conquered the barbarians in 
the battle of Marathon. 

132. Vocabulary 21. 

To commit, confide, or en- , , 

trust to, mr ? 8mt 

Entrust to, marevat (also with dat. 

only, to trust a person). 

Arbitration, diatta, qg, rj. 

Faith, niojig, ewg, rj. 

Disbelieve, disobey (a per- , , ,, . N 

son or law), v ' 

z 125, note s. 

a tyu) Triarcvonai (vrr6 rivog), I am trusted, confided in, or believed. 

b $ao), xpaopai, ireivaa, Sapacj (live, use, hunger, thirst), contract as 
into rj (not a). £0% (rjs, &c. 

t For the distinction between these words, see Index under ' en- 
trust to* 



THE ACCUSATIVE AFTER PASSIVE, &C. VERBS. 



59 



Law, 

Cut out, knock out, 
Cut to pieces, 
Government, magistracy. 



Danger, 

Brave, incur, expose one- 
self to a danger, 

Eye, 

To sleep, 

Sleep, 

Fountain, 

Flow, 

Flows with a full or strong 
stream, 

Honey, 

Conquer, 

Victory, 

Barbarian, (i. e. one who is 

not a Greek), 
To hold a magistracy or 

office. 
Milk, 

River, 



vopog, ov, o. 

ix-XG7TTCQ. 

xara-xoTiTco. 

VQM : W, n (also, begin- 
ning: ace. aQ%rjv, or xr\v 
aQxrjv, used adverbially 
for at all, or ever, after 
negatives, when an ac- 
tion is spoken of). 

mvdvvoc, ov, 6. 

xwdvvsvsiv xivdvvov. 

bcp&ctlfjiog, ov, o. 
xoifidopai (aor. -&iiv). 
vnvog, ov, 6. 
nrjyrj, rjg, r\. 

££00. c 

nolvg qeX, (the adj. being in 
the case and gender of 
its noun). 

[teXi, trog, to. 

nxdeo. 

nxy, rig, q. 

fidfiagog, ov, 6. 

(ZQXSiv aQxrjv. 

ydXa, ydlaxtog, to (R. ya- 

Xani). 
nora\iog, ov, o. 



Exercise 23. 

133. I have had the arbitration entrusted to me. He 
said, that he had had the arbitration entrusted to him (72. 
c). The eagle has had its eyes knocked out. The foun- 



c /5ccj, pvfiaopai, eppv'rjtca ', CLOT, ippviqv (flowed) ; (eppevva and p£v<TOfj.ai J 
not Attic). 



60 THE ACCUSATIVE. 

tains flow with milk and honey. If the fountains flow 
both with milk and honey, we shall become rich. 36 If the 
rivers had flowed with wine, the citizens would have be- 
come rich. If the citizens are wise, they will put him to 
death. If the citizens are mad (aor.), they will put you 
to death. You will not be able (86*. b) to disbelieve 
your mother. The rivers are flowing with a strong 
stream. The thing has all but* been done. I should 
have killed you, but for 39 your father. Sophroniscus 
had his government taken away from him. He has had 
his government taken away from him. Hares have 
large eyes. 12 Let us try to bear what comes from the 
gods, 25 We must try 38 to bear what fortune sends. 25 
He conquered the Persians in the battle that took place 
there (in the there battle). 1 will not expose myself to 
this danger. The people outside were cut to pieces. I 
asked the boy himself, whether (72. c) the river was 
flowing with a strong stream. I asked Sophroniscus 
what magistracy he held. 



§ 23. The Accusative continued. 

134. a) The accus. is used after nouns and adjectives 
where xaza, as to, might be supposed understood. 

It thus limits the preceding word to a particular part, circum- 
stance, &c. 

135. b) The accus. of a neut. pronoun or any gener- 
al expression, is often used in this way after verbs that 
would govern a substantive in another case. 

136. c) The accusative is used to express duration 
of time, and the distance of one place from another. 

137. a) xuVo b > to oodfia, beautiful in person, ^coxou- 

tys tovpopet, d Socrates by name. ttI/Jtio^ch 
rijv y.tcf,a!r(i\ I am struck on the head, ndv- 
7a uvdaifAOvti, he is happy in all respects. 



THE ACCUSATIVE. 



61 



b) ri^Q^ixai alia* ; what use shall I make of it? 

what am I e to do with it ? ovx old a o,ri ooi 
XQcopai, I don't know what use to make of 
you ; I don't know what to do with you. 

c) nolvv yoovov, a long time, TQ£ig blovg jA^vag, 

three lohole months. 7 a nolld, mostly, (for) 
most of his time, aniyei dtxa oTadiovg, it is 
ten stadia off. 
d. rovvavTiov, f on the contrary, to leyonevov, as 
the saying' is. 
138. Vocabulary 22. 



Whole, 


olog, 7], ov. 


Body, person, 


aoofAa, azog, to. 


Month, 


[atjv, [irjvog, 6. 


Name, 


bvofxa, arog, to. 


To strike, 


nh'iGGco (Att. ttItjttcq : used 


/ 


by the Attics only in 




perf act. and in the 




pass. For other tenses 




Tzardoaco, £<», is used.) 


Unjust, 


adixog, og ov. 


Do injustice to, injure. 


adiyJco {ace. of person and 




also ofthing.) 


Injustice, 


adixia, ag, ?] (ddixeiv ddixiav, 




to commit an injury). 


Staff, 


gafidog, ov, rj. 


Insult, 


v[jqi£(o (ace. : vfioiXeiv tig ri- 




vet, to act insolently to- 




wards). 


Insult, insolence, 


vfigig, eoog, fj. 


Reverence, 


uideofAcu, eaoftai, et aor. 1. 




pass.: (ace.) 


Run away from, 


aTTodidodaxcoz (ace.) 



e The subj. used as in 99. c. expresses more doubt as to what is to 
be done than the fut. 

' Z=.TO ZVOLVTIOV. 

S <5t(5jodo-/cw, dpaaojjiaii 6e6pdKa. sdpav (Spadi, dpairjv, Spw (as, &C.) Spot" 
vai, dpds). 



62 THE ACCUSATIVE. 

To have no fear of. to be tt , t , / „ v 
without fear of, ^(*'<» («cc.) 

Mild, gentle, nQaog, h TrqaeXa, nqaov. 

Disposition, ydog, sog, to. 

To be distant from, ans/co (mid. abstain from : 

gen.) 
Use, do with, %qaotiai (dat.) 

Stadium, arddiog or arddiov. 



Exercise 24. 
IGr Why is Sens used in 137. 6 ? 72, note p. 

139. The boy is of a mild disposition. He told me 
that his daughter was of a mild disposition. If any one 
of your slaves should run away from you, and you 
should take him, what would you do with him? 36 A 
certain philosopher, Socrates by name, was there, to see 
the man. Accustom yourself to have-no-fear-of death. 
I am not without fear of the king of the Persians. I 
have been struck on my head. 4 ' He struck the boy with 
a staff. Accustom yourself to reverence your parents. 
Insult nobody. The injury (nom.) which they commit- 
ted against you. We ought to do 38 what is just, 18 and 
abstain^ from what is unjust. The city is three stadia 
off. Let us avoid insolence, we must pursue what is 
just. Let us insult nobody. Let us no longer act inso- 
lently towards those who 1 manage the affairs of the 
state. 



h rpaos B. {rrpaoc, P. R. K.) takes all fern, and neut. plur. as if 
from -rrpavg, -npaeXa^ 11. pi. -rrpaia. Plur. mas. npaoi, irpaeXg '. G. izpatoyv '. D. 
7Tj0aH?, 7Tj0aco-t(j/) I A. npaovg, -irpacTg. 

» The verbal adj. from dne^eaOai is dipsKreos, a word not found in 
Passow's Lexicon, but used by Xenophon. It, of course, governs the 
gen. 



THE GENITIVE. 63 



§ 24. The Genitive. 

Obs. The fundamental notion of the genitive is separation from, 
proceeding from ; i. e. the notion of the prepositions from, out of 
(B.) 

140. a) Partitives, numerals, superlatives 3 &c. gov- 
ern the genitive. 

141. b) The genitive is used with adverbs of time 
and place. 

142. d) The genitive also expresses the material 
out of which any thing is made ; and generally such 
properties, circumstances, &c. as we should express by 
'of.' 

Obs. 1. b) Our indef. art. must be translated by the Greek (def.) 
art. in expressions like c once a day, 5 &c, where ' a' is equivalent to 
{ each. 5 

Obs. 2. e) The gen. stands after possessive pronouns in a kind of 
apposition to the personal pronoun implied. It may often be trans- 
lated as an exclamation. The gen. is also used alone, or after inter- 
jections, as an exclamation. 

143. a) ol cpQovifxoi t&v av & Qcon cov, sensible per- 

sons, ohdug 'Ellyvcov, none of the Greeks. 
7] fieyiGTTj rcov voacov, the greatest of dis- 
eases. 

b) TQig rrjg fj fxsQ ag, three times a day. nov yrjg } 

in what part of the world ? tioqqco rrjg tj li- 
te tag, far advanced in years. 

c) sdowa aoi t car %q?] par cov, I gave you (some) 

of my money, nivuv vdazog, to drink 
some water. ia&Uiv xoecov, to eat some 
meat (of a particular time : with the accus- 
ative the meaning would be to do it habitu- 

d) arscpavog vaaivd-cov, a crown of hyacinths. 

dwdoov n oil & v izciv, a tree many years 
old. tjv yaQ a^ico \xaxog psydlov, for he 
was of great consideration. 

e) diaQ7id£ov6i rd ipd tov xaxodaipovog, they are 



64 



THE GENITIVE. 



plundering m,y properly, wretched man 
that I am ! Tr k g avoudtlag, what impudence ! 

144. Vocabulary 23. 



Sensible, prudent, 

Greek, 

Greece, 

To what place? whither? 

Where? 

Far, far on, 

A person's age, 

To drink, 

To eat, 

Flesh, meat, 

Crown, 

Tree, 

Year, 

Consideration, reputation, 

Yiolet, 

Lily, 

Golden, 

Place on. 

Worthless, despicable, 

Arrive, 

To be given, 

Plunder, 

Wretched, unfortunate, 

Alas, 



cpQovifiog, og ov. 
ElXriv, rjvog, 6. 
'Elldg, ddog, %. 
not ; 
nov ; 

flOQQOO. 

ijltxia, ag, fj. 
7Ti'vco. k 
axih'oo. 1 
xoeag m to. 
Gzsqavog, ov, 6. 
devdoov,* ov, to. 
hog, eog (ovg), to. 
a%ico[A,a, arog, to. 
lav (Fiov) ov, to. 

KQIVOV, OV, TO. 

XQvazog, xQvvovg.v 

im-Ti&rifM (dat.) 

cpavXog, rj, ov. 

aq)-ixvto[iai. q 

dore'og (from 8d6&rjv,8id(niM.) 

diaQndhct) (fut. mid.) 

xaxodaifAcov, cov, ov. 

cpEv : oi'poi. 



k ttlvg), (irreg. fut.*) irio^ai, 7r£7ra>/ca, 7r£7ro/*«i. zttiov, eir6Qr}v. 
1 ecrOtcj) (from «(5a>), (irreg. fut.) sSojjiai, idnSoKd, eSfjSeo-jAai. £<payov 
(from root 0uy), rj6eadr]v. 
m G. aog, us, &C. 

n SivSpov, D. plur. Sh'Speci (also plur. tevSpea, ScvSpioig from another 
Ionic form). 

° xpivov has in plur. a collateral form Kpivia, D. Kpivcai, as if from 
Kpivog, n. 

P ^pvosog, ovg, xpvo-er), fj, ^pvoeov : ovv. 
Xpvcrcov, ov, xpvacrjs, rjg } ypvrreov, ov. 
XpvcrcG), oj, xpvoiri, jj, ^pvaioi, <o, &C. 
q Ikvco/xcu, 'i^ofxai, \yixai } \k6^yiv. 



THE GENITIVE. 65 



Phrases. 



Till late in the day, uz'xqi ^ooqco Trjg ruiiqag. 

Willingly at least, Sxmvehcu* 

So to say, to speak gener- cog snog elneTv r (showing 
ally, that a general assertion is 

not absolutely true.) 

Exercise 25. 

145. I will place a crown of violets on the boy's head. 
The mother placed a crown of lilies on her daughter's 
head. Let us imitate sensible persons. Let us not imi- 
tate worthless persons , 47 I will be with you three times 
every year. If he were not (a person) of great consider- 
ation, 36 the citizens world have put him to death. At 
what part of the earth am I arrived? I will give each 
of them a golden crown. He told me that we ought to 
give to each of them a golden crown (71). If he had 
not been advanced in years, he would not have died. 
They slept {used to sleep) till late in the day. Let us 
hear whatever the gods please 33 (90*). All men, so to 
say, admire rich men. No Grecian will do this, at least 
willingly. I will not drink any of the wine, at least 
willingly. I will give some of the flesh to this eagle. 
My property was plundered, wretched man that I am ! 
Alas, what injustice ! Alas for my possessions ! Let us 
fly from the greatest of diseases, shamelessness. 



<§> 25. The Genitive continued. 
146. a) Verbal adjectives with a transitive meaning 



r Such short phrases with the infin. are inserted in the sentence : 
bdeu 6f] s k o v a a clvai ovk dnoXsiireTai r\ xpv^f}. See 151. a. 



66 THE GENITIVE. 

govern the genitive. That is, the object of the verb 
stands in the gen. after the verbal adjective. 

146*. b) Words relating to plenty, want, value, &C4 
govern the genitive. 

147. c) Verbs relating to the senses, except sight, 
govern the genitive. 

Obs. dKoveiv. hear, generally takes a gen. of the sound, and an ace. 
of the person producing it : but in neither case without exception. 

148. e. f) The genitive is often used where we may 
supply ' in respect to ' in English. 

In this way, the gen. restricts a general expression to a particu- 
lar meaning ; to some particular circumstance, object, &c. 

The genitive so used may often be supposed governed by heita, 
on account of. It is very frequently used in this way after words 
compounded with a privative. 

149. a) TTQuxTixbg r&v xalwv, apt to perform (or, in 

the habit of performing) honorable ac- 
tions. 

b) [iegtov iari rb tfav yoovridrnv, life is full of 

cares. a^wg Tipijg, worthy of honour. dsTa- 
flcu )[Q7](jid7cov, to want money ; also duadai 
nvog {gen. of person), to beseech a person. 

c) o£eiv [xvqcov, to smell of perfumes. anTza&ai 

vexqov, to touch a corpse, axoveiv naidtov 

Tilaiovrog, to hear a child crying, 
zovg dovXovg eyevas rrjg iXev&tQiag, he allowed 

his slaves to taste of liberty, 
ayevarog rrjg ilevdEoiag, one who has never 

tasted of liberty. 

d) 'i%E(j$ai nvog, to cling to, or be jiext to. gcq~ 

rriQiag exea&at, to provide (carefully and 
anxiously) for one's safety. 

e) anaig uqqsvcov 7iatdcov, xoithout male offspring. 

iyyviara avicp tlpi yzvovg, I am very near- 
ly related to him (literally, very near to 
him with respect to birth), daavg dt'vdQoov, 
thick with trees; thickly planted with 
trees. 
f) evdaifxovi^G) as x ov tqotzov, I think you hap- 



THE GENITIVE. 



67 



PV in your disposition, oixtbiqcq as rov 
na&ovg, I pity you on account of your 
affliction. 



150. Vocabulary 24. 

Apt to do or perform ; in 
the habit of doing or per- 
forming, 

Apt, or fit to govern, 

To govern, 

To smell of, (i. e. emit a 
smell). 

Ointment, perfume, 

Touch, 

Corpse, 

Free, 

Freedom, liberty, 

Hear, 

Child, 

Cry, 

Give to taste, allow to 
taste, 

One who has not tasted, 

Childless, 

Male, 

I\ T ear, 

Race, family, birth, 

Thick, crowded, 

Think or pronounce hap- 

py- 



TTQCMTMOg, s 7j, OV. 

&Q%ix6g 9 y, ov. 

% w (g en -) 

[AVQOV, OV, 70, 

anT0\iai. 

PEKQog, ov, 6 (adj. "dead"). 

iXsv&eoog, a, ov. 

ilsv&eQia, ag, rj. 

axovco. u 

naibiovy ov, to. 

xlaioo. w 



ysvco. 

ayevarog, og ov. 
anaig (one termin. 
dog). 

CCQQrjV, x T[V, £V. 

iyyvg (gen.) 
yevog, 8og, to. 
daovg, eta, v. 

evdai[iovl£<x>. 



G. 



anai- 



8 ikos, appended to verbal roots, denotes fitness to do what the verb 
expresses. Appended to the root of substantives, it has the same lati- 
tude of meaning as ios (20, note n.) 

* 6'£w, 6$fi<xa>, oSuSa (with meaning of pres.) 

u UKOvoj t aKovcrujiatj aKfjKoa, rjKOVafxai, rfKOvaa. 

v — iov the principal termination of diminutives : -rraig, -rraiSiov. 
Those that form a dactyl are parozytone ; the rest proparoxytone. 
w KXaioj (KXavaofxai, K\avaovfjiai) ) but aor. iKkavca. Att. fcAaoo (d). 
x In old Att. apaqv. 



68 



THE GENITIVE. 



Disposition, 

Pity, 

Suffering, affliction, 



TQ07T0g, y ov, o. 
OIXTSIQCO. 

Tia&og, eog (ovg) ro (plur. 

"the passions"). 
a^WQ, a, or. 
<ii\iy\, rjg, rj. 

dtofxai (-rjaopcu, -rj&Tjv). 
[tSGTOg, 77, oV. 
to tflV. 

cpQOviideg, ai (pi. of yoovrig). 
ovdsv, pridev, often followed 

by ri : ovdsv ri, <fcc. 
rig ttots ; z 

What is the verbal adj. in rsos from ev8aipovi$(o 1 ev6ai[Movi(rreog. 
What is the meaning of ^x £cQai w ^ tn S en - ? 1^9. d. 



Worthy, 

Honour, 

Want, beseech, 

Full of, 

Life, 

Cares, 

Not at all, 

Who in the world ? 



Exercise 26. 

151. I asked whether (72. c) the children of the judge 
were in the habit of performing just actions. If you are 
in the habit of performing just actions, you will be hap- 
py. I will make the boy fit to govern men. I am not 
at all in want of money. I would not touch a corpse, at 
least willingly. If the physician had been present, my 
child would not have died. Let us ask the next (sub- 
jects) to these. I think you happy on account of your 
virtue. They pitied the mother on account of her afflic- 
tion. The boy is nearly related to Socrates (149. e). 
He told me that the boy was very nearly related to So- 
crates. We ought to think the temperate happy. I would 
not willingly touch a corpse.* I asked the boy whether 
he thought life full of cares. What in the world am I 
to do with him (137. 6)? 

y Tod-nog from rpiiro), to turn; as we say, a man's turn of mind. 

N. B. Nouns in <>$, from verbal roots, generally change e of the root 
into o. 

* ttotc (enclitic) , at any time ; used with interrogatives, it expresses 
surprise. 

a ikwv uvai is confined to negative sentences. 



THE GENITIVE. 69 

Exercise 27. 

152. Who in the world admires these things? Who 
in the world is this ? If these things are so, let us care- 
fully provide for our safety. Let us speak what 1 comes 
next (149. d) to this. What in the world are you admir- 
ing? T asked the judge, what in the world the citizens 
were admiring. The boy is nearly related to Sophronis- 
cus. Xenoclides will be general with three others. 21 Let 
us rule over our passions. We must set about 38 the task 
of ruling over our passions. He told me that he was 
one-who-had-never-tasted-of liberty. Let us cling to our 
liberty. He told me that the whole 20 country was thickly 
planted with trees. The judge is most worthy of honour. 
What in the world shall we do with the boy ? 



§ 26. The Genitive continued. 

153. a) Most verbs that express such notions as free- 

ing from, keepi?ig off from, ceasing from, 
deviating or departing from, &c. govern 
the gen. 
b) Most verbs that express remembering or for- 
getting ; caring for or despising ; spar- 
ing ; aiming at or desiring ; riding over 
or excelling ; accusing of or condemning, 
&c. govern the genitive ; but not without 
many exceptions. 

154. Vocabulary 25. 

(Verbs governing the genitive : the transitive ones with accus. 
also, of course.) 

To free from, anallatrca (7) also, " to 

come out of an affair," 
" come off" " get off" ex, 
U7z6. Mid. "take oneself 
off." Aor. 2. pass, with 
mid. meaning. 



70 



THE GENITIVE. 



Exclude from, 
Make to cease, 
Leave off, desist from, 
Miss, err, 



Differ, 

Way, 

Chase, hunting, 

Sea, 

Disease, 

Physician, 

With impunity, 

Toil, labour, 
Market-place, 
Heavy-armed soldier, Hop- 
lite, 



8ioyco. h 

navco (mid. "cease"). 

afxaQtdvco c (also to sin, slg 
or 7T8QL with accus. 
against.) 

diacptQco (60, note b). 

68og, ov, rj. 

drjQa, ag, tj. 

ftakaaoa, tjg, tj. 

vooog, ov, tj. 

laroog, ov, 6. 

%aiQttv (part, literally " re- 
joicing"). 

novog, ov, 6 (also " trouble"), 

ayood, ag, tj. 

ojzliTTjg, ov, 6. 



Exercise 28. 

155. Death will free us from all our toils. They 
will exclude the Persians from the sea. He told me, 
that the Athenians were excluding the Persians from 
the sea. They are here to exclude (72. b) the Grecian d 
Hoplites from the market-place. Speaking 14 fast is a 
different thing (differs) from speaking well. A good 
king does not at allt differ from a good father. The 
physician was there, that he might free the boy from 
his disease. He told me, that the physician had 
missed his way. If the judge had been there, you would 
not have escaped with impunity. If the king is there, 
they will not escape with impunity. They who have 
sinned 1 against the state, will not escape with impunity. 



b In Attic Greek, i 



ipyw is e:rcludo, e'lpyco mcludo. (B.) 

rjfjtdpTov. 



c afxapravG), a\iapTr)ao\i.ai, ^fxaprtjKa. 

<* Of the Greeks. 

t oUiv Tt, not apx/iv : for ■ at all ' docs not here refer to an action. 






THE GENITIVE. 



71 



The boy is desisting from the chase. If I had known 
this, I would not have tried at all 5i to persuade him. 



§ 27. The Genitive continued. 



156. Vocabulary 26. 



Verbs governing the genitive. 



Remember, 

Forget, 

Care for, have any regard 

for, 
Hold cheap, 
Despise, 
Spare, 
Desire, 
Desire, 
Aim at, 
Master, 
Overcome, 

Get the better of, surpass, 
Accuse, charge, 

Condemn, 
Impiety, 



[A8fAV}][ACU. e 

inilav&dvopaiJ 
xydopai. 

KaTaqiQoveco. 
qeidopcu. 

im&vpia, ag, rj. 

GTOXa^OfMU. 

TieQiyiyvopcu. 

HaxijyoQsco (pass. " to be 
laid to the charge of"). 

xarayiyvcQGxco.s 

dat^Eia, ag, rj {impious, 
aaefirjg. 87, note z). 



e The third (paulo post) jut. is the jut. used for verbs that have a 
pcrj. of the pass, form with the meaning of a present : as /i^i/i^ai, pen- 
vf\ao^ai 

f 



\avdavu), Xqcxd, Xe\r]9a. sXaQov. 
i\a66[xr]v. 

S yiyvuxTKco, yvwao^ai, tyvoiKa, eyvaxrpqi. 
yvoiriv, yvw, yvcZvat, yvovs) . 



31id. XavBdvo^aiy Xfiaoy.ai, AeArycr/JCU. 
Aor. eyvuv. (eyva 



v, yvo. 



Obs. 



arrjyootoi 



may have ace. of the charge or crime, gen. of the per- 



son : or, if no crime is mentioned, gen. of person. KarayiyvuxTKOj has ac- 
cus. of the charge, or punishment ; gen. oj person. In the pass, the 
ace. will of course become the nom., and the gen. of the person remain. 



72 THE GENITIVE. 

Piety, evat'peia, ag, i) [pious, evae- 

Banishment, cpvyi], rjg, rj. 

Former, 6 nytv (26). 

Folly, [iwQia, ag, r\. 

Laughter, yelcog, coros, 6. 

I at least, I for my part, syojys. 

Far (= much, greatly), nolv. 

Forefather, ancestor, nQoyovog, ov> 6. 



Exercise 29. 

%jT What is the usual opt. of contracted verbs ? oirjv, </W« 

157. I remember my former 11 troubles. They 
asked him whether he despised the Persians. Do not 
despise your neighbour. Let us spare our money. 
They accuse the judge himself of injustice. They con- 
demned them all to death (156, note g). Do not aim at 
producing 14 laughter. The men of the present day 11 
have forgotten the virtue of their ancestors. Much in- 
justice is laid to the charge of Xenoclides. The father 
of Xenoclides was found guilty 27 of impiety. Most 
persons desire money. Let us master our desires. Do 
not desire the property 10 of your neighbour. Let us fly 
from the company of the impious. Let us not only 
speak well of the pious, but let us also confer benefits 16 
upon them. 



Exercise 30. 

158. They have condemned Sophroniscus to banish- 
ment (156, note g). He accuses the others of folly. If 
you had done this, 36 I for my part should have accused 
you of folly. If you do this, 1 for my part shall accuse 
you of folly. If any one should do this, the prudent 
would accuse him of folly. He said that, if any man 
did this, the prudent would accuse him of folly. I think 
you happy on account of your piety (149. /). This boy 



THE GENITIVE. 73 

far surpasses his brother in virtue (dat.) Alas what 
folly ! 50 These things happened in the time of 26 our 
forefathers. He said, that to be prosperous was not in 
our (own) power. 26 



<§> 28. The Genitive continued. 

159. a. b) After verbs of price and value, the price 
or value is put in the genitive. 

160. After verbs that express or imply exchange, the 
thing for which we exchange another is put in the 

I genitive. 

161. d. e) A noun of time is put in the gen. in an- 
swer to the questions when ? and since, or within what 

| time? 

If the point of time is defined by a numeral adjective, the time 
when is put in the dative : it stands however in the gen. with the 
former, the same, each, &c. 

162. /. g) The gen. expresses the part by which a 
person leads, takes, or gets hold of any thing. 

162*. a) d Qaxfirjg ayoqd^eiv n, to buy something for 
a drachma. 
6) n X eia % ov h rovzo zificofiui, lvalue this at a 
very high price (very highly). 

c) TQBig \ivag xaTt&rjxs r ovlnnov, he laid down 

three minai for the horse. 
XQrjpaTa t o v r oo v TTQazreTai, he exacts the 
money (or payment) for this. 

d) vvxrog, by night ; r^tQag, by day ; %qovov 
Gvyyovyfor a considerable time. 

e) noXXcov rj [xsqcov ov (AeftzXeTtjxa, I have not 
practised for many days. 

/) XafSsw (generally Xa^ea&ai,) nodog, to take 



h iro\v$j -xXtioiv or irXitdV) n\cTarog, 

4 



74 THE GENITIVE. 

{a person) by the foot, dyetv x 8l Q^9 t° 

lead by the hand. 
ov Xvxov x(hv oar cor xQarco, I get hold of 

the wolf by the ears. 
h) tovtg ovx ear tv dv d ob g go cp o5, this is not 

the part of a wise man. 
i) ov navzbg thai, not to be a thing that every 

body can do. iavrov shcu, to be one's 

own master. 

163. Vocabulary 27. 

Purchase, buy, dyoodt, co * ( properly " am in 

the market-place," dyoqd). 
Drachma, doct^ri, ye, V- 
To value, n\ido\iai. 
Mina, pvd, ag, fj. 
Lay down, y.a7a~%i%r\\iu 
To exact, to exact pay- 
ment, TTQaTTSC&aL 

Considerable,long(oftime.) ovxvog, 4, ov (prop, "con- 
tinuous"). 
To practice, fiElszdco. 

To take hold of, lafiiodai (92, note ). 

To get hold of, xqoltscq (prop. " to master"). 

Equestrian exercises. ia Innwd. 



Exercise 31. 

164. The king will not fight (these) ten days. No 
one has arrived for a long time. I should like to pur- 
chase 29 this for three minas. It is the part of a good man 



» (a) The being or having what the root denotes, is expressed by- 
verbs do), £w, evo), uvea), (gjttco), a£w, {fa. (b) The making a thing 
272*0, or furnishing it with what the root denotes, is expressed by 
verbs in <5w, t£w, vvta, (v), atVoj. 

Obs. These meanings are not invariably observed ; e. g. those in 
t£co are set down as belonging to both classes. The least subject to 
change are those in coj, evco, aw. (R.) 



COMPARISON. 75 

to confer benefits upon his friends. He told me that he 
valued this very highly. He said that if he had a talent, 
he would lay it down for this horse (102). It is not 
every man that can master 56 his desires. He took hold 
of the boy by his foot. The mother leads her daughter 
by the hands. I have not practised equestrian exercises 
for a long time. Two dogs had got hold of the same 
wolf by the ears. Three dogs had got hold of the wolfj 
by the same ear. The boys are practising equestrian 
exercises. They exact payment for the horse. If you 
care for yourself, provide for your safety. If they cared 
for the boy, they would not do this. I had got hold of 
the wolf itself by the ears. It is not every man who can 
get hold of a wolf by the ears. k It is not every man 
that is-without-fear-of death. A slave is not his own 
master. I will go away by night. The Scythians went 
away by night. 



§ 29. Comparison. 

165. a) The thing with which another is compared, 
is put in the genitive. 

The fuller construction is with >'/, than; which however is used 
only where the genitive cannot be employed. 

b) The gen. is sometimes used, where it is not the immediate ob- 
ject of comparison : e. g. in the phrase, koWIov ifiov aSeis, the things 
compared are not '/' and ^your singing? but ' my singing 1 and 
1 yours? 

166. c) Greater, &c. than ever, than at any other 
time, is expressed by using avrog, before the gen. of 
the reciprocal pronoun. 

167. d. e) Too great, &c. is expressed by the com- 
parative with rj xaT(i l before a substantive ; rj mare be- 
fore a verb in the infinitive. 



, 



k To get hold of, &c is not the part of, &c. 

1 Or $ TTjBfr. 



76 COMPARISON. 

168. a) fisi%cov ifiov, taller' (greater) than I. 

b) xdllTov iiiov adetg, you sing better (more 

beautifully) than /(do). 

c) SvvaTWTEQOi av 7 o) avr cov m lyt'yvovro, they 

became more powerful than ever (lite- 
rally, more powerful themselves than 
themselves, i. e. than themselves were at 
any other time). 

d) [A,e l£co i] y. at a d dxQv a nmov&ivai, to have 

suffered afflictions too great for tears. 
vsxQog pei^cov 5/ xar av& qcqtt ov, n a 

corpse of superhuman size. 
onla ttXs(o tj xazd rovg vsxoovg, more 

arms than could have been expected 

from the number of the dead (quam pro 

numero). 

e) V8 CO 7 8Q0 I 816 IV T] 0) 6 T 8 8ld8VCU OICOV 7taZ8Q03V 

8c77tQ7]vzai, they are too young to know 
what fathers they have lost. 

168*. Vocabulary 28. 



Sing, 


adco. 


Sing better, 


xdlkTov adsiv. 


Powerful, 


dvratog, rj, 6v. 


Tear, 


dctXQVOV, OV, TO. 


Suffer, 


ndoxco.p 


Arms, 


07zla. q 


Young, 


vsog, d, 6v. 


Deprive, 


GT8Q8CX) I r dnOG?8Q8CQ. 


Dance, 


%OQ8V03. 


Master, teacher, 


diddaxalog, ov, 6. 



m So in superl. ^eivdrarog oavTov 7)frda % 

n Literally, greater than in proportion to (or according to) man. 

° arte.) (atu5co), fut. arrnjiai, but aor. rjca. 
P Tracr^o), TTtirrn^ai, nCTrovOa. tiraQov. 

q Properly, instruments or tools of any kind. 

r This verb is most common in the pass, form, with fut. mid., in the ; 

Sense, am deprived of : — rrrtpovjiai, arepf^ofiai, iuripr]^ai. iarcpfiOnv, &c. 
— diroarepcG) (124, c) is more Common than orepicd. [arefAaKOi is the 
common form of the pres. act : aTipofxai of the pres. pass.] 



COMPARISON. 77 

Pupil, fxa&r]r^g, ov, 6. 

Words that go with comparatives to mark the degree of excess or 
defect. 

Still, hi. 

Much, nollq). 5 

Little, a little, 6liycp. 

The — the oacp — roaovrcp (quanto — 

tanto). 



Exercise 32. 

169. The boy is taller than his father. The boy is 
wiser than his master. The daughter sings better than 

; her mother. You have become more powerful than 
ever (168. c). The Athenians have become more pow- 
erful than ever. The good judge is suffering afflictions 

, too great for tears (167. d). More arms were taken than 

\\ could have been expected from the number of the dead 
(167. d). He told me, that the corpse was of a super- 
human size. If I had practised, I should have sungt 

i better than my mother. If you do this, you will be- 
come more powerful than ever. If they were to do 36 
this, they would become more powerful than ever. If 
they had done this, they would have become more pow- 
erful than ever. He said that, if they did this, they 
would become more powerful than ever (102). He said 
that, if they had done this, they would have become 
more powerful than ever. He is too wise (167. e) to be 
deceived by his slave. The masters are too wise to be 
deceived by their pupils. The pupils practise by night, 
that they may become wiser than their masters. He 
said that he should have died but for 39 the dog. The 
boys dance better than their masters. Practise virtue, 
that you may become really wise. They are too young 
to know that virtue ought 38 to be desired. The boy is 
still taller than his father. The girl is a little taller than 



■ Sometimes the ace. is used ; [xeya, roXr, &c. 

* Imperf. because the meaning is, ' I should now be a better singer.' 



78 COMPARISON. 

her mother. The daughter sings much better than her 
mother. The more they have, the more they desire. 



<§> 30. Comparison continued. 

170. a) Two comparatives are to be translated by 
more — than, or rather — than, with the positive. 

For adverbs it is often convenient, as in the example, to use a 
substantive. 

171. b) cog and on (like the Latin quam) are used to 
strengthen superlatives. (So also onwg, f h &c.) 

172. d. e) ti xig xai allog (si quis alius), and elg avrjQ 
(unus omnium maxime), have the force of superlatives. 

(fi's ye avrjp ojv is also used.) 

173. f) TTSQiTtog (exceeding, over and above), and 
adjectives in -7zXdaiog (-fold), govern the genitive from 
their comparative meaning. 

174. a) r a%vz eg a tj a ocpcot s q a (Herod.), with 

more haste than wisdom. 

b) cog ranxjray as quickly as possible, ciyy co g 

avvcTov TTQoayeaav, they came up as 
silently as possible, on (xzyiazog, as great 
as possible. 

c) oa ov q Tjdv var o ttXs igt ovg* a&ooiaag, 

having collected as many men as he 
possibly could. 

d) XCC177EQ, £L T ig XCU aXXo £, 8%8ig TTQOg ta 877] 118- 

Xaivav tt)v rQi^a, though if any body has 
black hair for his years, it is you (i. e. 
you have remarkably black hair for your 
years). 

e) rovg ayeovi£o[A8vovg 7tXeTcF7a 8ig avrjq dvva^vog 

eoyeXeiv, being able to be of more service 



u Or, otl Tr\eioTov$ ddpoiaas. 



COMPARISON. 79 

to the contending parties, than any other 
individual. 
f) neqiTxa twv <xqxovvtcov more-than enough (of 
money, &c.) nollanlaaioi Tjfxoov avrcov, 
many times as numerous as ourselves. 

175. Vocabulary 29. 

Silently, atyy. 

To come on, come up, nqog-eitii. 

As many as, oaoi. 

Most, hkefaroi. 

Feasible, dvvazog, og 6v (fr. avirew, to 

perform). 

Although, xai77€Q. 

For your years, nqbg rd hy. 

Hair, &qi% TQqog, ij. 

Collect,- a&Qo%w. 

To be enough or sufficient, aqxita (fut. earn). 
Many times as many or ., , , 

much TTOkkanlacwL 

Twice as many, dmXdmoL 

Brave, dvdQeiog, a, op. 

Slow, pQadyg, eta, v. 

Slowly, figade'cog. 

Gift, dwQOV, ov, 70. 

To give a share of, give (AEza-didcofM (gen. of thing; 
some, dat. of person). 



Exercise 33. v 

176. One could not find (86*) a blacker dog than this. 
They are more wise than brave. If any man practises 
temperance, it is he. He received more gifts than any 

v In doing the exercises of the form : " if any one — it is" (174 d), 
replace mentally ' it is ' by the verb ; " if any man practises temperance, 
it is he "=2/ any man practises temperance, he practises temperance, 
i. e. he, if any other man (does), practises temperance. 

In those of the form " more than any other single person" replace this 
form by ir\eiGTa els dvfjp, or els ye avfjp <uv. 



80 THE DATIVE. 

other man. If you had done this, you would have done 
more bravely w than wisely. I shall collect as many 
men as possible* (174. c). The Persians came on as 
slowly as possible. He has injured the state more than 
any other single person. He has collected as many 
ships as possible. When you have collected 32 as many 
men as possible, march against Cyrus. The just judge 
has been of more service to the state than any other 
single person. The army of the Persians comes on as 
silently as possible (174. b). If you have more than 
enough, give some to your friends. If they were bold, 
they would conquer twice as many as themselves. More 
hares were taken than could have been expected from 
the (small) number of the dog's. 59 One could not find a 
more beautiful woman than the mother of this Scythian. 
If any man has been of great service to the state, it is he. 



§31. The Dative. 

177. The notion of the dative is opposed to that of 
the genitive, as its fundamental notion is that of ap- 
proach to. 

178. The dat. expresses the person to ox for whom a 
thing is done: it also follows words that express union 
or coming together, and those that express likeness or 
(a) identity. 

179. b) The instrument (c) the manner, and {d) the 
cause, are put in the dative. 

180. e) The definite time at which a thing is done, 
is put in the dative. 

181. /) The dative sometimes expresses the agent ; 
especially after the perfect pass, and verbals in rtog, 
7og. 

182. a) ra avra Trda^co a o i, I suffer the same as you. 

w Comparative sing, by rule 56 ; not plur. as in example. 



THE DATIVE. 81 

Orjasbg xara ibv civtov %qovov 'HQCtxlei ysvops- 
vog, Theseus who lived about the same 
time as Hercules. 

b) nardadetv o aft Sep, to beat with a stick. 

c) dgopep thzqtjX&fv, he came running (literally, 

at a running pace), fteydlri CTzovdy, in 
great haste. 

d) cpofiq), through/ear. xdpvstv roan, to be suf- 

fering from (or ill of ) a disease, dlyelv 
tivi, to be pained at a thing. 

e) ry 7Qiri] fjixiqcty on the third day. 

f) ravza iJlexrai fair, these things have been said 
by us. 

183. Vocabulary 30. 

To live about the same , x 3 > , , 

time, to be contemporary " a ™ ™ V aVT ° V XQ ° V ° V rm *' 

with. *«'• 

Fear, cpofiog, ot>, 6. 

Running, a running pace, dgopog, ov : 6. 

To be suffering, or ill of a xdpvco (xapovpcu, xsxptixa, 

disease, txafiov. 

On the next day, r?J varsQaia. 

Heavy, severe, $aqvg, ua^v. 

Thales, 0aXrjg. x 

Solon, 2JoXg)v, covog, 6. 

Why? rt; or dice ri; 

Haste, Gnovdq, rjg y r\. 

Hercules, 'HgaxXfjg, y sog (pvg) 6. 

Staff, stick, qdftdog, ov, fj. 

Verbs that govern the dative. 

Associate with, keep com- < -.w 
pany with, ^ 

Follow, 8770[XCU. Z 



x Qa\rjs i G. OaAfco, D. Qu\tJ, A. OuAfjf. (r]T0g, rjn, rjra, later) 

y Voc. 'Rp&KXeis. The voc. c5 "HpaxXej occurs only in this exclama- 
tion. 

z 'itrofxaiy eipofxai. Imperf. eiTrojxriv, aov. iairdurjv. 

4* 



82 THE 


DATIVE. 


Envy, grudge, 


qj&ort'cQ* (cp&ovog, envy). 


To meet, fall in with, 


ivTvy%avod. b 


Blame, 


fttpCpOflCU. 


Find fault with, rebuke, 


iniTt^dco. 


Scold, rail at, speak calum- 


XoidoQEopcu (loidoQzca takes 


niously of, 


the accus.) 


Accuse of, charge with, 




7 D J 

blame, 


iyxaXeoj. 


Plot against, 


ini^ovlevco. 


Fight with, 


fidxopai' 


Contend or dispute with, 


£Ql£cO. 


Contention, strife, 


eotg, idog, ?) (ace. toida et 




EQIP). 


Am angry with, 


dgyiCopai. « 


Am in a passion or rage, 


lalenaivca. 


Like, 


opoiog, a, or. 



Obs. Verbs of reproaching, &c. take ace. of the thing (as well as 
dat. of person), especially when it is a neut. pronoun. (eyKaXeiv, &c. 

ri tivi.} 



Exercise 34. 

184. Do not associate with the bad (72. a). If you 
associate (67. 2) with the bad, 36 you will become bad 
yourself. The boys are following the dog. Most men 
follow their neighbours. I envy you your wisdom 
(note a). Do not envy your neighbour. Do not envy 
me. If you had struck 36 the judge with a stick, you 
would not have got off with impunity. 5 * They set out 
the next day. What do you charge me with (183. 
Obs.) ? I asked whether (72. c) they were suffering the 
same as the geometer. If you had plotted against the 
general, you would not have come off with impunity. 
He will not fight with the king (these) ten days (161). 
I knew that he had suffered the same as I (had). I 

a <p9uvea) takes gen. of the object that excites the envy, or of the thing 
grudged. (See 149./). 

b Tvyx&vo), rev^ofxai^ TCTv%ri«i, tTvyov. With a gen. to obtain, re^ 
ceive (napd from, with gen.) ; also, to hit (a mark — jKo-noi). 



THE DATIVE. 83 

plotted against the king from envy. Do not contend 
with your parents. I suffer similar treatment to you. 
I should blame the citizens, if they had done this. He 
scolds, not only 2 * the others, but also the judge himself. 
I should have scolded the boy, if he had done this. 
Why are you in a passion with your slave? I have 
not met you (these) two days. I am angry with those 
who transact the affairs of the state. O Hercules ! 
what in the world 51 am I to do (99. c)? Through fear 
he did not hit the mark. 



Exercise 35. 

185. Do you wish, then (99. a), that I should strike 
him with this stick ? He told me that his father was 
suffering from a severe disease. Thales was contempo- 
rary loith Solon. I admire the wisdom of Thales. 
Hercules lived about the same time as Theseus. If any 
one was brave, it was Hercules. 63 O father, do not scold 
your son. If you had kept company with the bad, you 
would have become bad your yourself. I asked the boy 
whether we ought to envy 38 our neighbours. The dam- 
sel has very beautiful eyes. 12 Let us aim at speaking 14 
well of all the good. Let us abstain from acting inso- 
lently. All, and you among the first ** admire these 
things. Let us be contented with our present condition. 
He said that, if Xenoclides had been wise, he would 
not have plotted against the general. He told me that 
he wished to give his slaves a taste of liberty (149. c). 
Let us keep company with sensible persons. Let us obey 
the laws of the state. I should like to hear 29 the boy sing 
{part,) Do not associate with those who 1 pursue what 
is disgraceful. 13 Why do you charge me with injus- 
tice ? 65 Through fear he missed the mark. I admire 
both d your horses and those 6 of your friend. The rest 

c Like things. d ri following the article. 



84 MIDDLE VOICE. 

of the country 1 * has been laid waste by the Greeks. He 
told me that we ought to persuade the judge (120. c). 



§ 32. Middle Voice. 

The middle voice denotes : 

1) That the agent does the action upon him- 

self; or 

2) That the agent does the action for his own 

advantage ; or 

3) That the agent gets the action done for his 

own advantage. 

The strict reflexive meaning is found but in very few verbs ; prin- 
cipally those that describe some simple action done to our own 'per- 
sons; as as to clothe, crown, &c. The reflexive sense is often equiv- 
alent to a new simple meaning; which may be either transitive or 
intransitive. 

187. The tenses that have the middle meaning, when 
the verb has it at all, are 

1) Pres. and imperf. } >*. ~ 

2) Per/, and PlLperf. \ of ,he P^stveform. 

3) Futures and aorists mid. 
And in some verbs 

4) The aor. 1. pass. i. e. of the passive form. 

188. Vocabulary 31. 

a-) 

To wash, Xovuv. M. wash myself, bathe, * 

loyto&ai. 
Strangle, andyxsiv, anuy^cu. M. to strangle (or hang) 

myself, anuyffidQcu. 

a) With new intransitive meaning. 

To send, atsXleiv. M. (to send one's self ) to 

journey. artlltaOatJ 

e It may have an accus. of a part of one's own person. 
f areXXcaOai, to clothe oneself t and to send for, has aor. vrsiXaadcu I 
GriWzoBai) to travel^ craXrjvai, 



MIDDLE VOICE. 85 

To make to cease, naveiv. M. (to make myself cease,) 

to stop, cease, leave off, 

b) With new transitive meaning. 

To put a man over (a river), M. to cross (a river, ace.) 

ttsquiovv (two.). negaiova&ai. 

To pluck, illluv. M. to mourn for {ace.) i. e. 

by tearing one's hair, %i\- 

leG&ai. 

(2.) 

To make a man one's ally ' 

(to form an alliance with 

a person), i. e. for one's « ovpfxa%ov Tioiuaftat riva. 

own advantage, 
To place guards (over one's ) 

own property; for one's > xaTaozrJGuo&aiz qvlaxag. 

own protection,) ) 

To lift or take a thing up, M. to take up for one's ad- 

aiQsiv 7i. vantage, i. e. to keep for 

one's self, u"pEG&cu. 
To find, evQicwEiv. M. find for myself, procure, 

get, SVQIGH8G&CU. 

To provide, naQaGxevd&iv, M. to provide (for one's own 

use), 7raQaGXEvd£eG&ou. 

(3.) 

I cause a table to be set be- / ,„ , «. 

fore me > TzaQaTi&eizcutQUTTeQav. 

To let out for hire, [tia&ooo. M. cause to be let to myself, 

L e. to hire, fxta&ovG&ou. 
To teach, didaGxsiv. M. to get or have taught, 

diddoxeG&cu. 
To weep for, xaraxlaieiv. M. to weep for (one's own 

misfortunes, ace.) naxa- 

nXaieG&cu. 

& K<x9 larrifxi. 



86 



MIDDLE VOICE. 



imdedeiyfAevog rrjv novtiqiav. 



Having shown his own 
wickedness, 

To enact laws (of an abso- 
lute prince who does not duvai vopovg. 
make them for himself), 

To enact laws (of the legis- 
lator ofafree state, who 
makes them for himself {fic&ai vopovg. 
as well as for his fellow- 
citizens)/ 

Obs. In general any remote reference of the action to self is ex- 
pressed by the middle. 



Wicked, 

To weigh anchor, 

To commence or engage in 

a war against, 
Sail-away, 



7Tovt]Qog, a, ov. 

aiQEiv(ayxvQav, understood). 
aQaa&ai Tzolepov nqog, &C 
{ace.) 



Exercise 36. 

189. Solon enacted laws for the Athenians. Wash 
yourselves, O boys. The son of Xenoclides hung him- 
self All of them washed their hands and their feet. Hire 
your neighbour's eyes. I will let you my house. I will 
take into my pay (hire) as many Hoplites as possible** 
The mother wept for her sufferings. I provided k myself 
long ago with this stick. O daughters, mourn for your 
mother. The citizens, fearing, placed guards. O ye 
rich, cease to act insolently (partic. 238). The soldiers 
crossed over the river. Let us form an alliance with 
the Athenians. If we had been wise, we should have 
formed an alliance with the Athenians. What kind-of 



h This difference is not, however, strictly observed. (B.) 

* tXew, T:\evaofjiai and Tr\zvaovjxai, — eirXevcxa. Pass. Tri-nXeva^at, s-rrXevadrjv* 



Perfect, as I still keep it. 



MIDDLE VOICE. 87 

laws has the king of the Persians enacted ? The boy- 
has shown his wicked disposition. If you do this, you 
will get something good. The Athenians engaged in a 
war with the Persians. The Athenians having weigh- 
ed anchor, sailed away. He told me that we ought to 
obey the laws of the state (120. c). If the Athenians had 
been wise, they would have enacted laws. The Athe- 
nians crossed the river and attacked the Persians. 



<§> 33. Middle Voice continued. 

190. Vocabulary 32. 

1) To take,* clIquv. M. choose (followed by av- 

ri with gen.)) uiQua&ai. 
To take, receive, lafiuv. M. take hold of, Xdpso&ai- 

2) Verbs whose Mid. Voice seems to have a reciprocal meaning. 

To consult, fiovlzvuv. M. to consult together, de- 

liberate: but also (with 
regular mid. significa- 
tion) to counsel myself, 
adopt a resolution. (In 
the sense of deliberate it 
is followed by tteqi with 
gen.), fiovlBvea&cu. 

To reconcile (others), dia- M. to be reconciled to each 
7.veiv). m other (nqog with ace), 

dialvea&ai. 

3) Middle forms of which there is no active and which must there- 
fore be considered simply as deponents. 

I receive, de'xofxcu. 

I perceive, am informed of, n aia&dvopai. 



1 alpeco. &c. £iXoj/, elX6fJLr}v l ?;pe6rjv. 
m \vo), \vaoi, &.C. — XeXvfxai, i\vdr]v. 
n aicrddvofxai, aiaOfjconai, rjcrdrjuai. ^(rdojjLrjv. 



88 MIDDLE VOICE. 

4) Aorists passive with mid. meaning. 

Laid myself down ; laid .j A 

down, x«T«cli*hp.- 

Took myself off, uatjlldytjv. 

So, intQcuoid-qv tcpofi/j&rjV, ixoifi/j&ijV, rjGxrj&rjv, 
(from ntQaiovo&ai, cpoptia&ai, aoifAdadui, aaxuo&cu). 

5) Some first futures of mid. form have a pass, meaning. 
wytli'>aouui, ofioloyrjaofiat,, cpvld^ofiai, figtipofiai, 

Irom ojqtltw, opoXoytftiy qvldrico, TQt'qjto. 

(aid, help,) (confess,) (guard,) (nourish.) 

6) To be on one's guard, 
to guard against, (with cpvXdrzea&cu (mid.) 
ace. of thing or person), 

7) By (agent after pass, vno (with gen.): also naqd 
verb), et nqog. 



Exercise 37. 

191. They will choose to obey rather than p to fight. 
I would choose liberty before wealth. Xenoclides was 
chosen general with three others. The multitude often 
choose ill. He took hold of his hair (plur.) Let us 
consult about the state. To deliberate quickly is a 
different thing (differs) from deliberating 14 wisely. Let 
us consult together what we ought to do. 3y They con- 
sulted together what they should do with (137. b) the 
unjust judge. I exercised-myself-in (190. 4) that art. 
Go to sleep. Having said this, he took himself off. 
The boy, having shown (188. 3) much virtue and tem- 
perance, died. O boys, receive this. I have received 
this. The city will receive many times as much (174. 
/) as this (plur,) O slaves, receive some 48 of the wine. 
The physician being informed of what had happened, 
came in great haste. I crossed over the river in great 
haste. If you do this, you will be greatly benefited, 

° KOLTa-KkivO). P jJidXXop %. 



ON THE PERFECT 2. 89 

will guard against this danger. Having a pain in 
)Oth my ears, I lay down. This will be confessed by 
ill. This will be confessed, willingly at least, 45 by 
lone. The army shall be maintained from the king's 
country. I am glad that 5 the children are well brought 
jp. The city shall be well guarded by the citizens. I 
7 eared the very men (those themselves) who 1 guarded 
:he city. 



<§> 34. On the Perfect 2. 

192. The Perf. 2. (improperly called the Per/, mid.) 
prefers the intransitive signification, but never has 
the pure reflexive meaning of the middle. 

1) If the verb has both the trans, and intrans. meaning, the perf. 
1. has the former ; the perf. 2. the latter. 2) If the intrans. mean 
ing has gone over to the mid., or to the pass, (as often happens), 
the perf. 2. belongs in meaning to that voice. 3) If the verb is in 
trans , the perf 2. has the same relation to it that any other perf. 
has to its verb. 

193. Vocabulary 33. 

Perf. 1. Perf. 2. 

Open, <xvoi'ycQ, q aveqp%a, stand open, avimya. 
Arouse, syetQw, iyijysQxa, am awake, iygr/yoQa. 
Persuade, ttslOco, nmEixa, am confident, trust, have 

confidence, nmoi&a. 
Break, aywui, r am broken, my a. 

Destroy, ollvui, s olcolexa, am undone, (perii), olwla. 
Fix, nrjyvvfjii, 1 am fixed, am congealed, 

<fcc. ntnriya. 
Obs. aT5>X^t, Karaywfxi, more common than the simple verbs. 

^ n This verb prefixes the temporal to the syllabic augment — ivh^ynv^ 
dv'M^a, inf. dvol^ai. dvcroya belongs to later Greek writers: dvk.syixai 
was used by the older authors. 

r ayvvpi, a£w, aor. la%a, bxyqv (a). 

oAVU^f, 6Xo), oXoiXena. ojXeaa. oXXv^ai^ oXov^xaiy oXwXa. CoXo^v. 
1 nfiyvvni, yrfifa, &C. — neinqya, iizdyrjv (a). 



90 ON THE PERFECT 2. 

Pot, pitcher, Xv J Q a > a $> V- 

One more, In elg. 

Gate, ttvXi], qg, fj. 

Spear. doQv, u doQotrog, to. 

Breast, axtovov, ov, to. 

To watch over, lyorflooivcu tzbqi (with gen. 

To raise a war, iyeiQsiv 7z6le[iov (in pass. 

arise). 

Safety, aayalua, ag, r\. 

Roman, 'Pc^^alog, ov, 6. 

Jupiter, Ztvg, Aiog, 6 (voc. Zev). 

Early in the morning, ttqco'L 



Exercise 38. 

194. The pitcher is broken. If we conquer the 
Romans in one more battle, 42 we are undone. The 
spear was fixed in his breast. All the water 20 is congeal- 
ed. I broke the boy's head. The boy's head is broken. 
I have watched over your safety for many years. Hav- 
ing lost v all his property, he took himself off. The 
gates are open. The servants opened the gates early, as 
their custom was. Brave men have confidence in them- 
selves. Then only (91. c), when they obey the laws, 
will the citizens be prosperous. If we do not bear v:hat 
comes from the gods, 25 we are undone. Who in the 
world 51 has broken this pitcher? It is the part 55 of a 
general to watch over the safety of his army. O Jupi- 
ter, the folly of the man ! 50 If a war should arise (be 
raised), we are undone. If you break one pitcher more, 
O worst of slaves, you shall not come off with im- 
punity. 5 * My property was plundered, wretched man 
that I ami** If any man is in the habit of performing 
just (actions), it was he. 63 I have not met either my 
friend or my brother's. 6 

u S6pv t ddparos, &c. — Poet. 6op6s, dopi: of which Sopiis found in Attic 
prose, in the phrase dopi iXetv. 

v drroXXv/xi. 



MOODS AND TENSES. 91 



^ 35. Additional Remarks on some of the Moods and 

Tenses. 

195. a) The fut. 3. (or future perfect) expresses a 
future action continuing in its effects. 

196. The fut. 3. differs, therefore, from the Latin 
futurum exactum, in not being used to express merely 
the future completion of a momentary action. 

197. b) The fut. 3. is, however, sometimes used to 
express 1) the speedy completion of an action, or 2) the 
certainty of its completion in the most positive manner. 

198. The fut. 3. is obviously the natural future of 
those perfects, that, from their marking a continued 
state, are equivalent to a present with a new meaning : 
e. g. [Ae'pvrjfiat, y.lxrri\iai. 

199. Some verbs have the fut. 3. as a simple future : 
e.g. dedtjGOftcu,™ nmavaoiicu, Kex6xpo{Aou. 

200. c) In the active voice a continued future state, 
or a, future action continuing in its effects, is expressed 
by eaopai with perf participle ; a circumlocution which 
is also used in the passive (as in the example 205. c.) 

201. d. e) The perf has also a subjunctive and op- 
tative, and the future an optative, which are used when- 
ever that kind of uncertainty or contingency peculiar to 
those moods agrees with the time of these tenses. 

Only, however, when particular distinctness is required ; and 
even then, the perf. -part, with dr\v or c5 is generally preferred to the 
regular opt and subj. of that tense. 

202. The imperat. perfect is principally used in 
those verbs whose perfects have the meaning of a pres- 
ent : [XSpLVTjGO, &c. 

203. f) The third person of the imperat. perf. pass. 
marks a decided resolution : it is a strong expression for 
let it be done, <fcc. 

204. Obs. ei'&e with the optative — and also the opta- 

w From Sioi to bind. 



92 



MOODS AND TENSES. 



tive alone -—expresses a wish. If the wish expressed 
has not been (and now cannot be) realized, tide is used 
with indie, of aorist or imperf, according as the time to 
which the wish refers is past, or present. So clcpalov 
(eg, e) alone, or with eifo, ei ydo or ag, and followed by 
the infinitive. 

205. a) tj nohreia refa'cog xexoapyoerai, iav 6 roiov- 

xog airy*' imaxoTzfi cpi>Xa%, the constitution 
will have been perfectly arranged, if such 
a guardian superintends it. 

b) yoaU xal TTETTQdZezui, speak and it shall 

[immediately) be done. 

c) id dt'ovra iaope&a eyvcoxorsg,? xal Xoywv 

H&xamv dntjllay pivot, toe shall have voted 
on the subject as we ought, and be freed 
from empty speeches. 

d) ei&e 6 vlog vevixqnoi, would that my son 

had conquered ! 

e) efoev on %%ot. wbqcc tqittj, he said that he 

should come on the third day. 
f) TieTieiQdG&co, let it be attempted. 

206. Vocabulary 34. 

Constitution, nohreia, ag, rj. 

Arrange, adorn, noagua. 

Superintend, overlook, mwxoute. 

What we ought, T £ Saovza. 

Empty, vain, useless, pdraiog, a, ov. 

I am come, j[ x(0 * ( w j t h per f m meaning). 

I am gone, am off, oqopai* (perf meaning.) 

Endeavour, netQdofxat. 



As in £ rraT, yevo to Trarpdg evrvxecrrepos. See also 298 e 

Demo^ptr^Mf 11111 ^ pleMscitis Vel po P uli J ussis - ( B remi ad 

« *w, fcov Ufa ; no other tenses in use. ffCov eZ f« w , to have ar- 

Attic Greek ° ge ( Herod ') : a construction seldom found in 



MOODS AND TENSES. 



93 



Would that ! b"&b, e&' mpsXov * si ya Q 

rnqeXov, to? acpslov, or wc/«- 
Xor alone). 

To make to disappear, acpanfa. 

If it is agreeable to you, if , ^ „ ^ , sW 
you are willing, - , . 

■And that too, *«« ««?«•, 

iFor the present at least, ro ys w uvea. 

1 As far as they are concern- ^ ^ M ^ 8&afc 
ed. 

I 

Exercise 39. 

1 207 For thus we shall have done (205. c) what we 
ij ought. For thus what we ought (to do) will have been 
done (205. b). I will remember my former 11 folly. He 
told me that they had forgotten their former virtue (205. 
c) Let us place the wise and good as guardians ot this 
most beautiful constitution. If it is agreeable to you, 
these things shall {instantly) be done. Let these things 
be done (205./). Do not attempt to deceive the gods. 
If you do this, I am off. The physician told me, that 
he would come on the fourth day. If yoii_ obey God, 
your soul will be adorned with all virtues. Would that 
the wise superintended the state! Would that the 
prudent managed the affairs of the state ! Would that 
the wise judge had superintended the whole constitu- 
tion ! Would that Thales were alive ! Would that 
the man had escaped death ! If you obey the physician, 
you will be freed from your disease. Would that the 
Greeks had conquered ! They condemned him to death 
(156, note g. obs.) and that too though he was (say : 
' being') your citizen. For the present at least, we will 
use him. I don't know what in the world 51 we are, 38 
for the present at least, to do 'with him. As far as 

" MrfXu (debeo), owe, ought. 6<pei\ta<o. Mr. S^ov (un- Attu :S^- 
X.») used only in wishes, fc <5<?eX« fj» £™ P «r„ s (how Socrates ought to 
be alive), would that Socrates were alive '. eiSc <>«! eX«/J«. 

• xeiaTios is the verbal adj. from x?™? 11 '- 



94 



ON THE INFINITIVE. 



that (person) is concerned, I am undone. For the pres- 
ent, at least, let us desist from the chase. O boy, may j 
you become wiser ! 



§ 36. On the Infinitive. 

208. The use of the Greek infinitive is much nearer j 
to that of the English than that of the Latin is ; thus :— 

209. b. c) It expresses the purpose, and (b. d) is often 
used m the active, after both verbs and adjectives, where 
the passive would be admissible, but less common. 

Hence it must often be translated into Latin by the participle in 
cms, or by the supine in u. 

210. The particle maze d expresses a consequence, and 
is used with the infinitive; or, if the consequence be a 
definite consequence that has actually occurred, the in- 
dicative. 

211. ( So — as to = coats with infinitive always. 

( S° — that = ware with infinitive or indicative. 

With the infinitive the consequence is more closely connected 
with the principal clause, as contemplated or resulting immediately 
and naturally from what is there stated. The consequence may 
be equally real. 

212. l So that' should not be translated by the indic- 
ative, except where the sense would allow us to substi- 
tute therefore or consequently (itaque) for so that. 
Thus : " the road was so bad that I did not reach my 
inn till midnight" ="the road was very bad; conse- 
quently I did not reach my inn till midnight :" here the 
indicative f \vou\d be properly used, oogzs properly an- 
swers to ovicog, or some other demonstrative, in the pre- 
ceding clause. 

214. a) 6 av&Qomog m'cfjvxs cpdsii>, it is the nature of 
man to love. 



d More rarely ug. 



ON THE INFINITIVE. 



95 



b) 7iaQ8%cQ ifxavzbv sQoorav, I offer myself to be 

questioned. 

c) rjl&ov Id e iv as, I came (or am come) to see 

you. 

d) rjdvg omovew, sweet to hear, dsivbg ley sir, 

clever at speaking. %aXsnbg lafielv, hard to 
take (or catch). 

e) ovroog dvorjrog ianv, go a r 8 no\s\iov dvr siQrjvqg 

at q si a & a i, he is so senseless as to choose 
war in preference to peace, 
ovrcog dvorjTog egtiv, wars ttoIejaov dvx siQrjvtjg 
alQEfoai, he is so senseless, that he [actually) 
chooses war in preference to peace. 

f) tyiXoriiioTarog rjv, wars ndvza v n Ofxslv at rov 

ETicuvsiG&ai evExa, he was very ambitious, so 
as to bear any thing for the sake of being 
praised. 



214. Vocabulary 35. 
J To put forth naturally, 



Supply, afford, offer, 

Sweet, pleas-ant, agreeable, 

Terrible, clever, 

Hard, difficult, 

Senseless, 

In preference to, instead of, 

Peace, 

Ambitious, fond of honour, 

Undergo, bear, 

On account of, for the sake 

of, 
Leaf, 



cpvoo (nscpvxa et Ecpvv are in- 
trans.; I am produced 
= I am by nature, or it is 
my nature to, &c. 

7KiQ8%CO. e 

rjdvg, Eta, v. 
dsivog, { i\, 6v. 
%akE7iog, 7], 6v. 
dvorjTog, og, or. 
dvri. 

ElQTjVr], tjg, 7J. 

cpil6u[iog, og, ov. 

VTZO-fAs'vCO. 

ETExa (gen.) 
qvXlov, ov, TO. 



e Traoi^errQai, mid. is also used for to afford, without any perceptible 
difference of meaning. (See example in 298. b.) 



an old pass, termin. (like Hog, t6s), whence < 



terrible 



arvyvog hateful, &C. (B.) 



96 ON THE INFINITIVE. 

Bring up, educate, Traidetxa. 

Very, ndvv. 5 

Wing, nrzoov, ov, to: titsqvI;, vyog, tj. 

Young bird, veoaoog, ov, 6. 

Art, also, contrivance, ifyvq, yg, q. 

trick, 

Long, {laxQog, d, ov. 

Not yet, ov7zco. h 

Endure, bear, dve'yoficciJ 

To get teeth, feathers, &c, cpvco. 

To give one trouble, to mo- novov or nodyiAaTa naoiyziv. 

lest, harass, &c, 



Exercise 40. 

215. It is the nature of man (213. a) to love those 
who confer benefits upon him. The city is a difficult 
one to take. The woman is a terrible one to find out 
contrivances. The man is unable to hold his tongue, i 
He told me that his daughter had been well brought up. 
If you give me any trouble, I will not endure it, at least 
(not) willingly* 5 The eagle has long wings. 12 He had 
been so brought up as very easily to have enough. He 
is so beautiful as to be admired by all. You are so| 
senseless, that you are always hoping for what is im- 
possible. 13 They are too wise 60 to choose war in prefer- 
ence to peace. The young birds have already got k 
feathers. The trees are already putting forth their] 
leaves. The child has not yet got (any) teeth. If youj 
molest me, you shall not come off with impunity. 53 Theyi 
harassed them so, that the army was not able {indie.) \ 



8 This word is often strengthened by the addition of ri (navv n). 

h 7ro3, irdoTrore, ever yet, ever up to this time. The former is joined! 
to oij, nn ', the latter to ov6e ) fjtrjdi ; and both relate to the past. OvScttotcJ, 
UridenoTe, are commonly employed only generally, or with reference to* 
the future. (See 238*, note on examp. b.) 

* This verb has a double augment : imperf. ^a^d/^, aor. nveaxo^v. 

k Aor. 1., as perf., has a different meaning. 



ON THE INFINITIVE. 97 

to advance. 1 This wine is pleasant to drink. It is the 
nature of boys to pursue what is pleasant. 



§ 37. The Infinitive continued. 

216. a) The infinitive with the article in the gen. 
sometimes denotes a motive or purpose. 

It may be considered as governed by hena understood. 

217. b) "When the infinitive has a subject of its own, 
I the general rule is, that it stands in the accusative. 

This rule holds good, when the infin. is used with to, (as in 
221. c). 

218. b) A preposition with the infin. may be equiva- 
[ lent to a sentence introduced by a conjunction. 

219. d) But when the subject of the infinitive be- 
longs to and is expressed with the former verb, it is 

(generally not expressed with the infinitive. 

The examples in 221, show that this rule holds good, whether the 
subject of the infin. be the subject of the preceding verb or an 
oblique case governed by it. — In the second example the accusative 
would be expressed even in Latin : dixit sefeshnare. 

220. e) When the subject of the infinitive is omitted 
(because expressed with the other verb, an adjective or 
1 substantive that forms the predicate with the infin. is 
j mostly put in the same case that the subject of the in- 
| finitive stands in in the other clause. 

Thus (in 221. e) vlog conforms to 'AXii-avSpos " Qeog to eyco • irpoOvjxov 
to avrov, &c. — This construction is called Attraction, 

221. a) izeiyio&r] ds %ou ^raldviT], rov ^ Xyarag na- 
xovQyeiv trjv Evfioiav, and At al ant a also 
was fortified, that robbers (or pirates) 
might not commit depredations in Euboea. 

b) oidtv mqayj&ri dia to ixeivov prj naquvai 9 

' rropevoimi. 



98 



ON THE INFINITIVE. 



nothing was done, because he was not 
present. 

c) ovk oQdcog tjei rb xaxcog n da%ovr a cifiv- 

v e o O a i dvzidQCDvtu xaxdjg, it is not right 
for one who suffers wrong to avenge him- 
self by doing wrong in return. 

d) §EO{iai gov naQcttxtvuv, I beseech (or entreat) 

you to stay with us. eyy onovoa&iv, he 
said that he ivas in a hurry, avvunuv 
opoloyco, I confess that I assented. 

e) 6 ^Xt^avdQog 'iqaoxev elvai Aihg viog, Alex- 

ander used to say that he was the son of 
Jupiter. 

msiaa avtovg fivai ftsog, I persuaded them 
that I io as a god. 

id sort o avt ov ehca n qo&v pov, they en- 
treated him to be zealous. 

8%£vti f/, o i ysvscr&ai svdaifiovi, I may (if I 
please) become happy. 
222. Vocabulary 36. 

78T%og, sog (ovg) to. 
xaxovgyog (xaxog et egyov). 
xaxovgyia, ag, rj. 
xaxovQyijfAtt, arog, to. 



To wall, fortify, 

A wall, 

Evil-doer, rascal, villain, 

Villainy, 

Misdeed, 

To do evil towards, do 
harm to, to inflict dam- 
age on, &c. 

To ward off, 



To return a man like for 

like. 
To remain with, 



xaxovQy8co. 

apvveiv tl tivi (also with 
dat. only, d^vvEiv tivi, to 
defend. In Mid. ward 
off from myself ; repel, 
requite, revenge myself 
on, with ace. of person : 
also without case, to pro- 
tect oneself 

7oTg ofxoioig <x[avv8G&cu. 



ON THE INFINITIVE. 99 

Say, cpdaxco (=give out "with 

a slight intimation that 
the thing is not exactly 
so." Vdmel.) 

To feel or be thankful for, , . r , . N 

return thanks for, XW sld8VCU (£«*■ ot thm Sh 

One may, Sgsan (licet). 

One might, i%rjv. 

It is right, Ig&ag 'ijsi. 

Master, deanor^g, ov. 6. 

Laugh, yelda (with fut. mid. -aao- 

gmi). 



Exercise 41. 

223. The city was fortified, that no one m might do 
injury to the citizens. Nothing was done, because 
(221. b) that villain gave us trouble. Let us beseech our 
friends to be zealous. He said that he would be with us, 
if it was agreeable to us. 66 I persuaded them that. I 
was a philosopher (221. e). I persuaded the judges 
that Abrocomas was a rascal. It is a hard thing (65) to 
conquer one's temper. He is too young 60 to have mas- 
tered his temper, If you ward off from me this danger, I 
shall feel thankful to you for your zeal. I will revenge 
myself on him who has injured you. If you return like 
for like to him who has treated you ill, you commit a 
sin. You used to say (221, e) that you were master. 
"We ought to defend the laws of the state. It is in our 
power 26 to become happy. You may (if you please) be- 
come a philosopher. He says that he will deliberate. 
Nothing was done, because (prep.) all the citizens envy 
the judge. He says that he will brave this danger. It 
is not right, that a citizen should plot against the con- 
stitution. If all the citizens defend the laws, it will be 
well. 

m prjdsis, as a purpose is expressed. 



100 on the infinitive. 

224. Vocabulary 37. 

Preposition ex. 

Before a vowel h becomes £% • it governs the ^ew. and 
means in general, out of forth from. Hence, of 
cause = in consequence of ; from, for : also, of sue- 
cession of time. 

Out of the city, £x tijg nolzcog. 

For this cause or reason. £x %amrig ztjg airlag.. 

This beinff the case, for , 

this reason, therefore. ™" ww '. 

After our former tears, «k twv ttqog&zv daxovcov. 

Unexpectedly, £% anQoodoxfoov (a7TQOGd6x7]- 

tog, unexpected). 



Exercise 42. 

225. We are now laughing after our former tears. 
The men from (out of) the city are plotting against the 
king. He says that he is watching over the safety of all. 
The Grecian cavalry, unexpectedly charging the ranks 
of the Persians, conquer (them). It is sweet to laugh 
after troubles. The physician says that diseases are 
from Jupiter. This being the case, it seemed good to the 
generals to depart. The slave says that the pitcher is 
broken. He says that he is glad 5 the citizens are rich. 
He says that he takes pleasure in sleeping. He said 
that the judge had an upper chamber, whenever he stay- 
ed in town. This being so, let every man provide for 
his own safety. I asked him how much he thought the 
geometer's possessions would fetch, 37 if sold. I wonder 
at what has been done 1 by the general. It is not every 
man, 56 that can bear unexpected (evils). This man has 
inflicted more damage upon the city than any other 
single person. 64 Would that the physician had remain- 
ed with (us)! Would that the physician were here! 
Would that the physician had been here ! 



ON THE INFINITIVE. 



101 



<§> 38. The Infinitive continued. 

226. Attraction may take place (that is, the predi- 
cate substantive or adjective be in the 7iominative), 
when the infinitive is introduced by the article or ware. 

227. O) 71Q0Q 70 GVfACpSQOV £eG07, dltt, 70 (f l 1 (Z V T t 8LVCU, 

they make self-interest the object of their 
lives, because they are lovers of themselves. 

b) ly,ni\i7iovxca im jco n o \io to i rotg Xemofisvoig eivai, 

they are sent out, on the understanding 
that they are to be equal {on an equal foot- 
ing with those that are left behind. 

c) ovdtlg rqlixovtog bgtco ttciq v/aiv coats, tovq vofx- 

ovg 71 a q a ft a g, pr] dovvcu dixrjv, let no one be 
so powerful amongst you. as not to be 
punished if he transgresses the laws. 

22S. Vocabulary 38. 
It is expedient or profitable, 



Expediency, utility, 

To make self-interest the 

object of one's life, 
Self loving, a lover of self, 

selfish, 
Self-love, selfishness, 
Transgress, 

So great, so powerful, 
To be punished, suffer pun- 
ishment, 
Infinitely many, very ma- 
ny, a vast number of, 



6VfA,q}SQ£i (dat.) 
ro ovucpt'oov : (ra avfxo^BQOvra, 
what is expedient.) 

TTQOg 70 6V[ACf)8Q0V £t[V. 

qiilavzog, og, ov 

cp&avTiu, ag, rj. 

TraQafiaivcQ (of a law, &C, 

to break). 
rr])jxov7og,-av7?], -0V7O. 
dixrjv oidovai {gen. of thing, 

dat. of person by whom). 

[xvQioiy cu, a. 



n bri with dat. often marks a condition. 288. 

° Paii/a> 7 firjcrofj.aij fiiSrjKa, zffnv. Qncoi and e8r]Ta, trans. (tflrjv, Pridt, 
pairiv, fico, (3r\vai, (3 as.) — rrapa/jaivoi has also perf. pass. rapapcPdfxaif aor. 
TrapeSaQnv. 



102 ON THE INFINITIVE. 

Ten thousand, pvQioi. 

Soldier, aTQancor^g, ov, o. 

Count ly, natQig^ [dog, fj. 

Treaty, cnovdal, cov (properly "li- 
bations"). 

Excessively, ayav. 

Excessive, 6 ayav. 

Preposition, avii. 

Governs genitive : signification, instead of; in prefer- 
ence to ; (213. e) ; equivalent to. 



Exercise 43. 

229. Let us fly from excessive self-love. Let us pur- 
sue the honorable rather than the expedient. They 
choose war in preference to peace, because they have 
not tasted the evils of war. They undergo every toil, 
because they are ambitious. He says that a king is 
equivalent to very many soldiers. All men, so to say, 46 
are lovers of self. If he were not ambitious, he would 
not endure this. I am come on an understanding, that 
1 am to be on-an-equal-footing with the other citizens. 
Do not transgress the laws of your country. They bear 
every thing for the sake of being praised, because (prep.) 
they are excessively ambitious. Let us choose what is 
honorable in preference to what is expedient. It is not 
right, to make self-interest the object of one's life. It 
does not belong to a pious man, to fear death excessive- 
ly. It is not every man that can 56 master self-love. I 
have not fallen in with Abrocomas for a long time. I 
love both the children of Abrocomas <j and those of Phi- 
lip. Everybody aims at becoming happy. It is profita- 
ble to men to be pious. If you do this, you shall be pun- 

P Properly a poetical fern, adj. agreeing with yf}. 

q Nouns in as have the Doric gen. in a (for ov), when they are the 
names of foreigners, or of Doric Greeks of no celebrity ; as 'AppoKo^as, 
G. 'APpoKdim. (R.) 



THE PARTICIPLE. 103 

ished for your villainy. All the laws of the state, so to 
say , i6 were transgressed by this villain. He thinks that 
the treaty has been broken. 



<§> 39. The Participle. 

230. A participle assumes an assertion ; or rather 
states it attributively, not predicatively. Whenever it 
is convenient to express this assertion by a complete 
sentence, we may do so ; connecting it with the princi- 
pal sentence by a relative pronoun, or a conjunction (or 
conjunctional adverb) of time, cause, condition, or lim- 
itation. Hence, vice versa — 

231. a. b. c. d) Relative sentences, and sentences in- 
troduced by lohen, after, if, since, because, although, 
&c. may be translated into Greek by omitting the rela- 
tive or conjunction, and turning the verb into aparti- 
ciple. 

In translating from Greek into English, the proper 'particle to be 
used must be found by considering the relation in which the parti- 
ciple stands to the principal verb. 

Thus, "I visited my friend vocovra," may mean, l who was ill,' or 
1 because he was ill, 5 or '"when he was ill.' 

232. e) The English verbal or participial substantive 
under the government of a preposition, may often be 
translated by a participle agreeing with the nominative 
case of the sentence. 

233. g) A past participle may often be translated in- 
to English by a verb, connected with the principal verb 
by i audi 

Of course, vice versa, the first of two verbs connected by ' and 1 
may be translated into Greek by a past participle. 

234. a) yvvrj tig xfjqa oqviv el^e uatf ixd67i]v rjfxeQav cobv 

avjfi t ixrovaav, a certain widow woman 
had a hen which laid her an egg every day. 



104 THE PARTICIPLE. 

b) ra )[QW aTa dvaXcocrag dm]y^ato, when or 

after, he had spent all his money, he hang- 
ed himself. 

c) xalenov ioTi. liyuv nohg t)]v yuaTt'oct, coia ovx 

eyovaav, it is difficult to speak to the stom- 
ach, because it has no ears. 

d) yiyvaScxovrsg oti xaxd iativ, o^cog Inidvixov- 

aiv avzwv, though they know that they are 
hurtful, they nevertheless desire them. 

e) Xrji^o fxevoi £wgiv, they live by plundering. 

f) XQCtTOOV ds TjdoVGdV XOil 87TldV[A,lCQV, diatyEQOPTCOg 

dv GooyoovoT, but if he gained the victory 
over pleasure and his desires, he would be 
temperate in an uncommon degree. 

g) Xaflwv, ecpTj, tovtov, fiacm'ycoGov, take this fel- 

low said he, and fog him. Qixpag d' 6 noi- 
[jirjv ntTQav, to yJqag avzrjg xainxizv, but the 
shepherd threw a stone and broke her horn. 

235. Vocabulary 39. 

A widow, XVQ a > a $> V- 

To know, ytyvoiaxo).* 

To consume, spend, avaXiaxca {fut. dvaXcoooo,aor. 

dvdXcoaa). 

Stomach, belly, y act fa, t'oog, r\. 

The future, to pslXov. 

To plunder, XtjiXoficu. 

Remarkably, in an uncom- * , 

mon degree, dtacpeoovrcog. 

To scourge, flog, paaiTyow. 

TO thrOW, QL7T7CO. 

Stone, TTtToog, ov, 6 (niroa, ag, rj, 

in good authors, is a 
rock.) 

Bare, uncovered, ipTXog, ?/', ov. 

Participles with peculiar meanings. 

At first, at the beginning, dyxofievog, rj, ov. 

T .yiyvcorrxa)) yv(ooo^aL ) cyi/cozca, £yv(xxr[icu } tyvoiv. (eyi/cov, yvu)9i, yvoir\v^ 
yi»a)j yvuivaij yvovs-) 



THE PARTICIPLE. 105 

At last, relevrojv, coca, cov. 

After some time, dialondov %q6vov. s 

W ith, (often translated by) s%g>v, aym>, cpfymv, ^oo^os.* 

Exercise 44. 

ICJ 3 Obs. Sentences in Italics are to be translated by 
participles. 

236. I shall be happy, if I know myself. The judge 
himself shall be punished, if he transgress the laivs of 
the state. The master himself took the slave and flog- 
ged him. He fled for refuge into the temple, that 70 he 
might not be punished. Si?ice you see this, are you not 
without fear of death? If you do what you ought, you 
will be happy. That shameless (fellow) lives by flat- 
tering the rich. What impiety ! 50 He set off with ten 
thousand Hoplites. Cyrus was riding ivith his head 
uncovered. Take the boy and punish him. He has 
spent both his own money and his 6 father's. It is not 
every man who can 56 be without fear of the future. 
He threw a stone and broke the eagle's head. He cross- 
ed the river, though it was flowing with a full stream. 
The wolf was persuaded, and went away. The physi- 
cian, with much skill (art.), freed the boy from his dis- 
ease. At last he went away. At first you spoke ill of 
every body. After some time I will be with you. 



<§> 40. The Participle continued. 

237. a) The participle of the future is used to ex- 
press a purposes 

8 So ciaK. ttoXvv Or 6\iyov yo. 

4 Of course in choosing which may be used, we must consider 
whether the persons merely had, or led, or brought, or used the thing 
or person with which he performed the action. 

u The intention is spoken of in a less certain way by the addition 
of uj. He had Cyrus arrested, o>g olttoktcvwv. 

5* 



10G THE PARTICIPLE. 

23S. b) Many verbs that signify emotions, 'perception 
by the senses, knowledge, recollection, cessation or con- 
tinuance, &c, take the participle, where we should use 
the infinitive mood, the participial substantive, or, 
1 that J (fee. 

238.* a) iyoa 8Q%o{uu v\uv iTzixovQrjocov, I am com- 
ing to aid you. 

xov adixovvra naQa tovg dixaozag aysiv dd 
d ixijv d oi govt a, he who wrongs another 
should be taken before the judges to be 
punished (literally, one should take, &c.) 

rovg rovTO noiijaovx ag ixTt£{X7i€i, he sends 
out men to do this. 
b) rfiEiv Tovg naldag ftrr^ovg y 8vv rj g ag, I knew 
that I had begotten mortal children (or, 1 
knew that the children I had begotten 
were mortal). 

r l a06/.ir]v ainwv oiofitvoov Uvea oocpooTazcov, 
I perceived that they thought themselves 
extremely wise. 

avvoida fyuvzcp a o cpb g qjv (or a o qj qj ovri), 
I am conscious of being wise (or, that I 
am wise). 

oi>dt7T07a v [A,ST8[i8X?iG8 pot aiy/jaavri, I have 
never repented of having held my tongue. 

239. Vocabulary 40. 

To bring assistance, to aid, imxovQtco (dat.) It may 
succour, have besides an accus. 

of the thing : w 8tzixovq8iv 
voocp to bear help against 
a disorder ; to combat it.) 

Judge, dixaoTTjg* ov, 6. 

v See 214, h. : " but ovSt-nore, like nunquam, is occasionally found 
with past tenses even in the best writers." (P.) 

w tX to) %£ifiojva iirsKOvprjait. (Xen.) 

x The iiKaarfis decides in a court of justice according to right and 
law : the Kpirm in the other relations of life according to equity and his 
knowledge of human nature. (Pass.) 



TEE PARTICIPLE. 207 

Beget, ysvvdco. 

Dare, attempt. rolfidcoJ 

Verbs that take the participle. 

See, dadco. 

Learn, am aware, ftav&dvco. z 

I repent, ^sra^slei a [xou 

Make to cease, stop, navoz. 

Cease, Xtfycoj navofxau 

Am ashamed, ala%vvofjicu, b 

Remember, fxtfxvrjfAai. 

Appear, <pairo[Aai. c 

Am evident, STjXog zlpi d == am evidently. 

Know, old a (2 perf. of el'dw.) 

Am conscious, ovvoida iftavzcp. 

Rejoice, %aiQco. 

Perceive, aio&dvo^a^ 

Exercise 45. 

239 .* I am ashamed of having flattered Xenoclides. 
Remember that you are a man. He was conscious of 
acting unjustly. He rejoices in being praised, because 
he is ambitious. I have ceased to be a flatterer. I am 
conscious of fearing death, I am not ashamed of hav- 
ing conferred many benefits upon him. I know that I 
am mortal. I do not repent of having ravaged the 
whole country. I am conscious of wishing to destroy 
whatever I may take [shall have take?i e ). He is evi- 
dently doing disgraceful things. He evidently cannot 
either speak well of his friends or treat them well. 
Cyrus knew that the son he had begotten, was mortal 

y Of things requiring courage. It has also the meaning of susti- 
nere, to bear to do so and so. 

z navOavu, ^.aQfjaoy-ai, /j.£[.id6r}Ka. eiiadov. 

a [iCTa-[j.£\£i, jjL£Ta-jj.£\r)a£i< &C. 

b aLcr^vvofxai 7toi£lv=I am ashamed to do it! al(xyyvo^o.i 7roi(ov OX 
no trier as, I am ashamed of doing, or having done it. 

c lav (paivuuai ddiK&v, if it should appear that I have acted unjustly. 

d 6n\6g icTLv dvioj/uvos, he is evidently vexed. 

e 91, e. 



109 THE PARTICIPLE. 

(23S* b). I will put a stop to his inflicting damage on 
the city. I knew that the children he begot were mortal. 
Do not cease to love your mother. Know that you shall 
be punished for your injustice. The physician is here 
to (p) { combat the boy's disease. Take the villain be- 
fore the judges to be punished. They will evidently 
attempt this. I knew that he had done more service to 
the state than any other single person. 64 I will send out 
men to (p) inflict damage on the city. 



§41. The Participle continued ; rvyftdvco, Xavddvw, 
qi&dvco. 

240. (fr&dvcoz (come or get before) and Xav&dvco* 
(am concealed) are generally rendered by adverbs ; 
the participle that accompanies them must then be 
turned into a verb. 

241. The participle Xav&drcov or Xa&wv may be ren- 
dered secretly, without being observed, seen, &c. Hence 
eXadev tlatlOwv is nearly equivalent to slaT^ev Xadar, 
but gives more prominence to the notion of secrecy. 

242. a) 6 KvQog, are 1 nalg cov, rjdeio roTg toiovroig, 

Cyrus, as being a boy, was pleased with 
such things. 

b) hv%ov 7iuq6vt£q, they happened to be present. 

rv-jjdvtt (£v, he happens to be (or simply, is.) 

c) Xavddvco ri 7toi,<x)v, 1) am concealed from 

myself doing it = do it loithout knowing 
it ; unconsciously, unknown to myself 

f A (p) after the first word of a clause shows that it is to be turned 
into a participial clause, as explained in the two preceding sections. 

s tpdavuj, (pO.'irTOjiai, eijjOuxa. sfdaaa, efdrjv. JFut. fdacroi in later wri- 
ters, (ifdnv — Qdatriv, 00t3, Qdrjvat, (f>9ag). hhOnv is the older aorist : but 
icpdaaa is used once even by Thuc, and from Xcnophon downwards is 
the more common form. (B.) 

h XaiOdvo), Aijcroo, AcXj?f?a. eXaOop. (See 156.) 

» Often are 6h. (See 371.) 



THE PARTICIPLE. 



109 



2) am concealed from others doing it = 
do it without being observed; secretly ; 
without being seen or discovered. 

d) ety&riv avzovg dcpixofxevog, I arrived before 

them, ecp&rjv dcfixopi£vog, k I arrived first. 

e) ovx up (p&dvoig tzoioov tovio, you cannot 

do this too soon. 

f) ovx ar cp&dvoig nomv tovto ; won't you 

do this directly ? = do it directly. 

g) leys cp&daag, speak quickly; at once. 

d v v o a g i tq^e, run immediately. 

243. Vocabulary 41. 

Preposition dno. 

Signification, from ; governs the genit. 

To fight on horseback. 

To have done supper, 

To do a thing of them- 

i ° acp savTcav. 

selves, 

At the suggestion of others, dcp dvdocov hsoow. 

Openly, dno tov nQOcpavovg (from 

adj. noocpavrjg). 

Preposition ttqo. 

Signification, before (of time, place and preference), in 
behalf of for : governs genit. 



dcp L7T7700V. 

dno deinvov yivsad'ai. 



For (=in behalf of) the 
king, 



noh rov (taGiXe'oog. 



To value very highly, to ttqo nollov nomo&cu (to 

attach great importance value before, i. e. more 

to, than, much. See 282). 

To choose war before, in noh elonv?ig (for which dvzi 

preference to, peace. is used in 213, e). 



k iKveofiat (commonly dtyiKveofxai), 'l^o/xai, iyfjiai. Uojxrjv. 
1 From avvziv or dvvrav, to accomplish. 




110 THE GENITIVE ABSOLUTE, &C. 



Exercise 46. 

244. The physician happened to be present. You 
cannot punish the boy too soon (242. e). The enemy 
arrived at m the city before us. Go away immediately 
(242. g). Won't you go away directly (242./) ? If you 
do this before our enemies (do it), we have conquered. 
If you do this before me, I am undone. If we arrive at 
the city before them, all will be well. The slave broke 
the pitcher without being discovered. The Scythians 
fought on horseback. The father went in to the gener- 
al without being observed. These Hoplites were drawn 
up before the king himself. He is too sensible 00 to choose 
war before peace. He has done supper. Speak at once 
(242. g*), if it is agreeable 66 to those who are present. To 
incur danger in behalf of the state is honorable. It is 
the part of a good man to incur dangers himself for his 
friends. He did this at the suggestion of other persons. 
I should never have done this of myself. If Xenoclides 
had not been their general, they would never have dared 
to commence a war openly. Men enact laws, that 70 they 
may not be injured. Having done supper, they prac- 
tised equestrian exercises. 



<§> 42. The Genitive Absolute, &c. 

245. a) The case absolute is in Greek the genitive : 
it marks the time, or generally any such relation to the 
principal sentence, as we should express by when, after, 
since, as, because, though, if, &c. 

246. b. c) The participles of impersonal verbs are put 
absolutely in the nominative ; of course without a noun, 
and in the neuter gender. 

m els, if they went into it. 



THE GENITIVE ABSOLUTE, &C. Ill 

247. d) When the time relates to a person, ini is gen- 
erally expressed. 

248. e) When a motive is attributed to another per- 
son, the particle cog is generally used with the gen. or 
ace. absolute. 

249 a) i[Aovxa&£vdovTog, whilst I was asleep, tovtcov 
ovicog i%6vTQjv; this being the case ; or, as 
this is the case. 

b) dice %i \iivug, i%bv amivai ; why do you re- 

main, when you are at liberty to go away ? 

c) So dsov amwcu, when, whereas, &c. you 

ought to go away. do%av n tjixiv umtvai, 
when we have determined to go away. 
Also 3 6%av ravra, this being determined. 

d) im Kvqov fiavilevovrog, in the reign of Cyrus. 

e) ioiojTza cio g n dv r ag eld 6 rag (or n civt cov 

eld 6t gov), he held his tongue, as suppos- 
ing that all knew. 

250. Vocabulary 42. 

Words used in Nomin. Absolute. 

When or whereas it was , , 
said or told, uqn^ov. 

It being disgraceful, possL , y * * ,., 
ble, impossible, plain or ^XQov-dvvarov-advvarov 

evident, ~^ Xov ov ' 

There being an opportuni- , „ 

ty, when 1 may or might, * 
It being fit or incumbent, ttqogTjkov. nqoafaei (dat.) it 

belongs to. ol TTQoarjxov- 
rsg, those that belong to 
us = relations. 
When, whereas one ought, de'ov. 

n So Soxovv, ceooyiiivov. 

° Also S6i;avros tovtov, 6o^6.vto)v tovtwv ) and So^avra ravra. 

P eartv, eveaTi, ndpeariv, Z&vti, &C. irpaTreiv, all signify, One can or 
may : but zveari relates to physical possibility (it is possible) : efran to 
moral possibility (it is allowed) : icm and napean stand between these 
two meanings, without being confined to either of them ; the latter im- 
plying also the notion of facility. (B.) 



112 



THE GENITIVE ABSOLUTE, &C. 



As far at least as this is con- 
cerned, as far as depends tovtov ye evsxct. 
on this, 

For the sake of, %&qw (with gen. = prop- 

ter ; but %&qiv ipijv y for 
my sake). 
After the manner of a dog, . ^ ., 

like a dog, ' 

Without, av8v (gen.) 



For any thing the other 
heavenly bodies could do trexa tojv sz8qojv aarQoov. 
to prevent it, 



Exercise 47. 

251. Without you I should have perished for any 
thing my other friends could have done to prevent it. 
Why do you remain, when we have determined to suc- 
cour our friends? Why do you hold your tongue, 
whereas you ought to speak! Why do you remain, 
7ioiv that you have an opportunity to depart ? He ask- 
ed the boy, why he remained, when it was his duty to 
depart. Though they were toldt to be present, they are 
not come. If it is agreeable to you, 66 we will go away. 
I hope that we shall thus arrive before 77 the Persians. 
He had the same upper-chamber, whenever he wished. 
The slave told me, that the physicians were come (p) to 
combat the boy's disorder. If you act unjustly towards 
your slaves, know 74 that you will be punished by the 
gods. I knew that all the rest of the country had been rav- 
aged by the Persians. Why did you choose war, when 
youmight have chosen peace? He told me that all were 
permitted to go in to the general, whenever he was at 
leisure. 



t It being told. 



THE RELATIVE. 113 



Exercise 48. 

252. Cyrus evidently 73 desired to be praised. I per- 
ceived that he wished to disobey the laws of his country. 

jO boy, cease to do this, since (p) it is disgraceful to de- 
spise your father. The boy went secretly (241) into his 
fathers house. But this being determined, we cannot 
set out too soon. 77 The master, as being a fool, was de- 
ceived by his slave. Do not practise many arts, since it 
is impossible to do every thing well. Let us not despise 
our relations. As far as money is concerned, you will 
rule over all the Greeks. Know that you will get off 
well, as far at least as this is concerned. He told me 

i that, if any man was well suited to govern men, it was 
Cvrus. 63 The physician told me, that he had come for 
my sake. This animal runs like a dog. This being 
the case, I will go away at once. All men, so to say, 
desire what is absent. It is the part of a senseless man, 

1 to hold cheap what is present, from the desire of what is 
absent. He said nothing himself, as supposing 78 that 
all felt grateful to Xenoclides. 



43. The Relative. 



253. a. b. c) The relative is often used to introduce a 
cause, ground, motive, or design of what is stated. 

Obs. 1. When it expresses a cause or ground it takes the indie. ; 
when it expresses a purpose (as in 258. c), the Jut. indie, [or the sub- 
junctive l]. 

Obs. 2. The relative is not used merely to connects, sentence with 
the one before it so frequently as in Latin. When so used, it is 
probably always expressive of some emotion. (B.) 

Q 'Cnnjunctivus cum pronominibus adverbiisve relativis consociatus 
nonnisi in veterum epicorum sermone fini indicando inservit.' (Herin. 
ad (Ed. Col. 190. So Krager,Lachmann,&c.) Some MSS. read 6™s 
in the passage of Thucydides, 258. c. 



114 THE RELATIVE. 

Obs. 3. oSc is not used as a mere antecedent to the relative, but J 
ovrdg, which is not so strongly demonstrative. 

254. d) The antecedent is often expressed in the 
relative clause, and omitted in the principal clause. 

When this is the case, the relative clause often stands first ; the 
subst.j which mostly loses its article, is then not to be placed im- 
mediately after the relative. 

255. c) The relative is often made to agree in case 
with the antecedent in the principal clause. 

This is called Attraction of the Relative: it seldom takes place ex- 
cept where the relative should regularly stand in the accusative, the 
antecedent being in the gen. or dat. and without a demonstrative 
pronoun (as ovtos, eKEivogy. 

256. g) When the relative is attracted, the antece- 
dent is often placed in the relative clause, but in the 
case in which it would stand in the principal clause. 

257. g) The antecedent is sometimes wholly omitted. 

As, for instance, when it is some general or indefinite notion 
{man, thing, &c. as in 258. g, ex. 2), or has been before mentioned, 
as in -258. h. 

In (258. h) the ret. seems under the government of a preposition 
belonging to the other clause. As in English sometimes, — "she 
would have the head of whosoever advised it." 

258. a) dav^aaibv nomg o g rjfAiv ovdh 8 i'd co g, you act 

strangely in giving us nothing. 

b) euaxuQf&v ttjv f/rjT^Qa, oioov rsxvmv ixvQrjGE, 

they pronounced the mother happy in 
having such children. (Here otcov — on 
roiovTcov.) 

c) rj vavq TTQScrpeTg ayei, ofaeQ ra Gcpeisoa cpQaGcoaiv* 

the ship is bringing ambassadors to 
make (or, that they may make) their own 
statement. 
onXa kt corrai, oig afivrovvrai tovg adixovvrag, 
they are procuring arms to defend them- 
selves with against those who injure 
them (or, with which to repel or punish 
those tvho injure them). 

r More probably, (ppdaovaip. (KrUger.) 






THE RELATIVE. 115 

d) ovzog ioTiv, ov eldeg ardoa, ) This is the man 
ov eldeg avdQct, ovzog ionv, ) you saw. 

sAttraction of Relative. 

e) fieradidcog avivo rov airov ) ov7T8q aviog s%£ig, 
you give him a portion of the food lohich 
you have yourself. 

f) top rfl'Sfjiovi 7ti6T8vgo^8v co av KvQOg dco, we will 
confide in any general whom Cyrus may 
give us s (for ov av 1 ). 

g) aTTolavco 11 gov 8%co aya&coi', I enjoy the good 
things I possess. fi8[Avr>{it'vog cov mqcx^s, 
remembering what he had done. 

fl) fi8T87T8fX7T8TO alio GTQUTEVfJia, 7TQ0g CO 7TQ0G&8V 

£?/£, he sent for another army, in ad- 
dition to the one he had before. 

259. Vocabulary 43. 

Surprising, strange, tfavfiacrTog, tf, ov. 

To act strangely, ^avixaaxov tioieXv. 
Corn, (food for man in gen- 
eral,) 

Ambassador, ngsG^vg, sag, 6. 

To send for, n8zan8imo\iai. 

To enjoy, anoXavto.™ 

Prepositions iv, dvd, rig. 

!p = in, answer to where ? — governs dat. 

did =(properly) up : in, on, through (of a large space 

of time) — governs accus. 
stg= into, towards, against, in reference to — governs 

accus. 

8 Dederit. t See 94. 

n This verb (which is probably from the same root as \a0£Tv. P.) is 
properly to receive from; to receive whether advantage or disadvan- 
tage from any thing. So that (like our, to reap the fruits of) it is used 
in both a good and a bad sense. 

v Plur. often alra in Att. Greek, which is also found in Herodotus. 

w diro'Xavo}, diroXavcofjiai. Imp. dnt,\avov, aor. diriXavaa, though no sim- 
ple verb is found, d-xrfkavov, dnnXavaa are later forms. 



ohog. Y 



11G THE RELATIVE. 

The first of all, iv roTg 7TQootog. x 

It depends upon you, iv ool tvzi. 

Through the whole country, ava ndaav z)\v yrjv. 

Through the whole day, ava navav Tr>v r^Qav. 

Every day, ava naaav rjptQav. 

Every year, ava nav hog. 

By fives, or Jive and five, ava nivxz. 

To attend a master, elg didaandlov qx)i7av y (o*- 

vlav understood). 

To send (a boy) to a mas- > * * „. r. „>„„„,», 
K J / eig Cioaoxalov nz\niuv. 



ter, 



'Exercise 49. 



260. I pity the mother for having been deprived of 
such a daugher (258. 6). 1 will give him some of the 
wine which I have. He sent for more wine in addition 
to what he had drunk already (258. h). This is the 
hare you saw (258. d). You act strangely in speaking 
ill even of your friends. He knew that I should enjoy 
the good things I possess (258. g*). Receive the good 
things yon desire (258. g). I have a stick to beat you 
with (258. c). The Hoplites arrived first of all. All 
these things depend on you. They harassed us all the 
day, so that (21 1) the Hoplites could not march. They 
went into the city by fives. Those who had plotted 
against the king entered (went into) the city by threes 
ivil/tout being observed™ Say quickly, what your 
opinion is (lohat seems good to you). I, for my part, 
would choose peace in preference to all that I possess. 
I knew that (p) the citizens would choose 31 peace in 
preference to war. Why do you wait, when it is your 
duty to succour your friend? The Athenians used to 
do this every year. They are not aware that (p) they 

x This phrase is elliptical: iv ruTg irp'7)TOi 7raptj<rav=£v roTg Trapovaiv 
npcoTot napfjaav. Thuc. uses iv toTs even with a fern, superlative. (See 
iii. 81.) 

y Properly, to go frequently into his house. 



THE RELATIVE. 117 

ire despised 74 by every body. They do this, not only 
3very year, but also every day. I admire your lilies, but 
not z your brother s. The boy attends no master. We 
send our boys to masters. 



Exercise 50. 

261. T repented of having flogged 74 the slave. I in- 
deed eat that I may live, but others live that they may 
eat. Socrates said, that he indeed ate that he might 
live, but that others lived that they might eat. The 
beauty of the city was admired by all who were-there. 1 
He said that if the citizens obeyed the laws of the state, 
they would prosper (102). I wonder at the water being 
turned into wine. The widow would have died 37 but 
/or 39 her hen, which (p) laid her an egg every day. 
The beauty of the boy was admired by Socrates him- 
self. The Persian cavalry unexpectedly charged the 
ranks of the Greeks. He says that he (219) has a pain 
in his head. I perceived that he rejoiced 74 in the wealth 
of the citizens. 5 I am ashamed of being glad 74 that my 
daughter is beautiful. 5 He is evidently 73 vexed at the 
misdeeds of his brothers. Henceforth let us despise no- 
body. The judge told me that we must persuade (120. c) 
the citizens. Would that you had done what you ought ! 
Would that you would do what you ought ! I am at a 
loss what to do (98). 



§ 44. The Relative continued. 

262. a) When the relative, with such a verb as to be, 
call, believe, <fcc. stands in apposition to a noun, it gen- 
erally agrees in gender with it, rather than its proper 
antecedent. 

z ov should stand last : it then takes an accent (ot>). 



263. fo &mr-*i*=&*ot 9 some, and may be de : 

- : 

964. e) In the sarr.f :-. y ;:.:== rrJ 

: t; : ; : : : ' : t :: : 

2 ':': f S: lis : r: ~~::h ': ;r r :. ; inte 

: _: ■ 

8 5. c) ©y <p or e T r . n ith tta 

future indie or the f w fro. 

7:. t.: ~t ::. _£ :::s:n::::: i~=~f-r= :: :r.f if :v.:z = ::: 
- - - — .::. :: _ - ; . expre: 

£ ; : . yf /: =« 7 rQtVoi ; - 

' ■ i : - " - - :; - 5 : Et : .:. :: : : ; : : iz :.' z z./:.z : ' \ -■.:: - : /. 

258u Jl* r - . ' foes no: bxj ness 

""..-■ ..t. ;.t t : : bul . ; nse:. :-.s er.iiva.e:".: : 
; ;- r ".;;:■. : \ . r . r = all that 

4 ; .- . : r :i:; " : . .': r : '-.\~. 17. the fear which Wi 
call hashfalne 

- : 7:7 3 :. -7 :' •. -.'.:::: e 7 7 1 &r f fron 

1 :: v.-; the cities J- 

: : . :~-\ : ~~. : ; : r 7 ; : ~ : . whom I saw some 

d) ear it oi o n% ag ar&Q-J. ~ r - 

who m 

: : : ; 

- 7c I will tell 
ra will hi : 

/ - .' " - ; ; 7 c ~ . ■ • ■. 7, -. vofiovg. they wt ■ 

D : I . - . 

< ~: ■•<.■-'-.: '.'\ -■■-. ';■■/■■ ■ \\. :.— .:. ■ '.■ : 7 .. M i r. . : 

iiywrzi, or ***2r *7 >lynn*. Examples of die last construction are ne; 



THE RELATIVE. 



119 



g) %&qiv cot oldet civtf cov tjl&eg, I feel thankful 

to you for coming. 
h) ecpdeioov ei ri iQ/jai^ov qv, they destroyed 

every thing of value. 



270. Vocabulary 44. 

To be banished, 
To return from banish- 
ment, 
\ To wound, 
Some, 

Somewhere, 
Sometimes, 
Hold my tongue, 



cpsvyeiv. 
xctreoxopcti, nazei/H. 

86ZIV 01. 

ianv ottov. 
ear iv ore. 
atydo3. e 



Preposition did. 

Governs accus. and genitive. 

Signification : (with gen., 'through,' of space of time; 

and of means. 
" (with accus.) 'on account off also, 

through, of a cause. 



On your account, 
After a long time, 

Every five years, 
To pity, 

To be angry with, 
To be at enmity with, 
At a little, at a great dis- 
tance, 
To have in one's hand, 



diet 68. 

dice tzoIIov iqovov : also, dice 
Xqovov, after some time, 
dice nivre iroovJ 
di oixrov e%8iv. 
di oQyrjg tyeiv. 
di 8%doag yiyvecj&ctl rin. s 

di oliyov, diet tzoIXov. 
diet x Et Q°S ^X 8lv ' 



(pevyEiv is used for (pvyelv, to be in banishment. (Heindorf.) 



TlTfjOJGKO)) TpOJCG)) 



&C 



e Fut. generally, ciywopai. It cannot, like cnwTrdco, take accus. of 
thing. 

f Also Sia TTi^-nrov erovs and Sia TiipTtTUv Itcov. 

s So did 6i\ias iivai nvi. (Xen. Anab. iii. 8.) 



120 6 oiog oh avfjQ. 



Exercise 51. 

271. I deem you happy in having received 80 such 
good things. Most men evidently desire 73 the good 
things which their neighbours possess. I will go away 
on condition that the physician shall stay. Some of 
them were wounded by the enemy. I will tell you, on 
condition that the others shall hold their tongue. Is 
there any person whom (269. d) you have praised for h 
his forwardness? I will endeavour to do this so that 
(211) even you shall praise 1 me. I would choose 
liberty before all the good things I possess (258. g). 
He chose war, when he might have peace. Xeno- 
clides was chosen general, with three others. 21 I re- 
joice to have been elected 74 general by the Athenians. 
"Why am I wretched, when I may become happy ? I 
am at enmity with Abrocomas. He was banished 
through the Athenians. I rejoice in seeing you 74 after 
some time. Know that it is through the gods k that you 
are doing well. Know that it is through me that you 
have returned from banishment. The physician is 
come on your account. They do this every five years. 
The boy pursues the dog with [having) a stick in his 
hand. 



§ 45. 6 oiog oh aviqQ. 

272. The relative adjectives, oiog, oaog, rjXixog, <fcc. 
suffer attraction not only in the accusative, but also in 
the nominative, when the verb eipi with an express 



h Gen. — alv&a takes ace. of person, gen. of thing. 
1 Infin. pres. 

k i. e. know, doing vicll (nom. partic.) through the gods. The other 
sentences of this kind (having < n is' followed by 'that') are to be 

turned in the same way. 



6 oiog ov avriq. 121 

subject stands in the relative sentence ; as, soapou oiov 
gov etvooog, for ega^ai dvdobg ioiovtov oiog ov ei. 

Obs. 1. This attraction consists in the omission of 
the demonstrative adjective in the gen., dat., or accus., 
and then putting the relative adject., by attraction, in 
the case of the preceding substant. The verb of the rel- 
ative sentence (slpi) is also omitted, and the subject of the 
relat. sentence agrees with the attracted relative. 

Obs. 2. In this construction, ooog follows such words 
as tfavfAaarog, TzleTo-iog, acp&ovog : and cog the adverbs 
-&avfxaoicog, -tJaviiaoicog, &C, 

273. a) G. £qoc[acu oiov gov avdoog, I love such a 

man as you. 
D. %aol£o{iai o l op o ol avdqi, I gratify such 

a man as you. 
A, STi cuv cZ oiov us avdga, I praise such a 
man as you. 
b) N. 6 oiog ovi {ctvrjo), such a man as you. 
G. tov oiov g ov (avdoog), of such a man as 
[i you, &c. &c. 

c]\}aviA.aGTov og ov 77Qov%G3QtjG8, he made 

astonishing progress. 
d)&av[A,aoicog cog a-dhog yiyov8, he has be- 
come surprisingly miserable, 

274. Vocabulary 45. 

To love, 8Qaco. m 

To gratify, ^ao/fo^ca. 

Advance, make progress, nooicoozco. 

To leap, cdlo[xai. n 

To throw, qItitco. 

The truth, to alrj&zg (alrj&rjg, true ; cll- 



rft8ia, truth). 



1 nip is often added : ol oloi wep v/xeTs avSpes- 

m ipdoj, poet, epapai, ipaaQf\oopai t rjpaaOrjv (gen.) love. (See Index.) 
Pres. pass, epoifjiai, (epdadai^ ipcofxevog), to be loved. 

n aWofxai, a\ovfjiai. Aor. 1. r)\&nr)v with d in the moods, aor. 2. h^o^v 
with a. Aor. 1. should probably be preferred for indie, and part.; aor. 
2. for optat. and infin. (B.) Hermann rejects the indie, and imper. of 
aor. 2. 

6 



122 



OtOQ GV UTTJQ. 



True happiness, 
To dwell, 
Miserable, wretched. 



r\ cog alrj&cog evdaijxovia. 

OfWco. 

a&hog, a 9 or. 



Preposition, kcitcc. 

Properly yard signifies a motion from a higher place 
downwards : and governs the genit. and accus. 

With genit. it means, down from, down, under; but 
more commonly against, with verbs of speaking, 
thinking, &c. 

With accus. it means, at, by, near, during, in an in- 
definite way ; also, according to, and with the distri- 
butive sense of our 'by' {by twos, &c.) 



According to reason, 

During, in, or at the time 

of the disease, 
In villages, 
Two by two, 
In all respects, 
Sensual pleasures, 
According to Plato, 



nata loyov (also with gen. 
" in proportion to"). 

XCIZCC TT]V VOGQV. 

nata ucotiag (vicatim). 

nata dvo. 

xct7a ndvia. 

at xaru to (jcopa ifiovaL 

Kccia FLXttTcova. 



Exercise 52. 

275. They cling to sensual pleasures, because 71 they 
have never tasted true happiness. They are too wise 60 
to cling to sensual pleasures. (Men) gladly gratify such 
a man as you are. I wguld gladly gratify such men 
as you. They leapt down from the wall. Do you 
wish (98) that I should speak the truth against my 
friend? The boy is like his father in every respect. 
This is (65) hard, and for men like us impossible. The 
king loved such men as you are. The boy has made 
astonishing progress. He said that he would 37 very 
gladly gratify a man like you. Men like you always \ 
speak well of the good. A man like you is praised by ! 
every body. I would rather see men like you, than the 
king of the Persians himself. He has become very 



ovdeig bang ov. 123 

wretched, unknown to himself.™ I cannot gratify a 
man like you too soon. 77 Will you not gratify a man 
like me directly? 71 Sophroniscus, as being selfish, 
obliged nobody, willingly at least.* 5 All men, so to 
say, 46 like to oblige such men as you. All men. so to 
say, rejoice in praising 77 such a man as you are. These 
things happened in the time of the disease. I know that 
1 they dwell 71 in villages. The eagle has wings in pro- 
portion to its body. To live according to reason is a 
different thing (from living °) according to passion. I 
will tell you on condition that you (will) send your boy 
to some master (259). 






§ 46. ovdeig bang ov. 

276. In ovde)g Sang ov {iiemo non) the declinable 
words are put under the immediate government of the 
verb. 

Kiihner calls this inverted attraction, because the noun (or word 
representing it) conforms to the relative, not the relative to the 
noun. 

Sometimes adverbs are affected by this kind of attraction : Pnvdi 
KCideV) bQsv irep rixsi (for KsTae). 

277. N. ov d sl g bar ig o vx av ravra TTOirjasisv. 
G. ov8 svb g or ov ov xareyeXaaev. 

D. ovdevl b r cp ovx anexQivaTo. 
A. ovdsva o vt iv a ov xaztxlavae. 

There is no one who would not do this. 

There was no one whom he did not laugh at. 

There was no one whom he did not answer. 

There was no one whom he did not weep for. 

278. Vocabulary 46. 

To laugh at, xaraytldcn.v 

The art. must be expressed, though the infin. is to be omitted. 
P yeXdco, -aaofxou, but eyeXaaa. Short a. 



124 ov8t)g oGtig ov. 

To answer, unoxQivofjuu.* 

To weep for, xaraxlaico. 

Especially, allwg re y.ai (both other- 

wise and also). 
There is nothing like hear- oish ohv ^ ~ aau 



As fast as they could, W rd^ovg Efyov.* 

The agricultural popula- 
tion, 



01 upcpi yqv t%ovt£g. 



Exercise 53. 

279. There is no one who would not weep for such 
men as you. 85 There is nobody whom he does not de- 
spise. There is no one whom he does not hold cheap. 
There is no one whom they do not gladly oblige. 
There was none of those present 8 whom he had not 
plotted against. I act strangely in not gratifying 7 * a 
man like you. 85 I know that I shall love 74 a man like 
you. lam ashamed of having plotted 74 against a man 
like yon. He evidently wished 73 to oblige such men as 
you. That is a hard thing, and for a man like me at 
least/ impossible. To live according to reason is un- 
pleasant (not pleasant) to most persons, especially 
(when they are) young. There is nothing like hear- 
ing the ambassadors themselves. The agricultural 
population are doing well. They pursued the dog as 
fast as they could. 



i Aor. 1. dnoKpiOuvai is passive, from AiroKpivw (secerno), except in 
late writers, who use it for drroKpivaadai. (B.) 

r Gen. of t&%os* 

8 Put the partic. after the negatives. OvSevdg b'rov ov navrwv av vjiwv 
kclO' faixiav -rrarrip drjv. (Plato, Protag. 317. C.) 

1 o'i<<) ye e/jioi. 



olog. dsoa. fxtXXoo. 125 



<§> 47. olog. deco. pslloo. 

280. a. b) olog with the infinitive implies great fit- 
ness or ability in a thing: rs is usually joined with olog 
in this signification ; as olog rs slfii noielv, I am the man, 

'the fittest one to do it, i" am able to do it, can do it. 
Without the infinitive, with neuter, olov denotes possi- 
bility. 

281. c. d) dtw with bliyov, nollov, <fcc. is used both 
personally and impersonally, in the meaning of I want 
but little of, am fax from doing, <fcc. : impers. nollov 8eT, 
there wants much, far from it ; dlfyov 8tT, there wants 
little, all bat, &c. Sometimes delv is omitted with bli- 
yov, &c. 

282. e.f) fxillco is followed by an infin. of the fu- 
ture, present, or aorist. 

Obs. The future infin. is the most, the aorist the 
least common. u (P.) 

283. a) olog rs eiui, I am able (i. e. am such as to 

do a thing), olov re sari, it is possible. 
b) ol 7tq6g&sv odovTsg olo i rspvsiv eiaiv, our 
front teeth are adapted for cutting. 
ov yocQ tjv olog ano navrog xsodaiveiv, he was 
not of a character 7 to do any thing what- 
ever for the sake of gain. 

u There is a large class of verbs the object of which, expressed by 
an infinitive, relates to future time, and may, therefore, be in the fu- 
ture, though it often is in the pres. or aor. " The present is preferred 
when either the certain definite occurrence of the action is to be 
marked, or its immediate commencement from the time the words are 
uttered." (K.) Buttmann properly observes, that a distinction should 
be made between verbs whose object is necessarily future (e. g. hope, 
promise, expect) and those where the object is not necessarily future 
(e. g. say, think, &c.) : with the latter the pres. or aor. might be mis- 
understood ; with the former, not. But the MSS. often agree in giving 
the pres. or aor. (with reference to future time) after such verbs. (B. 
ad Plat. Crit. 14. 3.) 

v Or, was not a man to, &c. 



126 otog. 8lco. tiiXkco. 

c) bXiyov dsco daxQi>6cu, I could almost cry ; or 

am near crying. 

bXly ov 8 elv id avow a, I was near crying. 

bXiyov navTEQ, nearly all (delv omitted). 
rovro yao noXXov deiv einot rig a v, for a 
man would not assert that, far from it. 

d) dvoTv deovra w ei'xoai, eighteen. 

e) fxtXXco yodxpeiv, yodepsw, yodxpeu, I am going to 

write, 
f) el 11 i XX si cpiXoaoyog ysvea&ai, if he is to be- 
come a philosopher. 

283*. Vocabulary 47. 

Cry, shed tears, daxovm. 

I am far from, noXXov dew. 

Nearly, almost, bXiyov deiv (used as an ad- 

verbial phrase ; or bXi- 
yov only). 

Far from it, noXXov deTv. 

Am going to, [is'XXm (also, am likely to, 

and am to, &c.) 

To gain, Keodaivco. 

Gain, ne'odog, eog, to. 

Stove, y.d\iivog y ov, r\. 

Mostly, rd noXXd. 

Front (adject.), 6 nooGdev. 

Prepositions, apcpi, neoi. 

Govern genit., dative, and accus. 

Signification : dpcpl or tisqI rov, l about, 7 in answer to 
both v)here ? and whither ? dpy} or neoiri or rivet fyeiv 
or eivai is, to belong to, 1 to be, or be employed about. 

w The construction SvoTv Scouroiu has disappeared, under the influ- 
ence of modern criticism, from the works of the great writers, with the 
single exception of Xen. Hell. i. 1, 5 : ETTtianXu Svoiv osovaaiv eXkooi vavalv, 
where Scovaaig is undoubtedly the proper reading. (Kroger) 

x ol djicpl (or 7r£joi) "Avvrov, Anytus and his followers or party : a 
phrase employed by Attic writers, when they chiefly allude to only one 
individual ; leaving it at the same time, for some reason, undecided 
and in the dark, whether they mean that individual alone, or others 
besides. (B.) 



otog. dtw. tislloo. 127 

tzbqI 7$ denotes care about: it follows verbs of fearing 

(deditvai), being at ease about (d-a^QUv), &e. 
aficpt and (more commonly) tzsqI rov are of about (de) 

as in 'to talk about? Also, cpo^eTa&ai 9 cpdovewaTv {to 

contend) tzeqi rivog. 
tzeqi nollov Tzoietad-ai or Tjyeiv&ai/ to value highly r , to 

make a great point of, or attach great importance to. 



Exercise 54. 

284. He asked whether this was possible. We cut 
with our front teeth. He told me that his father had the 
tooth-ache in one of his front teeth. He has large 12 front 
teeth. He was not of a character to fear death. He 
says that he does not choose to go in to the general, 
since (p) he is not at leisure. The Athenians sailed 
with (part.) nineteen ships. It is not possible that one 
man should ever do 37 all this. You will not escape from 
(86*. b) death. He is s mostly about the stove. Do not 
think that I do this from insolence. Young men are of 
a character to desire many things. Nearly all (of them) 
wish to entrust the arbitration to Socrates. They will 
be entrusted with this 41 by nearly all (of them). I am 
far from desiring all that you have. He fears the same 
things that we do (182). He says that he (219) is with- 
out fear of death. He says that the mother is afraid 
about her daughter. The agricultural population are 
doing well. I asked the general, whether he was going 
to march against the king. He says that he has been 
entrusted with this. 41 

y So TTEpl t:\eiovoSi i:\tivTov, &C. nepl wicpov. (See 243.) 



128 



oncog. ov \ir\. 



§ 48. 07TC0g. ov jU//. 

285. a. b) onwg,* when it refers to the future, has 
either the subj. or the future ihdic.J and retains them 
even in connection with past time, when the optative 
might have been expected (69). 

286. c. d) The verb on which the sentence with oncog 
depends is often omitted. 

Rem. This construction is equivalent to an energetic imperative ? j 
— ofjd or bpari may be supplied. 

287. ov f.u], h with the fuL indie, or aor. subj., is used | 
as an emphatic prohibition or denial. 

Rem. 1. This construction is probably elliptical: ov (Seos fori) 
fxrj . . . &c. 

With the second pers. sing, of the future indie, it is a prohibition; 
with the subj., and other persons of the future, a denial. 

Rem. 2. Elmsley says: " ov \xfi cum futuro vetantis est, cum 
subjunctivo vero negantis ;" but Hermann shows, that the prohib- 
itive meaning depends on the person, not on the tense. Elmsley 
explained this phrase in what seems the simpler way, by join- 
ing the un to the verb. Thus ov fxf] XaXfiueti ) = will you not not-talk? 
= will you not hold your tongue? = hold your tongue. But Her- 
mann (who at first agreed with Elmsley), Rost, Kiihner, &c. adopt 
the other explanation, supposing Sets sort, or some such phrase> 
understood. 

287*. a) yoovTi^s o n cog ftrfilv ai^gbv n o < f/a sig, take 
care to do nothing' disgraceful, 
b) %vvzftoi\nvev ovtco noiuv, oncog 6 ofoog avri6yr[ y 
he advised them to do this, that the pro- 
visions might hold out. 

a onus is properly ' how, and it cannot be used for ' that* except 
where for ' that' we might substitute ' that by this means* or ' that so.' 
With the future, iridic, it is always strictly ' how' orw rpd™. 

t The jut. with oira>s expresses a definite intention, for the accom- 
plishment of which vigorous measures are to be pursued. (R.) 

b Dawes laid it down as a rule, that the subjunctive of the aor. 1. 
act and mid. was never used with onus, ov prj, but that the jut. indie. 
was used instead. This rule is now given up by the best scholars ; but 
Buttrnann thinks that the subj. of the aor. 2. was employed with a kind 
oj predilection, and that, when the verb had no such tense, the jut. 
indie, was used in preference to the subj. of the aor. 1. 



onoog. ov \ir\. 129 

c) oncog av)]Q eoei, that you behave (or quit y our- 

self) like a man. 

d) onoog pi] 7iot/](jT]Te, o no7.ldx.ig ifiag efilaipev, be 

sure not to do xohat has often been detri- 
mental to you. 

e) ov firj lul/joeig ; do not chatter pray, ov ^ir\ 

yevrjrai jovro, this will assuredly not hap- 
pen. 

288. Vocabulary 48. 
To bethink myself, consid- ,«. 

er, take care, « ow ^ 

Talk, chatter, laltw. 

Whilst he was walking, ueraiv neommtov* 
Nevertheless, opcog. 

To be at dinner, deinveoo (delnvov, coena, the 

principal meal of the day 
taken towards evening). 

Preposition enl. 

Governs genit., dative, and actus. 

Signification : in answer to question where! generally 

with genii., sometimes with dat. in the sense of 'on*: 

as £<jp' innov oyeladai : ecp Innop nopsveodai. 
In answer to questions whither ? with accus. : as ml 16- 

q)ov 7ivd, to a certain hill ; and more generally, on, in } 

towards to, &c. 

They marched to Sardis, inl Udodeav. 
They sailed to Chios, enl rijg Xiov. 

Towards home, en oixov. 

enl with dative denotes in addition to, besides ; close 
by (as em rop no-tattoo) ; an aim or condition (266), and 
the being in one's power (65). 

enl with genit. often marks the time by means of some- 
thing contemporary, generally a contemporary per- 
son (65). 

To come for ) (to effect it), il&eip em rovrcp. 
this, \ (to fetch it), " " vovxo. 

6* 



130 



/*//• (Xtj ov. 



To be drawn up four deep, im tErraQcov Terdx&cu- 

To be named after a per- „ „ , , 

1 ovofia t%eiv 8 7T i r ivog. 

To endure a thing for the 
sake of praise, 

Exercise 55. 

289. Be sure to be here yourself (287*. d). Take care 
that your children may beas good c as possible* 2 (287*. a). 
Be sure to behave like men worthy of the liberty you 
possess. Take care not to say what has often hurt you. 
Take care to injure nobody. The Grecian Hoplites were 
drawn up three deep. Cyrus marched for Sardis with 
(part.) his Grecian Hoplites. He said that these things 
were not in his power 25 They made (mid.) a treaty on 
these conditions. He is named after the great king. 
He said that his boy was named after Thales, the phi- 
losopher. They killed him whilst he was at dinner. 
The Athenians, though (p) they were able to take the city, 
nevertheless sailed back home. In addition to all this, the 
Athenian generals have already sailed home. He told me 
that the general was not of a character 88 to act unjustly 
by the citizens. They are not sent out (on an under- 
standing that they are) to be slaves (227. b). He says 
that he dwells close by the river. He is very ambitious, 
so as (211) to do every thing for praise. He said that 
the corpse was of a superhuman size. 59 He said that he 
had suffered things too great for tears. 59 Do not do 
this, pray. They will assuredly not obey the laws of 
the city. Leave off chattering. 



<§> 49. \ii]. firj ov. 



290. a. b) After expressions of fear, solicitude, un- 
certainty, &c. \lt\ is used with the subjunctive or indie. 



c B£\thtto$. 






utj. \ir\ ov. 131 

Obs. The indie, is used when the speaker wishes to intimate his 
conviction that the thing feared, &c. has or will really come to pass. 
Of course the subj. becomes the opt. in connection with time past, 
and in a dependent proposition. (70 5 71.) 

291. c) The notion of fear is often omitted before $ 
ov, the verb being then generally in the subj. 

^92. f g) firj ov is also used with the infn. after 
many negative expressions : — 

1) After to hinder, deny, feel misgiving, &c. when they have a 
negative with them ; if not (as in 293. e), they are used with /4, 
where we use no negative.t 

2) After such expressions as Seivdv elvai, aia%p6v or aicxyvnv slvai, 

aiap^vveadai. 

3) After such negative expressions as, to be unable, impossible, 
not right, &c. 

4) (lit ov is also sometimes used with the participle a and with 
wore and infin., after negative expressions. 

293. a) dedocxa ft?] &dv<o, I fear that /shall die. 

dedoixa fiy ov fidveo, I fear that I shall not 
die. 
6) cpofiovpai fxT] Bvorjcopev, I fear we shall find. 
qofiovfAcu \i ij aiAQpoTEQcov 7} \i a q 7 r\ x a \i 8v, I fear 
that we have missed (lost) both. 

c) alia (Jirj ovx \ didaxiov, but perhaps it is a 

thing that cannot be taught. 

d) si ds yevrjaofied-a inl fiaailet, t i ifiTiodcov \ir\ 

ovy^i ndvza ra deivoTara na&oviag ano&a- 
veiv ; but if we shall fall into the power 
of the king, what will prevent us from 
being put to death, after suffering all 
that is most terrible ? 

e) aTtoxcoXvaai tovq ^EXXqvag \ir\ sX&eiv, to pre- 

vent the Greeks from coming, tjqvovv- 
x o \ir\ TzeTZTcoxsvai, they (denied that they 
had fallen) said that they did not fall. 
amGTovvieg avrbv fxij rfeuv, not believing 
that he would come. 

t But the pfi is not always expressed after verbs of hindering, pre- 
venting, &C a^aco ere nrjSav, &C 

d Thus SvvaXyriTOS yap av j etrjv roiavSe fxr] ov KaroiKTcipuv eSpav. (Soph. 

Ant. 96.) 



132 



pi]. ftij ov. 



f) oh yap vnta^ov ^tfrrjaBtv, 6 cog ov% ogiov ooi ov 

fjiij ov ftoq&tiv dixaioovvYj, for you prom- 
ised to investigate it (with us), as hold- 
ing it impious in you not to come to 
the assistance of justice. 

g) ovie p?] fA8[xv7iO&(u dmaficu avzov, ovte (tepviifAS- 

vog fxrj ovx maivuvj I can neither not re- 
member him, nor remembering not 
praise him. 



293*. Vocabulary 49. 
Capable of being taught, 

that can be taught, 
Science, 

Know, know how, 
To fall into a person's 

power or hands, 
To prevent a person, 



didaxrog, r\, ov. 



or after 
in ques- 



(of 
by 



£71107)^7], rig, v r 
intOTa/Aca. 

ylyvzodai ml nvi. 

ifX7io8(x)v slvai \ir\ 
negatives or 
tions implying a nega- 
tive, fjirj ov. ix7iodc6v is, 
out of the way of. 

ootog : s dtxaiog, a, ov, 
what is permitted 
human law. 

71 171 Z CO. h 

XColvCO, U7ZOX(OXVG). 

dpi top ou. 

dtidco. 1 

V7Z07Z78VCO (accus. of person). 

Preposition piErd. 
Governs genit., dative, and accus. 

e 282, note c. 

{ iTTiarrjjmiy iiucTfi<rof.iai > rj-rriaTfjOnv. Imp. rjTrtardfjirjv. 2 sing. pres. citl- 
araaai. 

% But as opposed to lep6s f 8<nos relates to man, i. e. to natural laws : 
hence leph Kai nam, ' divine and human things ' 

** iriXTtO, -rrcaovf/ui, Tr'arrMKa. cvtaov. 

» deiSoj, Seiaofjiai, didoixa and 6i6Xa (both with meaning of pres.) Aor. 
1. c6ciaa. 



Right, lawful (as deter- 
mined by divine or nat- 
ural laws. 

Fall, 

Hinder, prevent, 

To deny, 

Fear, 

Suspect, 



\IT\ WITH RELATIVES, &C. 133 

Signification: with accus., after. 
" " with gen it., with. 

" " with da£.(only in the poets),among } inter. 



Exercise 56. 

294. I fear his coming to some harm (lest he should 
suffer something). I feared the boy would come to 
some harm. 1 fear we shall find, that (p) these things 
are not so. I fear about my boy lest he should come to 
some harm. The father, though he feared about his 
boy, nevertheless went away. I cannot either go or 
stay (110). I knew that they would prevent 74 the king 
from coming ^293. e) into the country. I fear that we 
have treated them ill. I fear that the rascal will not 
die. It is disgraceful not to defend the laws of our 
country. Nothing prevents this from being (293. e) 
true. What prevents us from dying at once ? It is a 
disgrace not to be without fear of death. It is a terrible 
thing, not to bear what comes from the gods. It is not 
right, not to choose to fight for one's country. It is not 
right not to die for one's country, if it be necessary. I am 
ashamed not to appear to have conferred great benefits 
upon my country. I fear this will happen. After this, 
what prevents us from dying? They sent out men to 
prevent themt from coming into the country. 



<§> 50. \ir\ loith Relatives ■, the Infinitive, &c. 

295. a. c) firj is used in relative sentences and with 
participles, adjectives. &c, whenever the negative does 
not direct ly and simply deny an assertion w T ith respect 
to some particular mentioned person or thing. 

Hence relative sentences, participles, and adjectives take (xf), 
t See 238*, the third example, 



134 pi] WITH RELATIVES, &C. 

whenever they might be resolved into a sentence with l ff? or de- 
scribe only a supposed case : not particular individuals, but individ- 
uals of a class, k 

296. d) The infinitive generally takes ptj, except 
where the opinions or assertions of another person are 
stated (in sermone obliquo). See 110. 

297. b) With mare 1 the infinitive takes pq, the in- 
dicative ov. 

298. a) tig ds dovvai Svvarai szeQcp, a iiij avrog e^ei ; 

but who can give to another what he has 
not got himself? 

b) aacpdleidv aoi naQt^ovrai, ware ve fx^deva 

IvttsTv, they will afford you security, so 
that no man shall annoy you. 
nQay^ara naQH^ov, coat e ovkst i edvvaro 
jo atQarEVfxa noQevea&aiy they harassed 
them, so that the army could not ad- 
vance further (any longer). 

c) ovdeig . . . oatig fjirj TzaQsazai, no one who shall 

not be present (or, who is not present)." 1 
6 \ir\ marsvow, he who does not believe. 
ia fA,t] xald, dishonorable things. 

d) to iirj ti\mv yiqoviag dvoaiov son, it is wrong 

(an unholy thing) not to honour old men. 

e) iitj y&voiTo? may it not be so ! iirj idoig tovto, 

may you never see this ! 

k The thing to be considered, with respect to a relative or parti- 
cipial clause, is, whether it introduces some new particular concerning 
the object spoken of, or forms one complex notion with it. In this way 
it merely restricts the general notion to a particular sense ; the thing 
spoken of being, not the substantive itself, but the substantive so limited. 

1 Or itSt which is used (though less frequently) in the same way. 

m In connection with future time, the Greeks and Romans marked 
the futurity of the condition or connected notion. We generally do 
not. Thus in the example we should say, < a man who is not present/ 
taking that as a general notion, without referring it to the time of the 
other verb. The future must be used when it is necessary to mark this 
out ; but to use it always, as some writers do, who plume themselves 
upon their accuracy, is against the idiom of our language ; of which 
any one may convince himself by examining a few consecutive pages 
oi the English Bible. 

n Translated by ' God forbid ! ' in the English Bible. 



\ir\ WITH RELATIVES, &C. 135 

299. Vocabulary 50. 

One who has slain a man > / « . < / , Mrt + _ 

.• , , . , , . avtoysig, gog, o et 71 (one ter- 

with his own hand, the m j A n V * ' v 

actual murderer, "' 

Wrong, wicked, impious, dvoaiog, og, ov. (See 293*.) 

Security, safety from dan- &a(f > lsia> ^ ^ 

Safe, aacpcdrjg, rjg, eg. 

To be in safety, to be safe, iv top aacpalet elvai. 

Voluntarily, i&elovTqg, ov, 6. 

Lazy, idle, aoyog, 6g, 6v (from a, aoyov). 

Preposition naqd. 

Governs genit., dative, and accus. 

Signification : with genit. from, after such verbs as to 
receive, learn, bring, come ; and with the agent after 
the passive verb. 

With the accus., to, and (in answer to where ?) at. naoa 
with the ace. has also the meaning of the Latin pra- 
ter ; besides, beyond, against. 

With the dative, beside, along side of, by, among &c. ; 
as hrrj naoa r§ facilei, "he stood in the king's pres- 
ence;" ttuq ifioi, "in my opinion" {meojudicio.) 

Besides his bread, naQa tov aqrov. 

Beyond, more than the x x *-- 

J . , ' naQa tovg akkovg. 

Against the laws of the x * ~ a ~ a , 

& i naQa zovg tear weoov xreanovg. 

Contrary to or beyond x *,£ 

what was expected, naqa o$av. 

Phrases. 

I had a narrow escape from naga ijiixqov rjl&ov ano- 

death, ftavsTv. 

I had a narrow escape, naq bllyov dieyvyov. 

° Properly, as a volunteer. 



136 SOME ADVERBS OF TIME, &C. 

Exercise 57. 

300. He who (;;) does not love his father, is impious. 
I fear it may be impious not to honour old men. No one 
who is not present (298. c), shall receive money. I en- 
treat you not to stay. The sons of the Persians of the 
present day 11 pursue what is dishonorable. He who 
(yj)does not trust God, has become miserable, un- 
known to himself. 76 Not to love one's own children is 
wicked. It is not possible for me to give you what I do 
not possess myself. He is too wise 60 not to know that. 
Not to do good to your friends, when (p)you can, is 
wicked. Pursue those things which are not (p) against 
the laws of the gods He said that, if there was any oc- 
casion, he would labour 37 more than the rest. Know 
that I will incur 74 this danger with you (pi.) Besides 
his bread he has wine. I am conscious 73 of having had 
a narrow escape from death. He was very lazy, so as 
to undergo no labour voluntarily. He was very lazy, 
so that he underwent no labour, at least toillingly} 5 
I had a narrow escape from those who were pursuing 
me. These things happened contrary to what was ex- 
pected. If we conquer the barbarians in 42 one more 
battle, we shall be in safety. I have received this wine 
from the faithful slave. They denied that they were 
(293. e) the actual murderers. I suspect p that this is 
impious. He went away, because (p) he suspected 
that it was impious to remain. Shall we say this (99) 
or not ? 



§ 51. Some Adverbs of Time, fyc. 

301. a) Some adverbs govern a noun in the same 
case as the adjectives from which they are derived. 

P {yiroirreva is followed by ace. and infin., or (when it implies, fear) 
by \)t). vTronrevaas prj ri npds rfjs ttoXccos vnairiov drj, &-C. (Xen. An. 

iii. 1, 53 ) 






SOME ADVERBS OF TIME, &C. 137 



302. 1) Hence comparatives and superlatives take 
the genitive. 2) Some particles are sometimes simply 
adverbs, and sometimes prepositions governing a case: 
e. g. icfAa ofxov, together : — apa, (or 6[aov) rolg alloig. 

303. b) cog, as a preposition (=77Qog), is only joined to 
persons. 

304. Some adverbs, especially relative ones, refer to 
verbs and whole clauses, and thus connect propositions 
This is the origin of conjunctions. 

305. d) a%Qi or fAt'xQi, ecog^ and ears, both in the sense 
of 'until,' and in that of i as long as] govern the subj. 
or opt. when there is any uncertainty ; {he indie, when 
not, 

306. 1) Of course the opt. will appear without av 
in oratione obllqua, even where there is no uncertainty. 
2) Hence, when a thing is spoken of as an object or 
purpose contemplated, the subj. with av 1 ' will be used 
in connection with pres. or future time ; the optative,* in 
connection with past time and the oratio obliqua. 

307. e) 7TQip, as being a comparative, takes rj (which 
however is often omitted), and generally the infinitive ; 
but the subj. with av, if the event is future. 

Hence the subj. with av will be used after the imperative &&& fu- 
ture with negatives : i. e. when before = till. 

308. a) at 1 cog r\\icov 7iolz\ii](5o\m>, we will conduct 

the war in a manner worthy of ourselves, 
b) EiaJjl&ev co g apt, he came in to me. 



9 iJieypig ov is often found : So e«s ov, &c. 

r With Ttoiv and //m'-a. and (in poetry) with ^XP 1 > ^X.? 1 ' $***» ^ e 
sm6;. is sometimes found without av. (K.) 

s And according to Hermann (against Elmsley) with av. " Ubi in 
recta oratione ~p\v av et similes particulae conjunctivum requirunt, in 
oratione obliqua manet av, sed conjunctive) substituitur optativus ut pro- 
prius orationis obliquse modus." (Prsef. ad Track, p 8.) — Hartung says: 
" When the optative thus takes (in oblique narration) the place of the 
subjunctive (in direct), the particle av may, lohenever one pleases, be 
left at his old post." (Partikellehre, ii. 304.) — Poppo, however, rejects 
av from Xen. An. vii. 7, 35. idiovro [xr] direXQeXv irgiv av dirayayoi to arpa- 
rtVfxa (which in direct narration would be, fxfj dne\dris nplv av diraydy^K; 
....), a passage quoted by Hartung. 



138 



SOME ADVERBS OF TIME, &C. 



c) naQSGOtiou bnors xelevaeig, I will be with you 

whenever you bid me. 

d) TTEQtfjiwco etog av (or piyQig av) il&r(, I will 

wait till he comes (venerit). 
7I017J60V rovro sag hi l % e a t i, do this whilst 

you still may. 
save (f*8v) at onovdcu ycrav, ovnoTE 8nav6[iriv 

rjfxag oiktecqcov, as long as the treaty lasted, 

I never ceased to think upon ourselves 

with pity. 
OV7TOT8 h]yov6iv 8(5% av a q% coo iv avtcov, they 

never leave q/Ttill they rule over them. 

e) TtQiv rj il&Eiv 8U8 (or 7tq)v H&8W 8fi8 * before I 

came, ttqiv av 'il&to, till I come (= till 1 
shall have come ; venero). 
309. Vocabulary 51. 



1 



Near, 

Near the city. 

Apart, 

Apart from, or without the 

rest, 
Immediately, directly, 
Directly or straight to the 

city, 
Immediately on his arrival, 
From our very birth, as 

soon as we are born, 
Most of all, 
Except a very few. 
Except if, 
Out of, without the city. 



evjvg. 

iyyvg r^g nolecog. 

XMQig. 

%wQig tcov allcov (so di%a 

7ivog). 
Evdvg. 

svOv u rtjg Tiolscog. 

Evdvg TjKCOV. 

evxJtvg yEvofiwoi. 

uuXiara navraiv. 
7i)j t v navv oUycov. 
nlijv 8i. 
8^co 7 rig nolEtog. 



Exercise 58. 
210. Do not go away till I come. I will not cease 

1 Also -rrplv ijXOov iyw. The preceding clause has often irpdvBev in it, 
which makes the -npiv appear superfluous. 

u cvOvs and cvOb are no more different words than ^xP l? anc * ^X9 l ' 
but the Attics generally used evOvg of time, evQv of place. It is only acci 
dentally, that evOvs is identical in form with the masc. adjective. 



ON INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 139 

fighting till I have conquered you. It is not possible for 
you to conquer your enemies out of the city, till you 
have chastised those in the city itself. He went away 
before I came. I was banished myself before you re- 

,timied-from-banishment. Whilst you are still at leisure, 
speak. We were afraid, till (tifyqig) the Greeks sailed 

, away. They did not cease till (before) they sent for the 
boy's father. We used to wait about v till the gates 

,were opened. I will not go away till (before) I have 
conquered you. He said, that he would come to us ? 

, whilst he still might. Do not cease, till you have mas- 
tered your temper. Whilst you remain, combat the boy's 

i disorder. He said that he feared the gods most, when- 

| ever he was most prosperous (was doing best). The 
general went in to the king. And they (of persons be- 
fore mentioned, 38) obeyed, except if any man stole 
any thing. He said that he was nearly related 52 to him. 
They march straight to the city. Immediately on his 
arrival, he told me that we ought to set about 38 the task. 
From our very birth we want many things. He died as 
soon as he was born. 



§ 52. On Interrogative Sentences. 

311. Besides the interrogative adverbs and pronouns, 
the following particles are used in questions. 

312. aga is mostly used in questions that imply some- 
thing of uncertainty, doubt, or surprise. 

313. The answer ' Yes' is expected by, — 

<xq ov ; 7\ ydo ; ov ; ovxovv ; alio rt i] / 

314. The answer c No' is expected by, — 

ago, \ir\; r\ nov (num forte ?) ; \it\ or pav ; w 

v Trepijj.evo). 

w n<2v=nri ovv : but the etymology being forgotten, ovv is sometimes 
i used with it. Also ^wi> ^ ; and n<Zv ov ; the latter requiring an assent- 
ing answer (=nonne ?). 



140 ON INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 

Obs ov expects yes ; p'/, no. — oi is often followed by pivroi : also 
by oil, 5fj irovj with which it has an ironical force, I imagine, forsooth, 
Also own ttov. 

315. h. i) tlra, 87Ttira (then — and yet — and neverthe- 
less) express astonishment and displeasure, implying 
that what they suppose has been done, is inconsistent 
with something before mentioned. 

316. k) From the frequent use of alio rt %, it came to 
be used as a simple interogative particle, and the 'r\ 
was often dropt. x It is then better to write it as one 
word, allon (K.) 

317. Ti7zaOojv ; (having suffered what ? = ) what pos- 

sesses you to . . . &c. ? 
ti ua&cov ; (having learnt what? = ivhat in- 
duces you to . . . &c. ? 

These phrases are used in indignant, reproachful questions : the 
former obviously relates to the feelings ; the latter to the under- 
standing, and consequently to more deliberate offences. 

318. a) ccq ev7vx^ ; are you prosperous ? 
aq ovx tanv aa&Evrjg ; is not he ill ? ) ry pq i 

he is ill, isn't he ? ) L '■' 
a q a urj eartv a6&evf t g ; is he ill ? ) rj& n 

he is not ill> is he?\\- 

c) rj nov T8i6l(i?]xag ravra ; you have not surely 

dared to do this ? [No.] 

d) 7\ yao, idv u sqcotcc os Zodxoarrig, ano'AQivu ; if 

Socrates puts any question to you, you 
will answer him, to ill you not ? [Yes.] 

e) ovri nov iyco ayoom'QofJLai ; surely I am not 

behaving rudely am I? [No.] 

f) uoov ti as adixei ; y he has not injured you in 

any respect has he ? [No.] 

g) ur\ 7i v8<6tsqov z ayyt'XXstg ; you bring no bad 

news I hope, do you ? [No.] 

x Stallbaum thinks it was dropt in animated, impassioned ques- 
tions, and retained in those, of a more sedate and sober character. 

y The present of this word is used for the perfect, for a man con- 
tinues to wrong us till he has made us reparation. (Heindorf, Protag. 
463.) 

z pemrepov for viov (a new thing ; news), and that per euphemismum 
for kqlkov. (Heind. Trot. 461.) 



b) 



ON INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 



141 



h) elr eoiyug TJlovrog &v ; and did you then 
hold your tongue, you Plutus ? 

l) 8 77 8 IT OVX OIU &80Vg dv&Q037ZCx)V Tl CfQOVTl^eiV / 

do you then really not think that the 
gods regard mankind ? 

k) alio Tl 7] 778QI TTleLGTOV 7701TJ, 07T(X)g 03Q fizltlGTOl 

ol V8CO78Q01 8GOVTCU ; do not you look upon 
it as a thing of extreme importance, 
that the rising generation should turn 
out as ivell as possible ? 
alXori ovv oiye cpilowodsig cpilovai to yJooog ; 
what ! do not the covetous love gain ? 

319. Vocabulary 52. 



'To strike, 
Free, 
Weak, ill, 



Weakness, 

complaint, 
Fond of gain, 



infirmity, a 



TV7T7CO. 

il8i>{r8Qog, a, ov. 
avdsvrjg, rjg, 8g (a, c&8t>og, 
strength). 



aad'svsia, ag, rj. 
cpiloxsodrjg, tfg, ig. 

Preposition noog. 

Governs genit., dative, and accus. 

Signification : to, close by ; in answer to whither? agog 
generally takes the accus. : in answer to where ? the 
dative. 

With ace. noog also means towards, against, in refer- 
ence to, with a view to, in comparison of. 

With genit. noog means from, by (after to hear, to be 
praised or blamed by, and frequently after the pas- 
sive verb). 

It is also used with genit. of situation and in adjura- 
tions. 

I am wholly wrapt up in 

this, 
To pay close attention to 

one's affairs, 



n qhg t ovt cp olog eipi. 
noog Toig noay\iaGi yiyv8G#ai. 



In addition to this, 



TTQOg TOVTQig. 



142 ON INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 

To fight against a person, ngog nva. 

To calculate with one- loyl&a&ai TtQog iavtov (so 

Self, With GX87TTEG&CU, 6X071EIV, 

to consider). 
To be dishonoured by, azipd&a&ai nqog nvog. 

On the father's side, nqog narQog. 

1) To be consistent with, 

like, characteristic of; 2) 

to be on his side : 3) to 7 , 

make for him, to be for mm n *° s WOff ' 

his interest ; to be a good 



thing for him. 



Exercise 59. 



320. Are not these things for our interest rather than 
for that of our enemies (318. b) ? Is not he wholly wrapt 
up in these things? You do not surely wish to have 
wine in addition to your bread (318. c)? l&o not surely 
act insolently do I (318. e) ? You are not come to bring us 
(p) any bad news, I hope (are you) ? [No.] And are you, 
then, not without fear of death, though (p) a pious man 
(318. h)l And do you, then, not think that you shall 
be punished for what you have done (p. pass.) against 
the laws of the gods ? What possesses you to strike 8 
a free man? What induces you not to choose to stay 
with us any longer? What possesses you, that you 
will not cease to behave-insolently 74 towards your 
friends? These things are not more for the interest of 
our enemies than of us, are they? [No.] Have you 
been in any respect dishonoured by Xenoclides ? Do 
you not think it a most important thing, that your child- 
ren should be brought up as well as possible (318. &)? 
It is not like a pious man to fear death excessively. 
The other party are more on Cyrus's side. Know that 
these things are 74 for the interest of Cyrus. I know that 
he is on the side of the Athenians. De we not both see 
and hear from our very birth ? 95 

* Translate as if it were, ' having suffered what do you strike V &c. 



INDIRECT SINGLE QUESTIONS. 143 



<§> 53. Indirect single Questions. 

321. a) The proper forms for indirect questions are 
those pronouns and adverbs which are formed from the 
direct interrogatives by the prefixed relative syllable 
6 — , which gives them a connecting power. 

Thus from ttovos ) noTog ; nov ; ttqQcv ; 7roj£ ; &c. are formed brroaos, 

biroios, ottov, b-rroOsv, onus, &C. 

So o<ms, formed by prefixing the relative to ris, is the proper de- 
pendent interrogative. See 72, note y. 

322. But as the Greeks often pass from oblique to 
direct narration, so they often use the simple interroga- 
tives in dependent questions ; and even, as in (6), inter- 
mix the two. 

323. c) Occasionally, though very seldom, the rela- 
tive forms themselves are used in dependent questions. 

c) When, as in this example, a pronoun or noun is the accus. 
after the first verb, and the nom. before the second, it is generally 
expressed in the accus. ^ and not in the nominative. 

324. d) When the person of whom the question is 
asked repeats it, he uses the forms beginning with 6 — . 

325. a) ova oida (or ovx s^co) onoiTqan^iiau (See 72. b). 
ovx oida oct iq sort, I don't know who he 
is. ova oida o n co g to 7ioay\ia mooter, I 
don't know how he did the thing, ano- 
kqivoli avdoeicag 6 n 6 t e q a aot opaiveTai, an- 
swer boldly which of the two is your 
opinion. 

b) loper c 7t6g a ts ivTi xcu brio i a, we know both 
how many they are, and of what kind. 

c) bqug ovv Tjftag, scpy, oooi lc\iiv ; do you see, 

said he; how many we are? (or how 
many there are of us 7) 

b The accusative is generally retained in the English Bible j " I 
know thee, who thou art," &c. 
c See 71. c. 



144 INDIRECT SINGLE QUESTIONS. 

d) olxog* 7i noiug ; — o,n noico ; you there, what 
are you doing ? — what am I doing ? 

326. Vocabulary 53. 

Preposition vno. 

Governs genit., dative, and accus. 

Signification: with genit., by, after passive verbs and 

active verbs with a passive notion. Also, to express 

a cause ; from, out of through. 
"With dat., under, after verbs of res^only: sometimes. 

instead of the gen., after passive verbs (da^vai vno 

7lVl). 

"With accus., under, after verbs of rest as well as verbs 

of motion. Also, about, of time. 

To die by the hands of, anodavuv vno {gen). 

To learn by compulsion, in avayxrig. 

He did it through or from < ^ *, ,*, , N 

> ° ^ fjro 0£0i;£ [osog, ovg, to), 

jear, 

To be mad from intoxica- 
tion. 



vno iiiftrig fiaivsad'ai. 



At or about nightfall, vno vvxra (sub noctem). 



Exercise 60. 

327. The slave died by the hands of his master. 
Most boys learn by compulsion. I perceived (p)that 
the boy learnt by compulsion. I do not repent of hav- 
ing learnt 74 these things by compulsion. He said that 
the shameless flatterer was mad from intoxication. 
The few are wounded by the many. I will go away on 
condition that (269. e) you will yourselves set out at 
nightfall. Do you see, said he, how many men are 
wounded by a few ? I don't know how the eagle had 
his eye knocked out. 41 I shall praise (all) whom I see 
(94. 1) marching in good order. How much would your 
possessions fetch, if they were sold? He says that he 

d ovrog, avrr), are used (instead of voc.) in exclamations ; you there ! 



DOUBLE QUESTIONS. 145 

will hold his tongue though he should have 31 much to 
say. If the slave should die by your hands, you will be 
punished. Do you see how many there are of the ene- 
my ? He says that he has been entrusted with these 
things. 41 These things happened about the same time. 



§ 54. Double Questions. 

328. Direct double questions are asked by notzqov 
(or noreQa) — r), less commonly by aqa — rj. 

Rem. fjLbii/ — n is still less common : ?? — n belongs to poetry, espe- 
cially epic poetry. 

329. Indirect double questions are asked by sire — 
ens : 8i — r) : tzotsqov — r\. 

Rem. v — rj belongs to epic poetry, though occasionally found in 
Attic poets, drs — % and et — eirs, are also used by poets. 

330. a) 7T078Q0V expovrou KvQcp, r] ov ; will they follow 

Cyrus or not ? 
nqiv 8t]lov siycu . . . not sqov Hxpovrcu Kvocp, rj 
ov, before it was knoion, whether, &c. 
V) tovrcp rbv vovv 7iq6g8%8, d dixaia liyco, rj \ir\, 
attend to this, whether what I speak is 
just or not. 

C) GX07ltt\l8V 8 IT 8 8VAOg OVZCOg 8%81V, 8 it 8 [AT}, let US 

consider whether it is likely to be so. or 
not. 

331. Vocabulary 54. 

The road home, r) okads e odog. 

To suffer a thing to be 

done, to allow it to be moioodcoJ 

done with impunity. 

e oha6s is from the ace. of a shorter form (such as oi'£, oi<6g) of oIkos. 
Though this form does not occur, several similar ones do ; e. g. d\Ki, 

KpOKd, for d\KT), KOOKT\V. (B.) 

f It takes the infinitive if the thing is to be prevented; the partici- 
ple if it is to be avenged. Of course (by 73, note r) irepti&eTv will be used 
for aor., Trepi6\f/e<r0ai for jut. — The phrase brings to one's mind our € to 

7 



146 OBSERVATIONS ON El, Idv. 

Boldly, &olqq<x)v (participle). 

Restore an exile, xazdycn. 

To pay attention to, to at- rbv vovv Tzooatjeiv, or ttqoge- 

tend to, x 8fV on ly? with dat. 

Likely, natural, elxog. s 

Exercise 61. 

332. I don't know whether he is alive or dead. If 
you attend to your affairs yourselves, all will be well. 
If you attended to your affairs yourselves, all would be 
well. If you had attended to your affairs yourselves, 
all would be well. I will not allow our land to have 
been ravaged with impunity. Are the same dogs pur- 
suing the sheep, or not? Go away boldly on condition 
of holding your tongue. 

I fear that we shall forget our road home. I knew 
that they would not suffer 74 their country to be ravaged. 
O citizens, let us not suffer our country to be ravaged. 
They will not stand by and see us injured. They 
made peace on condition that both (parties) should re- 
tain [have) their own. He said that Xenoclides was 
too wise 60 to be deceived by his slaves. He says that 1 
more arms were taken than could have been expected 
from the number of the dead. 59 He says that he 72 is 
not afraid of death. The king sent persons to restore 
(the exile) Xenoclides (238*, third example). 



§ 55. Observations on el, idv. 

333. a) el is used for on (that, after &av[id£co, and 
some other verbs expressive of feelings. 

stand by and see' (a man injured) ; but it gets its meaning in a different 
way ; i. e. not from the notion of seeing and yet not acting, but from 
that of not seeing, of looking round about an object instead of at it. 
Hence it agrees more nearly with our to overlook (an offence). 

s Neut. of eUtog, part, of coma (am like), which has three forms of 
part. Ioiku>s } cixios, otVojs. (B.) 



OBSERVATIONS ON si, idv. 147 

This arises from the Attic habit of avoiding positiveness in speak- 
ing ; which, in this case, speaks of what may be quite certain as 
only probable. 

334. b) el is (as we have seen, 80) used for ' whether :' 
it has this meaning after verbs of seeing, knowing, con- 
sidering, asking, saying, trying, &c. 

335. idv is also used in this way with the subjunctive 
when the question relates to an expected case that re- 
mains to be proved. (K.) 

336. a) dyavaxrco el ovr<XKSi h a vow fjirj oiog x sijjli 

eiTisiv, I am indignant at being so unable 
to express my meaning. 

ovx ay an a si \w\ dixrjv tdmxsv, he is not con- 
tented with not having been punished. 

av ix a ±oo si fxrfisig v^oov doyi^srai, I am as- 
tonished, that not one amongst you is 
angry. 
b) Gxsxpai 1 si b'Elh'jvcav vouog xdlhov t%ei, con- 
sider whether the Grecian law is better. 

axsxpai idv rods ooi palXov dosaxi], see 
whether this pleases you better, 
[irjds tovto aQorjTOv sgtco (tor, idv as 7ioog 7zsiaco, 
nor let me leave this unsaid, if I may by 
any means persuade yon (i. e. that I 
may see whether) I can, &c. 

337. Vocabulary 55. 

Am indignant, dyavaxrsw (dative; but it 

takes the accus. of a neut. 
pron.) 

O Athenians, go dvdgsg 'A&qvouot. 

Please, aQSGxco k (dat.) 

b Demonstrative pronouns and adverbs are strengthened by what is 
called the i demonstrativum, which is a long accented i answering to 
-ce in Lat. Short vowels are thrown away before it. ovroal {this man 

here), ovrrji', tovtl, &LC. So otirconi. 

* The Attics use (tkottm, aKOTzovjxai^ for Jfrescnt (not cnarrro/iat), but ani- 
ipoj/ai^ IffKexpafxriVy and eoKEnpai, from aKiitropai, depon. middle. 

k dpeuKCOj d|0cO-a>, &,C perf. pass, tjpeauai .* ijniaOrju. 



148 CONDENSED QUESTIONS. 



Exercise 62. 



338. It is this very thing, O Athenians, that T am in- 
dignant at,i that you allow half your country *(58) to 
have been ravaged with impunity. This it is that I am 
indignant at. Cyrus being indignant, sets out with 
(part.) five horsemen for Sardis. He pleases more men 
than any other single person. 64 He says that he is of a 
mild disposition (137. a). I asked him whether the 
king was of a mild disposition or not. Do you see how 
many are suffering the same as you (182. a)? Do you 
know of what kind the laws of the Persians are (323) ? 
You there, what do you say? — What do I say ! Al- 
though, if any man is of a mild disposition, it is he. 63 
I wonder that you are not able to go in vnthout being 
observed. 1 * He says that he is not of a character to do 
any thing whatever for the sake of gain (283). 



<§> 56. Condensed Questions. 

339. a. b. c) By attaching the interrogative to a par- 
ticiple, or using it in an oblique case, the Greeks employ 
a single sentence in questions where we must use two. 

Rem. Thus in translating from English into Greek, a relative 
clause attached to an interrogative one will be got rid of. 

340. a) ti av noiovvr eg avaldfiotev rtjv aQ%alav uQSTqv: 

what must they do to recover their an- 
cient virtue!: (or, by what conduct can 
they, &c?) 
b) xaTa[A?nd&t]/.ag ovv rovg ti noiovvr ag to 
ovopa tovto anoxalovaiv ; (have you learnt 
= ) do you know, then, what those persons 
do, to whom men apply this name ? 



i lam indignant at this thing itself. 



CONDENSED QUESTIONS. 149 

c) x Ivag tovgS oqco %evovg ; who are these 
strangers whom / behold ? 

341. Vocabulary 56. 
With what object in view, ri fiovlopevog; 
By Jupiter, vrj Aia, or vrj ibv m Aia. 

No, by Jupiter, \ia Aia. 

Apollo, ^AnvWiav? covog, 6. 

Neptune, Iloaeidoov, avog, 6. 

Minerva, 'A&rjva, ag, fj. 

Swallow, %ehdo&v, ovog, fj. 

Nightingale, aqdcov,? ovog (ovg), r\. 

Spring, eaQ, q saQog, to. 

Once, ana's,. 

Bring, lead, ayco. 

To burn out, ixxaico. 

Peacock, rang, oa, 6. 



Exercise 63. 

342. One swallow does not make a spring. He told 
me that one swallow did not make a spring. I asked 
by what conduct I should please the gods. The eagle 
is having its eyes burnt out. 4 l He says that the eagle 
has had its eyes burnt out. With what view did the 
other party march into the country of the Scythians the 
same spring ? The peacock lays only once a year. He 
(p) who commits no injury/ requires no law. By 
Apollo, I will be with you, if I am wanted. By Minerva, 
I will free the boy from his disorder. Who is this phy- 
sician that you are bringing (340. c) ? Will you not go 
away at once ? — No, by Jupiter, not I (eyooye). Even if 

m The art. is generally used except in pf] or pa Aia. 
n 'AttoAAojv and HoaeiSiov have ace. 'A^AXo), Iloo-ctJw, voc. "AttoXXoj/, 
HoaeiSov. 

° yektScbv. V. %e\i3oT. 

P drjddjv, has also G. drjSovs, V. arjSoT. 

q In prose tap is nom. in use ; but the gen. and dat. are of the con- 
tracted form, tjpos, rjpi> 

r Who injures not at all. 



150 VARIOUS CONSTRUCTIONS. 

you should be unseen by others, you will at least be con- 
scious 73 yourself of having acted unjustly. What do those 
sons do with whom all men, so to speak, 46 are angry 
(340. b)l He envies every body. 86 By Neptune, there 
is nobody he does not plot against (277). Envy nobody. 
The nightingale sings most beautifully. 



§ 57. Various Constructions. 

343. a) 1] nr\v is a solemn form of asseveration. 

344. b) The prepos. avv is omitted before avrvp, avr^, 
&c. which then = together with, with. 

345. c) afxcpoTZQov is useA adverbially (or elliptically) 
by the poets; both; as well — as, <fcc. So aptyorsga is 
used in reference to two words, without being made to 
conform to them in case. 

346. d) When xai refers to allog, it has the force of 
especially, in particular, 

347. e) sqxsg&ki, UvolI) with part, fut., is to be going 
to, or on the point of. 

348. f g) Sometimes £/oo makes an emphatic circum- 
locution with the past particip. : and with some verbs 
(e. g. the 2nd pers. oUtiquv, naiQuv, cplvdQsiv) it is used to 
make a good-humoured observation. 

349. h) cpsQcov appears redundant in some expressions, 
but denotes a vehemence of purpose not altogether free 
from blame. 

Hence it. answers to our to go and do a (foolish, impetuous) thing ; 
to take a thing andjling it away, &c. 

350. a) tj fiijv maOov tovto, I protest that I suffered 

this. o\xvv\ii s rj [irjv dcoauv, I swear that I 
will assuredly give (or, solemnly swear 
that I will give). 

8 Iffivvfti, biiovfjiai, 6}i'')f>oKa. (ojiorra. Perf. pass, tytojuooy/ai, but the other 
persons and aor. 1. pass, more commonly without the o-. 



VARIOUS CONSTRUCTIONS. 151 

b) ancoXovro at vrjeg avzoTg avdgdaiv, the ships 

ivere lost together with their crews. 

c) dtaqit'QovTsg rj aoqu'a rj xaXkei r\ a pep 67 zq a, dis- 

tinguished either for wisdom or beauty, 
or both. 

d) t d re all a evScupovsT xal naldag e%si xutj]- 

xoovg avzcp, he is happy both in other re- 
spects and especially in having obedient 
children. 

e) 07T8Q %a l eqcov, what I was going to say. 

f) Tiakai & a v ft a Gag eyco, I have long been 

wondering. 

g) 77aiZeig u sycov, you are joking. 

h) vnifiaksv savior qp e q oo v Orjfiaioig, he went and 
flung himself into the hands of the The- 
bans. 

351. Vocabulary 57. 

To swear, opvvui (ace. of the god or 

thing sworn by). 
Just as he was 5 il n£ Q or wa^^ dyer. 

Exercise 64. 

352. The damsel is beautiful in person (137) in other 
respects, and especially has very beautiful eyes* 12 He 
swore that he would assuredly give them three talents 
if he had them. I swear that 1 will assuredly do this. 
I swear by all the gods that I will assuredly confer a 
great benefit upon the state. Those with the king, with 
(/>) their heads uncovered, charged the ranks of the 
Greeks. He told me that the ships were lost, together 
with their crews. He told me that, but for 39 the gener- 
al the ships would have been lost, together with their 
crews. Are you not trying (me)/ whether I am mad 

* Imperf. of ei/u, ibo. 

u 7Ttti£w, naij-uuai) -ov^at, irziraianaL. STraiaa. Later writers have enai^a, 

v veipdaBai takes gen., seldom ace. (Thue. i. 71.) 



152 VARIOUS CONSTRUCTIONS. 

325. c)? You are not trying (me) whether I amrnad, are 
you? Is he distinguished from w other people by (his) 
wisdom, or (his) temperance, or both (350. c)1 Are you 
joking, or are you mad ? Cyrus set out just as he was, 
with five horsemen. He went and gave (350. h) all his 
possessions to his neighbour. I have long been wonder- 
ing at the shamelessness of this flatterer (350./). 



§ 58. Various Constructions continued. 

353. a) With Sixcuog, a&og, &a, the personal con- 
struction is preferred to the impersonal. 

354. b) oaov is used elliptically with the infinitive. 

355. c) Some words that imply a comparison (e. g. 

qpddveiv, diaysQeiv, ivavtiog, dmldaiog, idiog, 
V7T8Q&8V, now) often take the construction 
with ^. 

356. e) The verb noiuv is often admitted after ovdev 
alio x rj — , alio ri 'r\ — ; rt alio r\ — ; &C. 

357. /) A person's quoted words, when quoted ex- 
actly as he uttered them, are introduced by on. 

Rem. Here the Greek idiom differs from our own : we omit c thaV 
when a person's words are quoted exactly, and insert it when not. 

357*. g) After ti ov y — ; (in questions) the aor. ap- 
pears to be used for the present. 

358. a) dixaiog el pi rovro nQcirreiv (=dlxai6v ianv 

w Does he differ from . . . ?) 

1 When the oXXo is spelt with an apostrophusin this phrase, it mostly 
drops its accent, and thus looks like the abbreviated dkXd, but. The ac- 
cent was dropt, because in some very similar phrases the aW is «XXa : 
and in some others it is difficult to say whether it stands for a\\o or dWd. 
Wherever it certainly stands for a\\o, it should retain its accent. (See 
364, note a ) 

y ri uvv. I'rprj, ov Smyfjacj pot; quia tu mihi narres ? " Haec inter- 
rogate alacritatem quandam animi et aviditatem sciendi exprimit." 
(Weiske.) 



VARIOUS CONSTRUCTIONS. 153 

i t us tovto TTQciiTeiv), it is just (or right) 
that I should do this. 

b) ecpdace jogovtov ogov nd^rjia aveyvcoxtvcu rb 

xp/jcpiapa, it arrived first (indeed), but 
only sufficiently so, for Paches to have 
had time to read out the decree. 

c) qjddvtig elxmv 7} ia nnf]vlt cf.svysiv, you draw 

(your nets) before the birds fly away. 

d) ova av cp&dvoi anodviiaacovs he will cer- 

tainly die (or, be killed). 

e) 71 alio ovroi /) (n^ovlevaav ; what did these 

people do but plot ? 

f) anexQivaro on fiaatleiav ova av dn^aifirjv, he 

answered, "I would not receive a king- 
dom." 

g) 71 ova iaoirjaafisf } ; (why have not we done 

it?=) iv hy dorCt we do it? Let us do 
it directly ? 

359. Vocabulary 58. 

Give orders, order, £mzar7(o. 

Would probably have been * */ « * a ~ 

-j r , * EYAvovvevGzv av diaqjuaQt]vai. 

To be the slave of, dovlevoo. 



Exercise 65. 

360. But for Xenoclides, the whole country would 
probably have been ravaged. But it is just that every 
man should defend the laws of his country. You do 
nothing but give orders. He answered, I should be a 
fool if (p) I were to do this. He answered, I will give 
you a portion of the food which I have myself. He 
went away before his friend arrived. It is right that 
every body should oblige such a' man as you are. He 
answered, I have done more service to the state than 

That is, he cannot die too soon (for die he must). Buttmann gives 
EFerent explanation. 



a different explanation 



154 PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 

any other single person. He answered, I will come to 
you if I am wanted. You do nothing but laugh at all 
the citizens. What do you do but hold all men cheap ? 
He answered, I will collect as many men as I possibly 
can. He answered, I will come to you as quickly as 
possible, to (p) combat the faithful slave's disorder. He 
answered, if any body has done much service to the 
state, it is you. They arrived first, indeed, by just time 
enough to have destroyed those with the king (358. b). 
Why don't you make me also happy ? Why don't you 
answer? He answered, if Xenoclides had not been 
present, the ships would have perished, together with 
their crews. If (p) you do this, you will certainly be 
the slave of your temper. If he were not ambitious, 
he would not undergo every labour. 



§ 59. List of Particles and short connecting and 
other Phrases. 

Obs. Those with an asterisk cannot stand first in a sentence. 



361. aye dt'j, 'but come ? ' come now.' 

362. au (Ion. and poet, aid, ait'v), always. 

6 dtl aoym>, the archon for the time being : the 
person who at any time is archon. 

363. akrj&eg (accented in this way), ironically, indeed? 
itane ? 

364. alia, but. It is often used to introduce quick, ab- 
rupt retorts, objections, exhortations, &c. dlX adv- 
varov, 'nay bur, it's impossible' (or, why, it's im- 
possible), alia ftovlofAou, 'well, I will I 1 

alia is also our ' but' = ' except' after general 






PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 155 



negatives : some case of allog generally stands in 
the preceding clause. 

a).)? 1]? unless, except ; nisi. 

alio rt i] (or allon) ; used as an interrogative par- 
ticle (316). 

allcag re xai, especially, in particular. 

365. apa, at the same time (as prep, 'together with/ 
dat.) afta followed by y.ai in the following clause ; 
as soon as (omitting the xaL h ) The two assertions 
are marked out as occurring at the same time ; and 
the particles may be variously translated, according 
to the view with which the coincidence is pointed 
out: no sooner — than; already — when; when — 
at once, &c. 

366. a^iilhi (properly the imperat. of auslt'co, dortt i?iind, 
or be anxious about), as adv. doubtless, certainly. 

367. *av, see 75 : for idv, see 77. 

368. ava, e up ! (for avdarrj^i, rise up !) 

369. av& gov, because, for (267). 

370. *aQa d («(>, Qa, e in Epic poets), therefore, conse- 
quently, then. 

1) It is also used where it seems to be without 
power, but indicates conformity with the na- 
ture of things or with custom; as might 
have been expected ; ex or dine, rite. Hence 
it serves to mark a transition to an expected 
proposition. 

* dXX' r\ has this meaning after negatives and questions that imply a 
negative. The dXV might sometimes be supposed aXXo, used elliptically ; 
but frequently this is impossible ; and it is better, therefore, to under- 
stand it always to be dXXd. (Kriiger.) — A case of dXXog often stands 
already in the sentence. The construction probably arose from two 
nearly equivalent forms : ovStv dXXo — dXXd, and oiSlu aXXo — ?/. (K.) 

b e. g. aua dKriKOdfiiv n teal rpirjpdp^ovs KaQiarajxev. " A.fxa is also Used 
with the part, like [xerd^v : a \i a tolvt e In w v dviarr]. 

c When prepositions are used alone as adverbs, and thus become 
equivalent to verbs, they throw back the accent. 

d The old derivation from V APQ (to fit, trans, and intrans.) seems 
far preferable to Hartung's derivation from a common root with dpna^oj, 
rapio, repente. So Kuhner. 

e Enclitic. 



156 PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 

2) After a, edv, &c. it has the force of indeed 
or perchance. — ei m aQa (nisi forte) has often 
an ironical meaning ; unless, forsoothJ 

371. are (with part.), as being (242. a). 

372. *al (backwards), again ; 2) on the other hand ; 
3) further ; and then also. 

373. *alre, avzccQ (both Epic), and araQ, have the same 
meaning as av. So also the poetical *av&ig 9 Ion. 
ahiQ. (avTUQ and draQ begin a sentence or clause.) 

374. avrcoQ, thus (emphatical) : 2) ut erat ; of things in 
their original, unchanged state, or that are of com- 
mon every-day occurrence ; 3) it is attached to 
words expressing reproach, contempt, or neglect, 
e. g. childish, useless, vain, &c. Hence 4) it is used 
alone as equivalent to fidz?jv,idly, vainly, uselessly. 
It is a sister form of dit&g.s (B). 

r. 

375. *y&Q (ys agct),for. 

It often refers to a short sentence to be mentally 
supplied (such as, I believe it; no wonder. 
<fcc.) In questions h it answers pretty nearly 
to our ' then] and implies surprise (= ivhy 7 
what ?) 
7i yctQ ; quid enim? or quidni enim ? = certainly, 
to be sure. 

n<x>g ydq; (Att.) is an emphatic denial =by no 
means. 

376. *7*'(a strengthening particle), atleast, { at all events, 
certainly. 

f T Aoa, the interrog. particle, stands first in its sentence. " Attic 
poets, however, allow themselves to interchange the quantity, and use 
apa for consequently, apa as the interrog. particle; but without altering 
the proper place of each." (B ) 

s Hermann, on the other hand, says, that it should always be written 
avrtas in Homer ; and Hartung thinks Buttmann's a strange mistake, the 
derivation being from airdf^ he and no other, self (so that avrtasssthus 
and in no othn way). He considers that the rough breathing is only a 
dialectic peculiarity, avrios JEoL, au-ws Att. (Eustath.) 

h Especially after rig ; irdrc; ■*■")<;) &c. 

* For which yoh 13 more commonly used. 



PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 157 

It adds strength and emphasis to the word to 
which it is added, answering the same purpose 
that an elevation of the voice does in speak- 
ing, or italics in a printed passage. It is used 
in rejoinders and answers, either to confirm 
or to restrict; also in exhortations to make 
them more impressive. 
eycoye, I for my part — elxoroog ye, quite naturally 
— Tidw ye, quite so, certainly, 
ye dij* certainly. 

ye rot, yet at least ; at least however ; however. 
ye pqv (certe vero; vero), certainly however ; but 
yet ; hence it is also a strengthened de. 



J. 

377. dtori (= diet rovro on), because : but later writers 
often use it for on, that. 

378. *8e (see pe'v) has three meanings of and, but, for 
[the last in the old writers only]. 

379. *5r/,i a strengthening particle, properly now (for 
which rfir\ is used) ; it is employed in various ways 
to enliven a speech : — 

aye 8rj, q>e'oe dtj, come now ! 

ri dq ; what then ? 
It also means truly, forsooth. After relatives it 
has the force of our 4 ever.'' oang 8y, whoever it may 
be, &c. It often follows superlatives. 

380. *8r]7iov (confirms a conjecture proposed. M.) : it is a 
more emphatical nov (see nov), I imagine or sup- 
pose ; doubtless. 

*dfj7zov&ev is used to hint, with a little irony, that 
the contrary is impossible. 

k Interest hoc inter yi 6n et ye toi, quod Sfj sententiam per yi restric- 
tam simpliciter confirmat, roi autem earn sententiam indicat oppositam 
esse praecedentibus quodammodo. Hinc yl Si) est sane quidetn, enim- 
vero ; yi toi autem certe quidem (Herm.) 

1 It is only in Homer and Pindar that 6 fj stands at the beginning 
of a proposition or clause. (M.) 



158 PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 



*d7j$ev has also the ironical force of drj, forsooth. (M). 
*drjza, like £//', is used in assuring and confirming 
{surely, certainly). 




E. 

381. el, if; 2) whether ; and 3) after some verbs of 
feeling, that. (See 333.) 

{ elxai, if even, although. 
\ xoti el, even if, even though, 
ei yccQ, O that ! — a wish ; like ei&e. 
eifiij, unless, 
el firj did, but for. 

Eixig, elzi, properly, if any one ; if any thing : but 
it is used as equivalent to ocng, with more emphasis ; 
whoever, whatever. 

382. ejta, ) ^ a f terwar $ Si thereupon ; 2) then. 
eTieiT cc, \ 

They are used in scolding, reproachful ques- 
tions (see 315), and often with verbs, to refer 
emphatically to a preceding participles 

383. ev&a, demonstr., here, there ; but also, and in prose 
generally, relat. where. n ivddde, demonstr., here; 
hither. 

ivrav&a (Ion. ev&avra), here. 

It&ev, hence, thence, whence : iv&evde, hence. 

ev&ev \iev — ev&ev de (hinc — Mine), on the one side 
— on the other. 

hOev xa) tv&ev [hinc Mine ; ab utraque parte) ) on 
this side and that ; on both sides. 

evrevftev, hence, thence. 

(All these words relate also to time.) 

384. enei, after ; 2) since, quoniam. 

Before interrogatives and the imperat., it has 
the meaning of for ; for else. 



m ov Svvdfxevoi evpelv rag bfiovs, el t a i:\av cofitvoi dTr<x)\ovTO. 

n But IvBa or iv&a 6fi may stand at the beginning of periods for ibi, 
there or then. 



PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 159 

87zsidrj has the same meanings, but Inn is far 
oftener used in the sense of since, 

385. 86T8 (== eg oret), until, as long as. 

386. hi, yet , still, further. 

omen, {iT]XEti, no more, no longer. 

387. ag>' cp,° on condition that: icp cpze, the same but 
generally with the infinitive. 



H. 

388. r\, or ; p in comparisons, than. 

389. r\, truly, certainly : but generally a mere interrog- 
tive particle [ — ne, but only in direct questions]. 

rj titjp assuredly, in asseverations, promises, &c. 

390. rjdrj, now, already. Also, ' without going any 
further/* 1 

391. fy =idv (see 77). This is the form used by the 
Attic poets for lav : never av. 

0. 

392. *^7]v (enclit.), I should imagine ; surely ; in iron- 
ical, sarcastic speeches, ov &rjv, r\ ^r\v. It is pecu- 
liar to Ionic and Doric poets. 

/. 

393. tva, where ; 2) in order that: 



t This derivation seems disproved by such passages as Xen. An. iv. 
5, 6: earre ettl to SulttcSov, usque ad. I believe it to be kg with the old 
connective ri. See re. 

Here 16' w (properly =zTri tovtm 6 — ) is equivalent to tin tovto) us — . 

P It retains this meaning in questions: iroQev tjkci ; ?? &rj\ov on e( dyo- 
pag ', where is he come from ? or is it plain that he is come from the 
market-place (and so the question unnecessary) ] 

q vavv yap pot Sokcl h 6 rj noWov av a^iog elvai eTriTpoTrog, tov toiovtos. 

Xen. 

r Iva (=in which case) goes with indie, of a past tense to express 
what would have happened, if, &c. W yv ™<p\6s. lv zl x ov > & c - 






160 PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 

k 

394. xai, 1) a7irf; 2) also, even. 

Tt — xai, both — and, or and also : as well — as. 
[But these particles are often used where we 
should only use i a?id.'] 

xa) si, xav si : see under el. 

xai fidla, ) before these words xai has a peculiar J 

xal navv, ) energy. 

xai [tfjv, ( immOj) ivell! certainly ! 2) (atqui), and 
yet. ^ 

xaineQ, although. 

xai xavta (idque), and that too. 

xaizoi, and certainly ; 2) and yet certainly; and 
yet ; 3) although. 

xai (also) often seems to be superfluous in familiar 
conversation : ha x a\ eidco, that I may know, &c. 

xai is used in questions, to imply that nothing 
can be expected, &c. It may be often translated 
by at all, possibly, ti xqtj nQocdoxav ; asks for in- 
formation, but iiXQri xai 7TQoodoxav ; ' v)hat can one 
possibly expect V implies that nothing can possibly 
be expected. 

xal — 8t. When xai and d& come together in a pro- 
position, xai is also : but the two are often used 
where we should use l and also. 1 

395. *xt, xiv, an enclitic particle, used by the Epic po- 
ets for av. 



M. 

396. \id, not by — ; a particle of swearing. It has a 
negative force when alone, but may have either vai 
or ov (yes or no) with it. 

397. (idXiaja jitv — el de [it], &c. = if possible — but if 
not, &c. — mentioning what is best to be done, and 
also what is the secondbest, if that is not feasible. 8 

8 With numerals, words of time, &c. fiaXiara (about) signifies that 



PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 161 

398. pallor de, or rather. 

399. *jm€V,* indeed — answered by dt (but), or sometimes 
by alia, (livroi, &C 

The answering 8s is sometimes omitted : — 

1)-When the opposition is clearly marked 
without it : e. g. by naturally opposite 
words, such as adverbs of place and time, 
with an opposite meaning: here — there; 
in the first place — secondly. 
2) When the opposition is suppressed : 
chiefly when personal and demonstrative 
pronouns are used with \iiv at the begin- 
ning of a proposition. Thus, iya ntv, 
equidem. 

400. *\iivroi, to be sure; 1) / allow ; 2) but indeed, 
however. 

401. fxrj, not ; 2) lest, or that not ; 3) that (after verbs 
of fearing, &c.) In questions it expects the answer 
£ ?io,' being somewhat stronger than par; {num.?) 
After some verbs (e. g. restrain, prevent, forbid, 
deny, &c.) it is used where it seems to be superflu- 
ous, from our using no negative particle. 

firj oh : see § 49. 

402. f*fiU eGoi8l 
pap, \ 

403. *pqv, 1) truly, indeed; 2) but indeed, yet. 

ri \ir\v ; tv hy not ? 

404. fi/jTe ye, (nedum) much less. 

N. 

405. vfj, c by,' in oaths (with ace.) 

the statement made is nearly exact (according to the belief of the 
speaker), without pretending to be quite so. 

1 nil and Si are much more frequently used than indeed — but, which 
always express a strong opposition, whereas the Greek particles connect 
any different propositions or notions. Thus a section, chapter, or even 
part of a whole work, often ends with (for instance) kou ravra pip o?jrwj 
kyirero : when the next chapter will necessarily begin with something 
like rjj 6' vGTio-xia (on the following day). It is only when the context 
clearly requires it, that fisv is to be rendered, it is true, indeed. 



162 PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 

406. *vv, ivv (enclit. v), properly the same as pvv, for 
which it sometimes stands; 2) for ow, then, now. 

407. vlv dt'j, now ; 2) with a past tense, just now. 



0. 

408. 6 nsv—b dt, u the one — the other, 
ol fiev — ol dt : , some — others. 
6 pep, 6 d' ov often stands alone in reference to a 

preceding proposition, ndvrag cpil^tov, alX ov rbv 
nh top d' ov, we must love all, and not (love) one 
man indeed, but not another. naQtjaav ov% 6 fxtv 6 
d' ov, aXla ndvreg. 

409. o Si (quod vero est), after which the rovro iozt is 
omitted. v 

410. oOovvexa (= orov evsxa), because, that, in the Tragic 
poets. 

411. olog (noiuv), of a kind or character (to do, &c.) 
olog re, able, possible, 
olov eixog, as is natural ; as one may (or might) 

suppose. 

412. oTTors, when, whenever ; 2) since : as quando, 
quandoquidem are used for quoniam. 

413. ottov, where (there were) ; 2) since (siquidem). 

414. oncog, as adv., how ; 2) conjunct., *in order that, 
that, oncog toevde, see that you be =a strong im- 
perative. 

415. oaou rjfitQui or oGrjptQai, daily ; properly, as many 
days as there are. 

oong follows {raifxaorog and superlatives of quality. 
nluaiu boa or ova tiIugzcl, quam plurima : \}avfJiaG- 
7ov ooov, miruni quantum. 

ooov ov (or boorov), all but. 

416. 078, when. 078 \iiv — bet de, w sometimes —some- 
times. 

u For 6 fiiv — 6 hi we sometimes find 8s \dv — Sg hi. 

v 8 hi iravrwv hzivorarov (but what is the most terrible thing of all, is 
this). 

w Whenever the forms totc, ore are used twice (sometimes only 



PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 163 

417. on, that (instead of Lat. ace. with infin.) ; 2) be- 
cause, for did tovto on, i. e. dion. 

on also strengthens superlatives, and is used to in- 
troduce a quotation in the very words of the speak- 
er, where we use no conjunction (see 358. f.) 

on piTj, after negatives, except. 

418. ov, not : in questions it requires the answer ''yes? 
(?]) ov didlvatg =the non-destruction. 

ov yccQ alia is commonly used in the sense of l for,' 
with increase of emphasis, q. d. 'for it is no other- 
wise, but.'' (M.) 

ov (jltj : see 287. 

ov pr/v, yet not, but not ; 2) as a negative protesta- 
tion. See r\ ^nqv. 

ov \ir\v alia (or ov ^vroi alia), properly, ' yet not P 
— but ? it has generally the force of yet, however ; 
sometimes of rather, much more. 

ov ndvv, by no means. 

ov yrjfju, I say (that) not ; deny, refuse. 

419. oil ore — alia xai, not only — but also. 
oi'X on — all' ovds, not only — but not even. 
ov% onoog — alia xai, not only not — but also. 

ov% oaov and ov% oiov are also found for ov% on and 
ov% onwg respectively. 

420. { ovt8, pr/te, I Both forms are connecting nega- 
( oide, fATjds, ) tives, answering to neque ; 1) nor, 

and not ; 2) owe, or ^ts repeated are neither — nor. 

The forms ovde, prjds, have the further meaning of 
1) also not ; 2) not even, which is always their 
meaning in the middle of a proposition. 

ovS &g, not even so. See &g. 

421. *ovv, therefore, then. 7 It gives to relatives (oana- 
ovv, &c.) the force of the Lat. cunque, (ever, soever). 

once) for -nori — rroji, sometimes — sometimes, they are accented toH — , 
6 r£ _. (B.) 

x When fxf] on, fxr] ottos begin the sentence, vTro/36\r) rig may be sup- 
plied ; or they may be understood like the Latin ne dicam, and are thus 
stronger than the preceding expressions, but both in a negative sense. 

J ovv is often used to resume a speech that has been interrupted by 
a parenthesis (=/ say.) 



164 PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 

1) ovhovVj properly an interrogative of inference, 
as ov-aovv avtjdtg zovzo ; 'is not this, then, 

foolish?' But generally the interrogative 
force, and with it the negation vanishes, and 
ovxovv is to be translated simply by ' therefore, 1 
and begins a clause. 2 

2) ovxovv is a strengthened negative ; not in the 
least. — In the meaning 6 therefore not, 1 with- 
out a question, it is better written ovx ovv. 

422. ov7T(o, never yet. 

ovdmors, never, is used of both past and future 
time; ovdznoonoTE, only of past time. (See nco.) 



n. 

423. *mo (enclit.), quite : used nearly like ys, to strength- 
en a preceding word. It is frequently appended to 
relatives, and adverbs of time, cause, and condition. 
Thus wGTreo properly means 'exactly as? 

It is derived, probably, from tts'qi, in the sense of 
1 very? 

424. mj p(v—n\ ds (not nr\ \iiv — nij de, Hermann), part- 
ly — partly. 

425. nlrjv, except : as conjunction, or preposition with 
gen. : nVrjv el, except if 

426. Tiolldxig, often, after si, idv, ^, has sometimes the 
meaning of (forte) perhaps, perchance, 

427. *7707t (enclit.), at any time. With interrogatives 
it expresses surprise : rig 7iots ; who in the world ? 

428. *7zov (enclit.), somewhere ; 2) perchance, perhaps ; 
3) / imagine, used in conversation when any thing 
is assumed in a half-questioning way, that the speak- 
er may build something on the assent of the person 
appealed to. 

429. TTQog oe &ewv, I adjure you by the gods (ixsrevco is 
generally omittted in this form of adjuration). 

z oitxovv, extra interrogationem, acerbam interdum habet ironiam. 
(Bremi, Dem. p. 238.) 



PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 165 

430. ttqo rov* (better ttqotov), before this or that time 
(= 7tqo rovrov or 8X81VOV tov yoovov). h 

431. *7zcq (enclit.), I till now, hitherto : but they are 
*7i(67ior£, \ never joined to affirmative proposi- 
tions in this sense. 

ovnco, [xrjfTG), c never yet. not yet. ttojttots is sel- 
dom annexep to the simple ov, [irj, but to ovdt, 
pride. The form without noo {ovdmote, never) 
is commonly employed only generally or 
with respect to the future. Both jtoo and ttco- 
Tzote may be separated from the negative par- 
ticle by other words between. 

These particles are also used with relatives, 
interrogatives, and participles used as equiv- 
alent to relative sentences. With these words 
there is no negative expressed, but the notion 
of a negative lies at the bottom of them all. 
Tig Ticxi ; — oaa 71037107s qlnioafisv, &C 

432. neogala, d properly, how so ? how then ? hence, by 
no means. 



433. tcc \iiv — Ta de, partly — partly (adverbially). 

434. V aga or i aq (poetical), aga strengthened by roi 

435. *ts (que). See xut. 

In the old language (as we find it in the Epic 
poets) 78 seems to impart to many pronouns 

a iv yap t oj rr p d rov ovSefxia P officio. 7rco roig ~NL&yapzvcriv ovSa[x69sv 
errrjXdcv. (Thuc. iv. 120.) 

b It answers exactly to our ' before this? e before that/ 

" Quando in serie orationis prateritum tentpus memoratur, tunc de 
eo quod ante illud etiam fuerit formula -rrporov non videtur adhiberi 
posse, nisi simul insit relatio ad, pr&sens tempus ; hoc est, nisi diserte 
simul significare quis velit, nunc non amplius ita esse." (Buttm. ad 
Alcib. I. 14.) 

c Not to be confounded with Homer's ovrrw, p»j7ra>==:nnrGv, pfjirws, in 
no way, by no means. 

d For TTto? ixd\a ; (B.) Others say for ird paXa ', — -nd being a rather 
uncommon Doric form for noQev ', 



166 PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 

and particles the connecting power, which 
they afterwards retained in themselves with- 
out the particle. 
Thus we find ptv 78, dsrs, y&Q re, &c, and even 

V.ULI 78. 

Especially the particle is found after all rela- 
tives, because these in the old language were 
merely forms of the pronoun demonstrative, 
which through this xi obtained the connect- 
ing power {and this), and thus became the 
relative {which). As soon, however, as these 
forms were exclusively allotted to the rela- 
tive signification, the particle ti was dropt as 
superfluous. Hence we often find in Homer 
og te, oaov re, <fcc. for og, ooov, and the like. 
The particles ware, are, and the expressions 
olog re, icp o) 7S are remains of the ancient 
usage. 

436. 7% fxev — txi dt, in one place and another; here — 
there ; in one respect — but in another. 

437. 7i, in some respect, in any respect, at all. e rt 
prjv ; why not ? 

438. to oV often introduces a statement opposed to what 
has been said before, and may be translated by 
(quumtamen f ) rohereas, but however, or sometimes, 
but rather. (See Heindorf, Theset. 37.) 

70 dt with the superlat. often stand alone, with the | 
omission of 70V70 iatip. ro ds \iiyiG7 ov ndvz a 7av- 
7a \xovog xa7 1 iQy do a7o, but the greatest thing is\ 
(this), that, &c. (See o fc' — .) 

439. *7oi (enclit.), properly an old dat. for z#, meaning 
therefore, certainly. But these meanings have dis- 
appeared, and to/ has only a strengthening force :« it 



e It is often added to rruvv, c%£6ov, ovSev. 

1 to 6' ov Set t w?, &,c — quum tamen non oporteat. 

z According to Hartung, roi has not a strengthening but a restric- 
tive meaning, which, however, often comes to the same thing : e. g. Jjc-I 
Ttiva roi a av, T would have killed you, and nothing else=7 would assur- 
edly have killed you. Nagelsbach thinks it the old dat. of the pronoun 
av (tv). 



PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 167 

is frequently used with personal pronouns, and in 
maxims, proverbs, &c. 

*toi'vvv, therefore, then, now, so now. It is also 
used when a person proceeds with an argument; 
now, further, hut now. Besides this it is frequently 
used in objections, either in a continued narrative, 
or more commonly in replies : why or why then. 
[Very seldom as the first word of a clause. P.] 

TolyaQ (ergo), therefore. 

toiyaqtoi and roiyagovv, therefore, even therefore, 
and from no other cause, precisely for that reason. 

440. tots \i(v — tots ds, h at one time — at another. 

441. tovvsxa (Epic), on that account ; therefore. 

442. tovto \iiv — 70D7Q de, on the one hand — on the other. 

443. 7$, therefore. 



a. 

444. cog (relat. adv.), as (as if, so as) ; 2) of time, as, 
when; 3) with numerals, about; 4) it strengthens 
superlatives, especially of adverbs, and some posi- 
tives. 

cog (prepos. = Big), to, with ace. : but only of living 
things. 

cog (conjunc), that; 2) in order that, with subj., 
opt., or fut. indie. : 3) so that, with infin., more com- 
monly coore: 4) since; 5) quippe, for. 

cog hi 3 (=cog hson, as it is possible) is used with 
superlatives : cog hi paliora, as far as it is any way 
possible. 

cog mog elnsTv, so to say. 

cog ovvelovTi (sc. Xoycp) einuv, to be short ; in a word. 
[For which avrsXovzi uneTv, and avvelovti alone 
are found.] 



h See note on 8re. 

1 When prepositions are employed instead of the compounds of elvcu, 
or rather when, this verb being omitted, they stand alone as adverbs, 
the accent is thrown back on the first syllable. See ava. 



168 PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION. 

oog (with accent) = ovtoog, thus. It is common in 
the poets, especially the lonians ; but in prose is 
found only in ov$ oog, xal cog. 



Table of the less obvious meanings of Prepositions in 
Composition. 

aficpf, on both sides. 

dvii, against^ marking opposition. 

ava, k up ; back again. 

did (dis) marks separation; taking apart or 
aside. 

iv, often into. 

koltol^ down; it often implies completion, and j 
hence, 2) ruin, destruction (answering in both to 
per). 

fiEid (trans) marks transposition, change. 

naqd sometimes signifies (like prater) missing or 
doing amiss. naQafiaivuv, to transgress, &c. 

k With Paii>£iv, &c. dva, up, and Kara, down, mean respectively into 
the interior, and down to the coast. 

1 Hence Kara is sometimes equivalent to up in English : Kara^aycXv, 
to eat up. 



TABLE 



OF 



DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM, ETC. 



English. 

1. (§ 1.) He who does. 

2. (§ 2.) Socrates. 

A woman. 



3. 
4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 



(§ 3.) My slave. 
Yo?^r slave, &c. 

I have 5 a pain 

I am suffer- > in my 
ing from ) head. 

He rejoiced (or, was 
vexed) when the citi- 
zens were rich (or, 
that the citizens 
were rich). 

My friend and my bro- 
ther's. 

(§ 4.) The wisdom of 
the geometer. 



8 



Greek. 

The (person) doing (6 
TTgdzzcov). 

The Socrates {often). 

A certain woman (yvvrj rig). 

[When a particular per- 
son is meant, though not 
named.] 

The my slave. 

The your slave. 

I am pained (as to) the 
head : ace. (alyw). 



He rejoiced (or, was vexed 
at (im) rich the citizens. 

The my friend and the of 

the brother. 
( Very often) The of the 

geometer wisdom — or, 

the wisdom, the of the 

geometer. 



170 TABLE OF 

English. 

8. The beautiful head. 

9. The son of Philip. 

Into Philip's country. 



Greek. 



10. The affairs of the state. 
The people in the city. 
Those with the king. 
My property. 

11. (§5.) The men of old. 
The men of old times. $ 
The men of those days. 
The intermediate time. 
The present life. 

The upper jaw. 

12. (§ 6.) The rhinoceros 

has a very hard hide. 
They have strong claws. 

13. The beautiful ; beauty 

(in the abstract.) 
Beautiful things. 
"Whatever things are 

beautiful. 
What is beautiful. 

14. Speaking. 
Of speaking. 

By speaking, &c. 

15. Virtue. Gold. Eagles. 



16. To do kind offices. 
— confer benefits on. 
— treat well. 



As in English; or, l the 
head the beautiful.' 

The of Philip (son, vlog, 
understood). 

Into the of Philip (coun- 
try, xwQctv, understood). 

The (neut. pi.) of the state. 

The (ol) in the city. 

The (ol) with the king. 

to: ifxd. 
I The long-ago (men) — ol 



nakai. 
The then (men). 
The between time. 
The now life. 
The up jaw (Jj dvco yvddoq). 
The rhinoceros has the 

(= its) hide very hard. 
They have the (== their) 

claws strong. 

to xaXov. 



ia xuXd. 

The to-speak. 
Of the to-speak. 
By the to-speak, &c. 

to Xaleiv : rov Xaltlv, &c. 
The virtue. The gold. 

The eagles (when the 

class is meant ; or eagles j| 

generally). 

el noLuv with ace. of person. 



18. 

19. 
20. 

21. 

22. 

i 
I 

i 

23. 
25. 

26. 
27. 

28. 



differences of idiom, &c. 171 

English. Greek. 

To prosecute on a m - , 

c/iar-e of murder. To P ursue of murder ' 

To be tried for murder. To fly of murder. 

,,.,_*« 7 ^ The indeed — but the. 

(§ 7.) Some— others, j < ^ v _ < ^ 

But (or and) he (or it). 6 5s. ... at the head of a 

clause. 

And he . . . %e« o£ . . . 

(§ 8.) The other party, ot etsqoi. 

The res* of the country. The other country. 

The whole citv ; aWthe „ c , 
c j|- v naaa rj rtohg. 

Every city. Tiaaa nohg. 

(§ 9.) With two others. Himself the third (pron. 

last). 
To perform this service. v7T7]Q8tsTv tovto (pers. for 

whom in dat.) 

TTolla V77rjQ6T£lP. 

The things of himself (ta 

8CCVT0V.) 

The (neut. pi.) of the gods. 



To perform many ser- 
vices. 

His oivn ) :■, • 
, \ things. 

One s own \ D 

(§ 10.) IF/W comes 

from the gods. 



'The greater part of. . . 
Half of... 

(§ 11.) 7/i my £me. In 

my father's time. 
/??. my poiver. 
(§ 12.) To 6e so. 



6 nolvg 



in agreement 
with the noun 
'W^l governed by 'of.' 



871 8U0V. 



8711 70V TZClTQOg. 



871 8(101. 

To have (themselves) so 

[ovzcog 8%81V). 

Zl^gh^lof..&c. ^obe taken or caught 
guilty ' ( (aXwcu with gen.) 

(§ 13.) Not only— but ov^ori — alia ^ai See note 

also. on 82. 

To confer a great bene- To benefit greatly (jiiya 

fit on. mcp8l8iv). 



172 



TABLE OF 



English. 

To do a great injury to. 



29. (§ 14.) I should like to 
behold. 

I should like extremely 

to behold. 
I would r at her behold 

A than B. 

30. It is not possible. 

31. On^AepZeathatlcould 

then conquer. 

Though I should have, 
&c. 

32. (§ 15.) When you have 

done, you will, <fcc. 

33. (§ 16.) What I please. 

34. (§ 17.) And you as 

much as any body. 
And you among the 
first. 

35. Am slow to doit (112). 

36. Conditional Pro- 

positions (79). 
(1) If I have any thing, 
I will give it. 



Greek. 

To hurt greatly (piya filart- 
reiv). 
Obs. ra psytata to be 
used, if it is ^great- 
est] not '-great} 
I would gladly behold \ 
(rjdscog av {^eaaaifxrjv . m ) 

rjdiGz av d saa aifArjv. 

?jdTov av &8aaai[A,riv A ^ B. 

It is not (ovx sgtiv). 

As so being-likely-to-con- 

quer (cog ovzcog 7ieQiyev6- 

fxevog av). 

8%gqv av. 

When you shall have done 
(av with subj. 90*). 

a doxH (f.ioi). (If necessary, 
a do^eiev, or, a av do§#). 

Having begun from you 
(100). 

Do it by leisure (oxolfi). 



(1) If the consequent verb 
is in the future, the con- 
ditional verb is (gene- 
rally) in the subj. with 
idv. a 



m deaodai is ' to behold' something that may be considered a specta 
cle. iSetv (bpav, diperjOui) is simply videre, to see. Hence Uoijxi should 
be used in the phrase ' / should like to see,' when the notion of a spec- 
tacle is quite out of place. 

n Both verbs may be in the future indicative (the conditional verb 



■: 



DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM, &C. 



173 



English. 
If it has thundered, it 
has also lightened. 



2) If you should do so, 

I should laugh. 
If you were to do so, 

I should laugh. 
If you would do so, 

you would oblige 

me. 

3) If I had any thing, I 

would give it. 
If 1 had had any 
thing I would have 
given it. 



they would 
&c.) would 



37. {That) 

fetch. 
{That he, 

be able. 
They would have 

died. 
I should, have died. 

38. (§20.) We should (or 

ought to) set about 
the work. 



Greek. 

If the consequent verb is 
in any tense of the ind. 
but the future, or in the 
imperative, put the con- 
ditional verb in the indie. 
with si 

2) When both verbs have 
'should? l would? or the 
first 'were to? the second 

> l should or 'would? both 
are to be in the optative ; 
the consequent verb with 

J av. 

3) When the consequent 
verb has c would? but the 
conditional verb not, 
both verbs are in a past 
tense of the indicative ; 
the conditional verb with 
si, the consequent verb 
with «V. 



evquv av. 
dvvrj&jjvai av. 



§ 14. 



Aor. with av ° {imp erf. or 
pluperf. if necessary). 

The work is to-beset-about 
(verbal in thg). 



with rt). The condition is then expressed in a more positive way, as a 
contemplated event : a construction which is often adopted when the 
condition expresses an event hoped for or feared (R.) ; as, & tl itsL- 
(X o v r a i ~NLi~idoi eig Tlepcrag to tieivov r\^ei. 

As in the consequence of the fourth form of conditional proposi- 
tions. 81. d. 



174 



TABLE OF 



39. 



40 



English. 
The work should be 

set-about. 
We must set-about 

the work. 
The work must be 

set about. 
($21.) I should have 

died but for the dog. 



The all but present 
war. 

41. (% 22.) Having had his 

government taken 

away. 
Having been entrusted 

with the arbitration. 
Having had his eyes 

knocked out. 

42. To conquer himm the 

battle of Marathon. 

43. To flow with a full (or 

strong stream). 
To flow with milk. 

44. (<§> 24.) Till late in the 

day. 

45. Willingly at least. 
Willingly. 

46. So to say. 

To speak generally. 

47. Sensible persons. 



48. To drink sortie wine. 
(Not) todrinkany wine. 



Greek. 



It is to-be-set-about (neut. 
of verbal in rtog) the 
work. p 



I should have died, if not 

through the dog (si $ 

did, with ace.) 
The as-much-as not [oaov 

oh) present war. 
Having been taken away 

his government. 

Having been entrusted the 

arbitration. 
Having been knocked out 

his eyes. 
To conquer him the battle 

at (&) Marathon. 
To flow much (nolvg adj.) 

To flow milk. 
Till far-on (tioqqod) of the 
day. 

To be willing (sxcov thai). 

As to say a word (cog inoq 
htiuv). 

The sensible of persons (ol 
cpoonuot rcov avftQconcov, 
sometimes; but very 
often ol cpQcnfioi only). 

To drink of wine. 

(Not) to drink of wine. 



P The ' work ' is to be in the case governed by the verb from which 
the verbal is derived. 



DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM, &C. 



175 



English. 

49. My property, wretched 

man that I am! 

50. What misery ! 

51. (§ 25.) Who in the 

world . . ? 
v 52. To be nearly related to. 

1 53. ($ 26.) You shall not 
do it with impunity. 

54. I would not have done 

it at all (132). 

55. (§28.) Itis the fart of 

a wise man. 

56. It is not a thing that 

everybody can do. 
It is not every one that 
can do this. 

57. To be one's own mas- 

ter. 

58. (§ 29.) More powerful 

than ever. 

59. Afflictions too great for 

tears. 

Of superhuman size. 

More than could have 
been expected from 
the small number of 
the killed. 

60. Too young to know, 

&c. 



Greek. 
My (property) of (me) the 

wretched ! 

[ret ifia toy xaxodaipovog.] 
The misery (in the gen.) 
Who ever? (rig note;) 

To be near to a person (in 
respect) of family. 

You shall not do it rejoic- 
ing. (%aiQwv). 

I would not have done it 
the beginning {aq^qv or 
T7]V &Q%rjv). 

It is of a wise man. 

It is not every man's (nav- 

tog). 
It is not every marts to do 

this. 
iavrov eivai. 

More powerful himself* 

than himself (avrbg 

avrov). 
Afflictions greater than in- 

proportion-to (§ y,atk) 

tears. 
Greater than according-to 

man (i) yar av&QcoTiov). 
More than in-proportion- 

to the dead ($ vara tovg 

vsxQovg). 

Younger than so as to 
know (?} acre). 



Q Of course ( themselves than themselves/ when more than one are 
spoken of. 



176 



TABLE OF 



English. 

61. (§30.) With more haste 

than prudence. 

Hastily ratherthan pru- 
dently. 

More hastily than pru- 
dently. 

62. The greatest )possi- 
A.s great as )ble. 

u " as he could, 
As many as he possi- 
bly could. 

63. If any other man can 

doit, you can. 
If any man is temper- 
ate, it is you. 
64. 1 have injured you more 
than any other indi- 
vidual has. 

65. (§31.) To charge a man 

with a crime 

66. (§ 35.) If it is agreea- 
ble to you. 

If you are willing. 

And that too . . . 

For the present at 
least. 

As far as they are con- 
cerned. 

69. (§ 36.) I offer myself to 

be interrogated. 

70. (§37.) It was done that 

robbers might not 
commit depreda- 
tions, &c. 

othing was done be- 
cause he was not 
here. 



67, 
68, 



Greek. 



! More-hastily than more- 
f prudently. 



• dog or on with superlat. 

As many as he could most 

(oaovg fjdvvctTo nlziaiovg). 
You, if any other man (ei 

Tig xal allog), can do it. 
You, if any other man^ 

are temperate. 
I one man have injured 

you the most (nluaja tig 

av?]Q as eplaipa). 
To charge (iyxaUfo) a 

crime to a man. 

If it is to you wishing it 
(fc't ooi povloptvcp «cm'). 

xaj zavza. 

to ye vvv slvai. 

70 Irii T0V70ig elvai. 

I offer myself to interro- 
gate. 

It was done 7ov pq Xr^rag 
xaxovoyeTv, &C 



71 



Nothing was done dta to 
ixeivov fiq 7i aqelvai. 



DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM, &C. 



177 



English. 

72. He said that he was in 
a hurry. 

73. (§ 40.) He is evidently 

hurt. 
I am conscious of 

thinking so. 
I am conscious that I 

think so. 

74. I know 
— remember 



Greek. 
He said to be in a hurry 

(pron. omitted). 
He is evident {pl{kog) being 

hurt. 

| I am conscious (avvoida) to 
)> myself thinking so (nom. 



J 



that I 

!>have 
— reioice -, ., 

J done it. 

— am aware J 

Iamashamed( h ° i 
Ire P ent \ done it. 

Know that you will be 

punished. 
I perceived that he 

thought, &c. 
He will not cease to do 

it. 

75. He knew that the son 

he had begotten was 
mortal. 

76. (§ 41.) I did it uncon^ 

sciously. 
I did it unknown to 

ray self. 
I did it without being 
seen, or discovered ; 
secretly. 

77. I arrived first (or before 

them). 

You cannot do it too 
soon. 

8* 



or dat.) 

I know 

— remember I havingdone 

— rejoice [ it {part.) 



] 



— am aware 
f lam ashamed having done 
it. 

It repenteth to-me having 
done it. 

Know about-to give pun- 
ishment. 

I perceived him thinking, 
&c. 

He will not cease doing it 
{part.) 

He knew having begotten 
a mortal son. 

I was concealed-from (&<*- 
\ &ov) myself, doing it 
(nom.) 

I was concealed (sla&ov) 
doing it. 

(or) I did it being unob- 
served (Xa&cov). 

I having arrived antici- 
pated them (ty&rjv, or 
aqi&^v aviovg). 

Doing it you will not anti- 
cipate (ovx uv (f&uvois). 



178 



TABLE OF 



English. 
Will you not do it di- 
rectly ? 

78. He held his tongue, as 

supposing that all 
knew. 

79. (§43.) You act strange- 

ly in giving us, &c. 

80. They pronounced her 

happy, &c. in hav- 
ing such children. 
They have arms/o de- 
fend themselves 
with. 

81. First of all (259). 



82. (§ 44.) From some of 
the cities. 



Somewhere, 
Sometimes. 
83. I feel thankful to you 

for coming. 
85. They destroyed every 
thing of value. 

85. (§ 45.) Such a man as 
you. 

(Of) such a man as 
you are. 

For men like us . . . 

To make astonishing 
progress. 

Surprisingly misera- 
ble. 



Greek. 
ovk av cp&dvoig noicov ; 

He held his tongue, as(ci^) 
all men knowing it [ace. 
or gen.) 

You do a strange thing, 
who give us, <fcc. 

They pronounced her hap- 
py, (fee. %vhat children 
she had. (258. b). 

They have arms with 
which they will defend 
themselves. 

First among the (h jolg 

71QWT0Q 710(077], 7TQG)70(, 

<fcc.) 
From the cities there is 

which. 

[' which' in same case as 
' cities.' 
There is where. 
There is when. 
I know you gratitude, for 

what (avtf cov) you came. 
They destroyed if there 

was anything of value 

[et 71, &c.) 

6 olog av avrJQ. 

oiov aov avdoog, &C. 

roig oioig (or oloig mo) y\\uv. 
To advance ftavfAuarov \ 
vgov. 

{ravpaGiwg cog a&liog. 



DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM, &C. 



179 



86. 



87. 



88. 



89. 
90. 

91. 



English. 

(§ 46.) There was 
nobody whom he 
did not answer. 

He answered every 
body. 

Especially. 

As fast as they could. 

(§ 47.) I am able. 

It is possible. 

Are adapted for cut- 
ting. 

Am of a character 
to . . . 

Eighteen. 

Far from it. 
Am 



Is 



to be. 



(§ 48.) Be sure to be , 
Take care to do it. 



92. (§49.) I fear that I shall. 
93. 



I fear that I shall not. 
What prevents us 

from . . . ? 
To prevent them from 

coming. 

94. (§ 50.) I had a narrow 

escape from death. 
I had a narrow escape. 

95. (§ 51.) Immediately on 

his arrival. 



Greek. 

Nobody whom he did not 

answer. 

[ ; nobody' under the 

government of l an- 

swered :\ oang, who.] 

Both otherwise and also 

(aXlwg 78 xai). 
As they had speed. 

0l6g 78 £l(M. 
OlOV 78 8671. 

Are such as to cut. 

Am such as to . . . 
Twenty wanting two (283. 

d)._ 

nollov 8 tTv. 

"ii 1 yww®tti(w\iQi\ i am 
^fU to be'='am in- 
*" u * 1 ) tended to be.' 
That (oTimg) you shall be 

['see' understood.] 
Take care how (oTtcog) you 

shall do it. 
I fear \ir\ . . . (subj. or fut. 
indie.) 
\ii\ ov . . . 
7i ifX7iodoi)v p] ov^i . . / with 

ififin. 

To prevent them $ sl&sTv. 

I came naqa [*mq6v to die. 

I escaped by a little (jtaQ 
bXiyov). 

Immediately having ar- 
rived (sv&vg tJhmv). 



180 



TABLE OF DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM, &C. 



English. 
As soon as we are 

born. 
From our very birth. 

96. (§ 52 ) What posses- 

ses you to do this? 
What induces you to 
do this? 

97. (319.) To be wholly 

wrapt up in this? 

98. f To be consistent 
with. 

« " like. 
" " character- 
istic of. 
To be on a man's 
side. 
To make for a 
man. 
" be for a man's 
interest. 
" good for a 
man. 

99. By what conduct. 
With what view. 

100. (§ 57.) He went and 

gave (when used 
contemptuously or 
indignantly). 



OH 



(2) 



m 



Greek. 

Immediately being born 
(sv&vg yavopevoi). 

Having suffered what, do 
you do this? (zi na&cov ;) 

Having learnt what, do 
you do this? (ti fxadwv ;) 

TTQog rovrcp blog elvai. 



eivcu TTQog rwog. 



Doing what. 
Wishing what. 

He tyiqcav gave. 






QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 



Obs. Words in small capitals are to be translated into Greek. 

<§> 1. — 1. What is the difference between the iwperf. and the 
aorA [The Aorist is used of momentary and single actions : the 
Imperfect of continued and repeated ones.] 2. What English tense 
does the aor. most nearly answer to? [Our perfect indefinite 
(the perf. formed by inflexion)] 3. Is the aor. ever used for the 
perf. ? [Yes,* when the connection of the past with the present 
is obvious from the context ] 4. Where is a governed gen. often 
placed ? [Between an article and its noun.] 5. How do you 
render ol noazTovTEgl [Those who do] 6. To what is the 
artic. with a participle equivalent? [To a personal or demon- 
strative pronoun with a relative sentence.] 

<§> 2. — 7. Do proper names ever take the artic? [Yes.] 

8. When ? [When they are the names of persons well known] 

9. When is a proper name generally without the art.? [When 
it is followed by a description which has the article.] 10. Is 
there an indef. art. in Greek? [No=] 11. By what pron. may 
'a ' sometimes be translated? [By rig] 12. When? [When 
we might substitute 'a certain' for 'a.'] 13. Which generally 
has the art., the subject or the predicate (i. e. the nom. before or 
the nom. after the verb) ? [The subject] 

<§> 3. — 14. Your slave. [6 obg dovXog] 15. Is the art. ever 
equivalent to a possessive pron.? [Yes, when it is quite obvious 
whose the thing in question is.] 16. When must the pronouns 
be used ? [Whenever there is any opposition (as, when wine is 
opposed to yours or any other person's)]. 17. When an adj. 
vjilhout the article stands before the art. of the substantive, from 
what does it distinguish that substantive? [Fiom itself under 
other circumstances.] 18. My father and my friend's. [6 
if4.bg TiazrjQ, xcu 6 rov cpiXov] 

* And even for the pluperfect. 



182 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 

<§> 4. — 19. The son of Philip. [6 QHlinnov: vlog, son, un- 
derstood.] 20. Into Philips country, [etg trjv tyiXinnov: 
%wQav> country, understood.] 21. How does it happen that the 
article often stands alone? [In consequence of the omission of 
a noun or participle.] 

§ 5. — 22. What is often equivalent to an adjective? [An 
adverb with the article.] 23. The men of old. \_ol ndlai, the 
long ago men.] 

<§> 6. — 24. How did the Greeks express 'she has a very beau- 
tiful head ? ' [She has the head very beautiful.] 25. Distin- 
guish between to xalov and ra xald. [to xalov, is: 'the 
beautiful' ' the honorable? in the abstract ; beauty, xd xald, 
are: beautiful (or honorable} things; whatever things are beau- 
tiful ; what is beautiful ; or simply, beautiful things.] 26. How 
is the first pers. pi. of the subj. often used ? [In exhortations.] 
27. What is ' not ' in an exhortation of this kind? Q«y.] 28. How 
may the infin. become (virtually) a declinable substantive? [By 
being used with the article.] 29. Do abstract notins and names 
of materials generally take the art. ? [Yes.] 30. When does a 
noun (whether sing, or plur.) always take the art. ? [When a 
whole class, or any individual of that class, is meant.] 

<§> 7. — 31. 6 \iiv — o ds: ol piv — ol dt. [(this — that ; the 
one — the other) (these — those ; some — others.)] 32. How does 
6 de stand once in a narrative? [For but or and he or it: the 
article being here a pronoun.] 33. How y.a\ ogl [For 'and 
he:' but only when the reference is to a person.] 34. When is 
avrog self? \_avx6g is ' self when it stands in the nom. without 
a substantive, or in any case with one.] 35. When is it him, her, 
it, &c. ? [avrog is him, her, it, &c. in an oblique case without a 
substantive.] 36. When is avrog same? [o avrog is 'the 
same.'] 37. Does avrog standing alone in an oblique case, ever 
mean self? [Yes, when it is the first word of the sentence.] 

<§> 8. — 38. Does a noun with ovrog, ode, ixecvog, take the art. 
or not ? [Yes.] 39. Where does the pron. stand ? [Either be- 
fore the article, or after the noun.] 40. What does nag in the 
sing, mean without the art. ? [' each,' c every.'] — what with the. 
art.! ['the whole:' 'all.'] 

<§> 9. — 41. In the reflexive pronouns (ipavTov, &c.) is the av- 
zog emphatic? [No.] 42. How must thyself (in ace.) be trans- 



QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 183 

lated when it is emphatic? \_avrog must precede the pronoun, 
avrbv Ge, &c.] 43. How do you translate 'own' when it is em- 
phatic ? [By the genitive of the reflexive pronouns ipavrov, 
ceavrov, savzov.] — how his, theirs, &c. ? [By the gen. of av- 
zog.] 44. Does suvtov ever stand in a dependent sentence for 
the nom. of the principal one ? [Yes.] 45. What pronouns are 
often used instead of a case of iavrov, to express, in a dependent 
clause, the subject of the principal sentence ? [The simple av- 
xov, or s, (ov, ol, — vysig, oqag, &c.)] 46. Is ov ever simply 
reflexive in Attic prose? [No.*] 47. To what Attic prose- 
writer are the forms, ov, e confined ? [To Plato.] 

<§> 10. — 48. How is the neut. plur. of an adjective, standing 
without a noun, generally translated into English? [By the 
singular.] 49. How is the neat. art. with a gen. case, used ? [To 
denote any thing that relates to, or proceeds from, the thing in 
question.] 50. How are neut. adjectives often used ? [Adverb- 
ially.'] 51. When is the neut. singular generally used adverb- 
ially? [When the adj. is of the comparative degree.] 52. When 
the neut. plur. ? [When the adjective is of the superlative de- 
gree.] 53. Does a predicative adjective ever not agree in gen- 
der with the substantive it refers to ? [Yes ; when the assertion 
is made of a class or general notion; not of a particular thing.] 
54. In what gender do nolvg (nltcov, n7.uoTog) and Tjfxicvg 
stand, when followed by a gen. ? [In the gender of the gen. that 
follows them.] 

<§> 1 1. — 55. In what number does the verb generally stand, 
when the nom. is a neut. plur. ? [In the singular.'] 56. What 
exception is there ? [When persons or living creatures are spok- 
en of.] 57. Mention some predicates with which the copula is 
very often omitted? 

(clhtog and %als7z6v, &?[xig, cooa, cpQovdog, avayxn, 
Qctbiov, and ovvatog (with its opposite word), and izoTpog.) 
<§> 1 2. — 53. Do the moods of the aor. refer to past time ? [No.] 
59. How do the moods of the aor. differ from the moods of the 
present! [The moods of the aorist express momentary actions; 

* That is, ov, s, &c. is not used by prose-writers in a principal sen- 
tence, to express the subject of such sentence : its place is in a de- 
pendent or accessory clause, to express the subject of the principal 
clause. 



184 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 

those of the present, continued ones.] 60. Does the part, of the 
aor. refer to past time? [Yes.] 61. Are the moods of the aor. 
rendered by the pres. in English? [Yes.] 62. When fit} for- 
bids, what moods does it take ? [^ when it forbids, takes the 
imperative of the present, the subjunctive of the aorist.] 63. 
What is the difference between [ir\ with imperat. pres. and \ir\ 
with the subj. aor. ? [With the subj. aor. a definite single act is 
forbidden; with imper. pres. a course of action. The imperat., 
therefore, often forbids a man to do what he has already begun.] 
64. Of what tense is the optative the regular attendant? [The 
optative is the regular attendant of the historical tenses.*] 65. 
What mood is the subj. after a pres. or fid. turned into, when in- 
stead of the pres. or jut. an historical tense is used ? [The opta- 
tive.] 66. When do the particles and pronouns, which go with 
the indicative in direct narration, take the optative? [The parti- 
cles and pronouns which go with the indicative in direct, take 
the optative in oblique narration.^] 

<§> 13. — 67. How is an assertion modified by the use of av, or 
ip Epic poetry yj, y.iv. [av gives an expression of contingency 
and mere possibility to the assertion.] 68. What is the principal 
useofai'? [The principal use of av is in the conclusion of a 
hypothetical sentence.] 69. When av stands in a sentence 
which is not hypothetical, to what does it often refer? [To an 
implied condition.] 70. What particles are formed by the addi- 
tion of av to a, 078, 87iei8rj? [lav, i\v, av, — orav, mziddv.] 71. 
How is av = tl av distinguished from the simple av ? [av—£av, 
el av, regularly begins the sentence.] 72. What are the two 
meanings of a? [a is Hf? but like our l if' it is often used for 
' whether.'] 



Hypothetical Propositions. 

73. 1) How is possibility without any expression of uncertain- 
tainly, expressed ? [ti with indie, in both clauses.}:] 

* Or ; * Historicum sequitur tempus modus optativus/ 
t This is the general rule : but the indicative is frequently used in 
oblique narration. 

f The consequent clause may have the Imperative. 



QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 185 

74. 2) How is uncertainty with the prospect of decision ex- 
pressed ? [By lav with subjunctive in the conditional, and the 
tttcfr'c. (generally the future) in the consequent clause.*] 

75. 3) How is uncertainty expressed, when there is no such 
accessory notion (as the prospect of decision)? [By el with the 
optative in the conditional clause, and av with the optative in the 
consequent clause.] 

76. 4) How is impossibility, or belief that the thing is not so, 
expressed ? [el with imperfect or aorist indie, in the conditional 
clause; av with imp erf. or aorist indie, in the consequent clause.] 
77. When is the imperfect used in this form of proposition? [For 
present time, or when the time is quite indefinite.] 78. Can the 
condition refer to past time, the consequence to present? [Yes.] 
79. Which clause has av, the conditional or the consequent clause ? 
[The consequent clause.] 

§ 14. — 80. To what is the optat. with av equivalent? [The 
optative with av is equivalent to our may, might, would, should, 
&c.] 81. By what may the optat. with av often be translated? 
[The optative with av is often translated by the future.'] 82. 
What force does av give to the infin. and participle? [The 
same force that it gives to the optative.] 83. To what then is an 
infinitive with av nearly equivalent? [To an infinitive future.] 
84. After what verbs is the future frequently so expressed ? 
[After verbs of hoping, thinking, trusting, praying, knowing, con- 
fessing, &c.j when a condition is expressed or implied.] 

<§> 15. — 85. What mood do the compounds of av^ and rela- 
tives with av regularly take? [The subjunctive.] 86. What 
changes take place, if any, when these compounds or relatives 
with av come into connection with past time, or stand in oblique 
narration? [They either remain unchanged, or the simple 
words — a, ore, Intidrj : og 9 oatig, ooo^, &c. — take their place 
with the optative.] 87. To what Latin tense does the aor. sub- 
junct. answer, when it stands with the compounds of av, or with 
relatives and av ? [To the Latin future perfect, fulurum ex- 
actum.] 

<§> 16. — 88. How is what often happened, in past time, expres- 



* The consequent clause may have the Imperative. 
t That is, iav s orav, eneiSdv^ &C. 



186 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 

sed?* [By the optative.'] 89. What mood and particles would 
be used to express this sort of indefinite frequency for pres. or fut. 
time? [The relatives with av and compounds o? av.] 90. What 
force does av thus give to og and other relatives? [The force of 
our — ever, ■ — soever.'] 

§ 17. — 91. What mood is used in doubting questions? [The 
subjunctive.] 92. After what verbs is it sometimes thus used ? 
[After povXei;, deists ; ovx eyco or olda, anoQco, ?qcqtcq, &]tcZ.] 

§ 18. — 93. When conditional propositions depend on another 
verb, in what mood will the consequent clause stand? [In the 
infinitive.] 94. What will stand in a dependent consequent clause 
for noirjaco! [noitjaetv.] — for no\ol\l av, Inoiovv av! [ttoieiv 
av.] — for non'jGatfji av, moirjaa av! [rtou]6ai av.] — for nenoi- 
rjxoijLi av, zntmoi qxsiv av ! [TTenoinyJraiav.] 

<§> 19. — 95. Does ov or fx^ deny independently and directly? 
[ov.] 96. When should not be translated by [Arj ! [Mi] is used 
in prohibitions ; with conditional particles ; and particles expres- 
sing intention or purpose.] 97. W T hen do ore, onote, take jtnj? 
[When c when ) implies a condition.] 98. Is ov or \ii] used after 
on, cog, inei, ETTEidrj ! [ov.] 99. Is ov ov \ir\ used {generally) to 
express the opinions of another person in oblique narration? [ov.] 

100. How should you determine whether ovSeig, olde, &c. are to 
be used, or fxndeig, {irfii! [Wherever ' noV would be translated 
by \ir\, we must use not ovdtig, ovde, &c, but [Andeig, /jivds, &c] 

101. How must the positive adverbs and pronouns generally be 
translated into Greek in negative propositions? [By the corres- 
ponding negative forms.f] 

<§> 20. — 102. Are the verbals in rt'og act. or pass.? [Passive.] 

103. What case of the agent do they govern ? [The dative.] 

104. What case of the object? [The same case as the verbs from 
which they come.] 105. To what are these verbals in tsog 
equivalent, when they stand in the neut. with the agent, in the 

* Hermann properly observes, that the optat. does not itself express 
the repetition of the act, but only carries with it the notion of indefinite- 
ness, the repetition being marked by the other verb, e. g. either a fre- 
quentative verb, or the imperf. or plvperf. tense (which both express 
duration), or by an aorist with iroXkaxis, &c. 

t Thus for either — or ; anywhere, at any time, any thing, we must 
use neither — nor ; nowhere; never ; nothing, &c. Rule 110, as a gen- 
eral assertion, is absurd. 



QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 187 

dat., omitted ? [To the participle in dus used in the same way.] 
106. When may they be used in agreement with the object? 
[When formed from transitive verbs.] 107. Express "you 
should cultivate virtue," in two ways, with acjxrjTBog and ags- 
%r\. [aaxrjTsov iaziaoi rtjv dosTiyv, or d6H7]ita iatiuoifj aoer^.] 
108. What peculiarities are there in Attic Greek with respect to 
the use of these verbals ? [The neut. plur. is used as well as the 
newt. sing. The agent is sometimes put in the accus. as well as 
the object.] 109. Render nuarlov iaviv avrqp, and Tieiatsov 
iativ avzov. \ji£igt(ov iazlv avzov, we must persuade him. 
ttskjtsov lax iv avroo, we must obey him .] 

§ 21. — 110. What verbs govern two accusatives ? [Verbs of 
taking away from, teaching, concealing, asking, putting on or off, 
take two accusatives.] 

§ 22. — 111. What case does the ace. after the active verb 
become, when the act. verb is turned into thepassive? [The7zom.] 
112. When the act. verb governs two accusatives, may either of 
them (and if so, which ?) remain after the pass, verb ? [The ace. of 
the person becomes the nom. ; that of the thing continues to be 
the object of the passive verb, as in Latin.] 113. May the dat. 
of the act. become the nom. of the passive ? [Yes ; sometimes.] 
114. Will the ace. after the act. then remain as the ace. after the 
passive? [Yes.] 115. Render (eyon) 7Z871igzsv[a,cu rovzo. [lam 
entrusted with this: or, I have had this entrusted tome.] 116. 
Do intrans. verbs ever take an ace. ? and, if so, when ? [Intransi- 
tive verbs take an ace. of a noun of kindred meaning ; and some- 
times of one that restricts the general notion of the verb to a par- 
ticular instance.] 

§ 23. — 117. Does the ace. ever follow an adj.? [Yes.] 118. 
What prepos. might be supposed omitted ? \y,azd, as to.] 119. 
What ace. is sometimes found with verbs that do not properly 
govern the ace. ? [The accus. of the neut. pronoun.'] 120. How 
is the duration of time expressed ? [By the accusative.] 121. 
How is the distance of one place from another expressed ? [By 
the accusative.] 

§ 24. — 122. What case do partitives, &c. govern ? [Partitives, 
numerals, superlatives, &c. govern the genitive.] 123. What 
case do adverbs of time and place govern ? [The genitive.] 124. 
What case expresses the material out of which a thing is made. 



188 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 

and such other properties, cir cam stances, &c. as we should ex- 
press by 'o/'? [The genitive.] 125. Can ' once a day' be trans- 
lated literally ? [No: it must be, 'once the day. 5 ] 126. How does 
the gen. stand alter possess ive pronouns? [In a kind of apposition 
to the personal pronoun implied.] 127. How does the gen* stand 
alone, or after interjections ? [The gen. is used alone, or after in- 
terjections, as an exclamation.] 

§ 25. — 128. What case do verbal adjectives, in wog, &c, with 
a trans, meaning govern? [The genitive.] 129. What case do 
verbs relating to plenty, want, value, (Sec, govern ? [The genitive.] 
130. What case do verbs relating to the senses govern? [The 
genitive.] 131. What exception is there? [Verbs that denote 
sight, which take the ace] 132. By what prepos., understood, 
might the gen. sometimes be supposed governed ? [By evexa, on 
account of.] 133. After what verbs does the gen. frequently 
stand in this way? [After words compounded with a privative.] 

§ 26. — 134. Mention two large classes of verbs that govern 
the gen. [Most verbs that express such notions as freeing from, 
keeping off from, ceasing from, deviating or departing from, &c. 
govern the gen. Most verbs that express remembering or for- 
getting ; caring for or despising ; sparing ; aiming at or desir- 
ing ; ruling over or excelling; accusing of or condemning, &c. 
govern the genitive; but not without many exceptions.] 

§ 27. — 135. What case does xctzayiyvcoGxco (condemn) take 
of the charge or punishment ? and what case of the person ? 
[xatayiyvcoGxco has accus. of the charge or punishment ; gen. of 
person.] 136. May we say, rovro xarrjyoQeiTcu avrov 9 this is 
laid to his charge? [Yes.] 

§ 28. — 137. In what case does the price or value stand ? [The 
price or value is put in the genitive.] 138. In what case is the 
thing for which we exchange another, put? [The thing for 
which we exchange another is put in the genitive.] 139. What 
case of a noun of time answers to when? and what to since or 
within what time ? [The gen.] 140. In what case is the part by 
which a person is led, got hold of, &c, put ? [The gen. expresses 
the part by which a person leads, takes, or gels hold of any thing.] 

§ 29. — 141. In what case is the thing with which another is 
compared, put when r, than, is omitted ? [In the genitive.] 142. 
How is ' greater than ever' expressed? [By using aviog before 



QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 189 

the gen. of the reflexive pronoun.] 143. How is ' too great ' ex- 
pressed? [Too great, &c. is expressed by the comparative with tj 
vard before a substantive ; r\ coats before &verb in the infinitive."] 
144. Still greater: much greater? [zti pei^cov: ttoXXco 
[xel^cov.] 

§ 30. — 145. How are two comparatives, joined together by 
f], to be translated ? [By more than, or rather than, with the pos- 
itive.] 146. By what words are superlatives strengthened ? [By 
cog, on, oncog, rj, &c] 147. What force have si rig xcu allog, 
si quis alms, and elg ctvrjQ, unus omnium maxime ? [The force of 
superlatives.] 148. What case do TTEQirtog, and adjectives in 
-nlciGiog, govern? [The genitive.] 

§ 31. — 149. What does the dat. express? [The person to or 
for whom a thing is done.] 150. What words does it follow? 
[Words that express union or coming together, and those that 
express likeness or identity.] 151. In what case is the instru- 
ment, &c. put? [The instrument, the manner, and the cause, are 
put in the dative.] 152. In what case is the definite \\me-when 
put? [In the dative.] 153. Does the dat. ever express the agent! 
[Yes.] 154. After what words is this most common ? [After 
the perfect pass, and verbals in reog, tog.] 155. What case do 
verbs of reproaching take, besides a dat. of the person ? [Verbs 
of reproaching, &c. take ace. of the thing, as well as dat. of per- 
son, especially when it is a neut. pronoun.] 

§ 32— 156. What does the middle voice denote? [That the 
agent does the action upon himself; or for his own advantage ; 
or that he gets it done for his own advantage.] 157. What are 
the tenses that have the middle meaning when the verb has it at 
all? [Pres., imperf, perfi, and pluperf of the passive form; 
and the futures and aorists mid.] 158. Has the aor. 1. of the 
pass, form ever a mid. meaning ? [Yes.] 

<§> 33. — 159. What verbs of the middle form must be con- 
sidered simply as deponents? [Middle forms, of which there is 
no active.] 160. Mention some aor. 1. pass, with mid. meaning. 
[xaT€xXi&qv (?)• a7zrjU.dynv, £7TeQaico&r]v, icpofiij\}r]v, ixoiprj- 
&nv, rjGxrj&nv.] 161. Mention some fut. 1. mid. with pass, mean- 
ing. [acpsXyaofiai, ofAoloyrjaopai, cpvld^oixai, &Qt\p0[ACU.] 162. 
How is ' by? to express the agent after the pass, verb, translated ? 
[By vno with gen. ; also by naod and noog with gen.] 



190 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 

<§> 34. — 163. What signification does the perf. 2. (commonly 
called per/, mid.) prefer? [The intrans. signif] 164. Has it ever 
the pare reflexive meaning of the middle? [No.] 

<§> 35.— 165. What does the fut. 3. express? [A future action 
continuing in its effects.] 166. What notions does it express be- 
sides that of a future action continuing in its effects? [The 
speedy completion of an action, or the certainty of its completion.] 
167. What verbs have the fut. 3. for their regular future ? [Those 
perfects that are equivalent to a present with a new meaning: 
e. g. fjtsfivrjfjiaij x8xri][A(u.] 168. What answers to the fut. 3. in 
the active voice ? [sao jiai with perf. participle.'] 169. What is 
generally preferred to the opt. and snbj. of the perf ; [The perf 
part, with siqv or go.] 170. In what verbs is the imperat. perf 
principally used ? [In those verbs whose perfects have the mean- 
ing of a present: fxefivnao, &c] 17 L What does the 3 pers. 
imperat. o^ the perf . pass, express? [It is a strong expression 
for let it be done, &c] 172. How is a wish expressed in Greek ? 
[sifts with the optative — the optative alone — or (ScpsXor* eg, s, 
alone, or with sifts, si yao or cog, and followed by the infinitive.] 
173. What mood and tense are used with sifts, if the wish has not 
been, and now cannot be, realized ? [The indie, of aorist or im- 
perfl, according as the time to which the wish refers is past or 
present.] 

<§> 36. — 174. Mention a use of the infinitive that the Greek and 
English have, but the Latin has not. [It is used to express the 
purpose.] 175. What does the particle wars express? [Aeon- 
sequence.] 176. How is so — as to expressed? [So — as to; wars 
with infinitive.] 111. How is so — that expressed? So — that; 
wars with infinitive or indicative.] 

$ 37.— 178. What does the infin. with the article in the gen. 
express? [The infinitive with the article in the gen, sometimes 
denotes a motive or purpose.] 179. When the infin. has a subject 
of its own, in what case does it regularly stand ? [In the accusa- 
tive.] 180. What prepos. with the infin. is equivalent to a sen- 
tence introduced by because! [did.] 181. When is the subject 
of the infinitive generally not expressed ? [When the subject of 
the infinitive belongs to, and is expressed with, the former verb.] 



* Debuit. 



QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 191 

182. When the subject of the infln. is omitted, because expressed 
with the former verb, in what case is the noun after the infin. 
generally put ? [In the same case that the subject of the infini- 
tive stands in in the other clause.'] 183. What is this construction 
called ? [Attraction.'] 

§ 38. — 184. May attraction take place when the infin. is in- 
troduced by the art. or coats ? [Yes.] 

<§> 39. — 185. What kind of sentences may be translated into 
Greek by a participle ? [Relative sentences, and sentences in- 
troduced by when, after, if since, because, although, &c.] 186. 
How may the English participial substantive, under the govern- 
ment of a preposition, often be translated ? [By a participle in 
agreement] 187. How may the first of two verbs connected by 
and, often be translated into Greek ? [By a participle.] 

<§> 40. — 188. What participle often expresses a purpose? 
[The participle of the future often expresses a purpose.] 189. 
Mention some verbs that take the participle where we should use 
the infin., a participial substantive, or ' that.'' [Many verbs that 
signify emotions, perception by the senses, knowledge, recollection, 
cessation or continuance, &c, take the participle, where we should 
use the infinitive mood, the participial substantive, or i that?] 

<§> 4 1 . — 190. By what are cpftavw, come, or get before, and 
ha&drco, am concealed, generally rendered? [By adverbs.] 
191. Mention the adverbs and phrases by which lavddvco may 
be rendered. [Without knowing it; unconsciously, unknown to 
myself; without being observed ; secretly ; without being seen or 
discovered.] 192. How may la&oov be rendered? [By secretly, 
without being observed, seen, &c] 193. How cp&dvag or dvvaag ? 
[Quickly ; at once, immediately^] 194. When qftdvco and Xav&drco 
are translated by adverbs, how must the participles with which 
they are connected, be translated ? [By verbs.] 

(Genitive Absolute, fyc.) 

<§> 42. — 195. Which case is put absolutely in Greek ? [The 
genitive.] 196. What does the participle, put absolutely, express? 
[The time, or generally any such relation to the principal sen- 
tence, as we should express by when, after, since, as, because, 
though, if, &c] 197. In what case do the participles of imper- 






192 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 

sonal verbs stand absolutely! [In the nominative; of course 
without a noun, and in the neuter gender.] 198. When the time 
relates to a person, what construction is used instead of the gen. 
absolute? [im is then generally expressed.] 199. How is a 
motive, which is attributed to another person, generally expres- 
sed ? [By the particle dog with the gen. or ace. absolute.] 

( The Relative.) 

§ 43.-- -200. What does the relative often introduce? [A 
cause, ground, motive, or design of what is stated.] 201. What 
use of the relative is less common in Greek than Latin? [That 
of merely connecting a sentence with the one before it.] 202. In 
which clause is the antecedent often expressed ? [In the relative 
clause.] 203. Where does the relat. clause often stand, when 
this is the case ? [Before the principal clause.] 204. With what 
does the relative often agree in case ? [With the antecedent in 
the principal clause.] 265. What is this called ? [Attraction of 
the Relative.] 206. When the relative is attracted, where is the 
antecedent often placed ? [In the relative clause, but in the case 
in which it would stand in the principal clause.] 

$ 44. — 207. In such a sentence as "the fear, which we call 
bashfulness" should which agree with fear or with bashfulness ? 
[With bashfulness.'] 208. Explain eanv oi. [It is equivalent to 
enoi, some, and may be declined throughout.] 209. What is the 
Greek for sometimes ? [eanv ore.] — somewhere ? [eanv onov.] 
210. What is the English of iq> a) or «<p qpiel [On condition 
that.]— of avtit car ? [Because, for.]— of el tig ? [ Whosoever ; 
el' 7i, whatsoever.] 211. By what parts of the verb is iop o) or 
one followed ? [By the future indie, or the infin.] 



<§> 45. — 212. Give the English of rov olov gov avdoog. [Of 
such a man as you.] 213. How may this construction be ex- 
plained ? [avdoog roiovzov, olog av el] 214. What words does 
oaog follow, when it has the meaning of very '? [Such words as 
ftavftaoTog, nlelaiog, aydovog, &c] 

^ 46. — 215. What is the construction of ovdelg Sang oil 






QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 193 



[The declinable words are put under the immediate government 
of the verb.] 

§ 47. — 216. What tenses follow fiillco in the infin.? [The 
future, present, or aorist.~\ 217. Which infin. is the most common 
after pelXco, and which the least ? [The future infin, is the most, 
the aorist the least common.] 

§ 48. — 218. What mood or tense follows oncog, when it re- 
lates to the future? [The subj. or the future indie.'] 219. May it 
retain them in connection with past time? [Yes.] 220. Is the 
verb on which oncog &c. depends, ever omitted? [Yes : the con- 
struction is equivalent to an energetic imperative : — oqu or oqcczs 
maybe supplied.] 221. With what mood or tense is ov \ir\ used? 
[With the fut. indie, or aor. subj.~\ 222. In what sense ? [As an 
emphatic prohibition or denial.'] 223. According to Dawes, 
what aorists were not used in the subj. with oncog and ov \ii\ ? 
[The subjunctive of the aor. 1. act. and mid.] 224. Is this rule 
correct ? [No.] 225. What is Buttmann's opinion ? [That the 
subj. of the aor. 2. was employed with a kind of predilection, and 
that, when the verb had no such tense, the fut. indie, was used 
in preference to the subj. of the aor. 1.] 

§ 49. — 226. How is \iri used after expressions of fear, &c. ? 
[With the subjunctive or indie] 227. When is the indie, with 
^ used in expressions of fear ? [When the speaker wishes to 
intimate his conviction that the thing feared, &c. has or will really 
come to pass.] 228. How does it happen that fir) ov sometimes 
stands with a verb in the subjunctive, but without a preceding 
verb ? [The notion of fear is often omitted before firj ov, the verb 
being then generally in the subj.] 229. After what kind of ex- 
pressions is iaij ov used with the infin. ? [After many negative 
expressions.]* 239. Is it ever used with the participle or infin.? 
and, if so, when ? [fir) ov is sometimes used with the participle 
and with coare and infin., after negative expressions.] 

<§> 50. — 231. When is fir] used with relative sentences, parti- 
ciples, adjectives, &c. ? [Whenever the negative does not di- 
rectly and simply deny an assertion with respect to some particu- 
lar mentioned person or thing.] 232. Does the infin. generally 
take fit] or oil \jir).] 233. When does it take ov? [When 
opinions or assertions of another person are stated in sermone ob~ 

* See 293. (1) (2) (3). 

9 



194 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 

liquoJ] 234. When should \ir\ follow wore ? and when oil 
[With wore, the infinitive takes fxr], the indicative ov.] 

<§> 51. — 235. What case do some adverbs govern? [The 
same case as the adjectives from which they are derived.] 

236. How is cog sometimes used? [As a preposition = noog.] 

237. When only can dog be used as a prepos.? [It is only joined 
to persons.] 238. What mood do &q%i, [A?XQ l > €»£, £o7E take ? 
[The subj. or opt. when there is any uncertainty ; the indie, when 
not.] 239. Does no\v av el&co relate to the past or the future ? 
[To the future.] 240. How is 'before I came' expressed ? [ttqiv 
r) ildeiv 8[At : TiQiv il&tlv ips: or tiqiv r)l&ov iyco.] 241. Is r) 
ever omitted before the infin. after ttqivI [Yes; in Attic Greek 
nearly always.] 

<§> 52. — 242. In what kind of questions is aoa generally 
used ? [In questions that imply something of uncertainty, doubt, 
or surprise.] 243. What interrog. particles expect the answer 
'Yes?' [The answer 'Yes 5 is expected by, — ccq ov ; rj ydo ; 
ov ; ovxovv ; alio ri rj ;] 244. What expect the answer ' No'? 
[The answer 'No' is expected by, — aoa \ir\; rj nov ; num forte? 
fit] or fxojv ;] 245. What particles give an ironical force to ov ? 
[drj, dij nov.] 246. Does ov expect 'yes' or '?io' for answer? 
[ou expects yes; fxrj, no.~\ 247. In what kind of questions are 
slza, inuza used ? [Such as express astonishment and dis- 
pleasured] 248. What words are used as a simple interrog. par- 
ticle ? \JiXXo n r).~] 249. Render ti nadoov ; — ri fxa&cov ; 
[ri nadoov ; what possesses you to . . . &c. ? — ti [xatfoov ; what 
induces you to . . . &c. ? 

<§> 53. — 250. What are the proper forms of pronouns and 
adverbs for indirect questions? [Those which are formed from 
the direct interrogatives by the prefixed relative syllable 6 — .] 
251. Are the simple interrogatives ever used in indirect ques- 
tions? [Yes.] 252. Are the relatives ever so used? [Yes; 
but very seldom.] 253. When the person addressed repeats the 
question, what forms does he use? [The forms beginning with 
6 — .] 254. When the pron. or noun is the ace. after one verb, 
and the nom. before the next, which case is generally omitted ? 
[The nominative.] 

<§> 54. — 255. By what particles are direct double questions 
asked ? [By noreoov, or Tzozeoa, — r) 9 less commonly by aqa — rj.] 



QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 195 

256. By what particles are indirect double questions asked? 
[airs — sue, u—rj, kotbqov — ^.] 

<§> 55. — 257. After what verbs is el used for on, that? [Af- 
ter d-avftd^oo, and some other verbs expressive of feelings. \ 

258. After what verbs has si the force of whether ? [After verbs 
of seeing, knowing, considering, asking, saying, trying, &c] 

259. When is idv used in this way ? [When the question re- 
lates to an expected case that remains to be proved.] 

<§> 56. — 260. How can an interrogative sentence be con- 
densed in Greek ? [By attaching the interrogative to a partici- 
ple, or using it in an oblique case.] 261. What clause may thus 
be got rid of? [A relative clause attached to an interrogative 
one.] 

<§> 57. — 262. What is rj \ir^ ? [A solemn form of assevera- 
tion.] 263. When is the propos. avv omitted ? [Before alio?, 
avrf h &c. which then —together with, with.] 264. How is dpcpo- 
regov used ? [afiqiO'ZSQOv is used adverbially, or elliptically, by 
the poets, for both ; as well — as, &c] 265. How d^cportQa ? 
[In reference to two words, without being made to conform to 
them in case.] 266. What force has y.al, when it refers to ciX- 
Xog ? [The force of especially, in particular.] 267. Explain the 
use of the part. fat. with £Q%86&at, &c. [£Q%E6&ai, Uvai, with 
part. Jut., is, to be going to, or on the point of.~] 268. How is 
fyco sometimes used with a past partic. ? [As an emphatic cir- 
cumlocution.] 269. How is it used with Xnoelv, &c. ? [e^co with 
the second pers> oflTjQefo, nai^eiv, qjlvaoslv, &c. is used to make 
a good-humoured observation.] 270. How is qe'ooov used in 
some expressions? [cpegmv appears redundant in some expres- 
sions, but denotes a vehemence of purpose, not altogether free 
from blamed] 

<§> 58. — 271. To what is dixaiog dpi equivalent? [To 6Y- 
y.aiov iaziv, ipe, &c] 272. How is oaov used ? [ogov is used 
elliptically with the infin.] 273. What words are followed by ^? 
[Words that imply a comparison : e. g. cp&dreiv, diayzoeiv, ivav- 
riog, dmXdaiog, tdiog, vneodev, now.] 274. After what phrases 
is a tense of noiuv omitted ? [After ovdsv alio n — , dXXo ri 
r\ — ; ti aXXo // — ; &c] 275. By what are a person's quoted 
words introduced? [By or*.] 276. How is the aor. used with 
ti ov ? [For the present] 



INDEX I 



O'Obs. Look under { am y for adjectives, phrases, &c. with to be. 
F. M.=future middle. 

( ] ) implies, that the pupil is to ask himself how the word is con- 
jugated or declined. 



A, = a certain, rig, 12. 

About (of time), vno (ace), 
326. 

(after to fear, to be 

at ease, &c), tibqi (dat.), 
283*. 

(after talk, fear, con- 
tend), tteqi (dat.), some- 
times apcpi (dat.), 283*. 

(after to be employ- 
ed), nzQi, or apcpi, with 
ace, 283*. 

Abrocomas, 229, note q. 
'4@Qox6[jiag, G. a. 

Abstain from, a7Ttj0fxat 
(gen.), 138. 

: we must — , 

ayzxTEov lari, with gen. 

According to reason, y.mk 
loyov, 274. 

Accuse, xarrjyoQeTvt (proper- 



ly, speak against) nvog, 
or rivog vi, 156. — iyxalei'v 
(properly, cite a persou; 
call him into court) rwt 
and tivi zi 9 183. Both are 
judicial words, but used 
with the same latitude as 
our ' accuse? Of the two, 
syxuleiv should probably 
be preferred, if the charge 
relates to private matters. 

Accustom, i&i£m 9 52. 
(Am accustomed, ei&ia- 
[xcu or eico&a, 52.) 
Acquire, xTaopai, 87. 

Act, 7TOL8CO, 60. 

— insolently towards, v(IqI* 
£eiv eig nva, 138. 

— strangely, &av(ia<?Tov 
tzou-Iv, 259. 

— unjustly (== injure), adi- 



t The constructions of Kamyopelv are very numerous : KaTrjyopti gov 
6$ and tl } or <ri tivos and ri ; or coy {and as) -rrepi rivos J and Ka-^yopoi 



Tivog 
Kara gov 



198 



INDEX I. 



xeiv tiva and n (also elg, 

TTQOg, 7T8QI TWO), 138. 

Admire, davpa^oj, F. M. 

generally, 8. 
Adopt a resolution, fiovlevea- 

&eu< 190. 
Adorn, hoct^'co, 206. 
Advance, tzqoxwqzcx), 27 A. 
Affair, TTQayfAu, to, 8. 
Affliction, nddog, to', 150. 
Afford, nctQtico, 214. 
After, field (ace), 293*. 

a long time, did nol- 

Xov xqovov, 270. 

some time, diahnwv 

%qovov, 235. 

did %qovov, 

270. 
- our former tears, in 



T00V TZQOG&eV dcMQVWV, 231. 

the manner of a dog, 



xwbg dixrjv, 250, 
Again, av&ig, 100. 
Against (after to march), 

8711, ace. 24. elg, 259. 
(=in violation of), 

naQa, 299. 

(after commit an 



injury), elg or neqi, with 
ace, 138. 

nQog (ace), 319. 

- (after verbs of speak- 



ing, &c), vara genit 

274. 
Age (a person's), rjhxia, fj y 

144. 
Agreeable, ijdvg, 214. 



Agreeable : if it is — , ei cot 

fiovlofje'vo) iori, 206. 
Agricultural population, ol 

dficpl yr t v fyovreg, 278. 
Aid, emxovQew, dat., also ace 

of the thing, 239. 
Aim at, oToxd£oucu 9 gen., 

156. 
Alas, qjei>, — oifxoi, 144. 
Alexander, 'Ale^avbQog, 24. 
All, 6 nag, or nag 6 — . PI. 

ndvieg. See note on 44, 

46. 

— but (as-much-as-not), 
060V ov, 125. 

— day, dvd ndaav rrjv rjpe- 
Qctv, 259. 

Alliance. See Form. 

Allow to taste, yevco, 150. 

to be done with im- 
punity, neQiOQav (-ideiv, 
-oipea&cu), with inf. of 
thing to be prevented ; 
the par tie of a wrong to 
be revenged, 331. See 
note °. 

Almost, bllyov deiv, or bliyov 
only, 283. 

Already, jtjdri, 65. 

Also, K tf£ 92. 

Although, xaiaeQ, 175. 

(a.) 

Am able, dvvapcu (possum), 
87. — olog re elfiit (qiteo), 
283. See Can. 



t Or oi6<TTe (oi'dor'). 



INDEX I. 



199 



atd^vvo/xai, 



Am (an) actual murderer, 
avro^siQ eifil, 299. 

adapted for, olog dm, 

283. 

angry with, ooyiZofxai, 

dat. 183. di opyrjg sysiv, 
270. 

— ashamed 
239. 

— at a loss, dnoom, 100. 
[See 98, 99.] 

— at dinner, demvico, 288. 

— at enmity with, Si £#- 
&oag ytyvao&ai rivt, 270. 

— at leisure, G%old£a>, 112. 

— at liberty. See 249. b. 

— awake, iyof/yooa, 193. 

— aware, {Aav&dfa (?), 239. 

(b.) 

Am banished, yevyeiv, 270. 
broken, xazt'aya, 193. 

— by nature, ndyvxa, eyvr, 
214. 

(c.) 

Am come, ^xco, with mean- 
ing of perf. 206. 

— commander, oTQatrjyeco, 
52. 

— confident, ninoifta, 193. 
congealed, nenrjyu, 193. 

— conscious, cvvoida ifiav- 
rco, 239. 

— contemporary with, Ka- 
ra ibv aiiov yqovov yevia- 
#a<, 183. 

— contented with, dyartdco, 
with ace. or dat., 52. 



(d.) 

Am dishonoured by, dripd- 
^opai noog iivog, 319. 

— distant from, dmjoo, 138. 

— doing well, sv nqdxx^, 8. 
ill, xaxcog npdrTco, 

8. 

(e.) 
Am evidently, &c. See 239. 

(f.) 

Am far from, nollov dew, 
283*. 

— fixed, ninijya, 193. 
fond of, dyandw, 52. 

— fortunate, avzv%m, 92. 

(go 

Am general, atQarrjysoi), 52. 
glad, rjdopai, dat., 20. 

— going (to), fAsllco (aug- 
ment?), 283*. 

— gone, oixo[Aai{?), perfect 
meaning, 206. 

— grateful for, %aQiv oida 
(gen. of thing, dat. of 
pers.), 222. [for olda, see 
73.] 

(h.) 
Am here, naqeiiu, 52. 

Am I . . . ? (in doubtful 
questions) 137, note e. 

— ill (of a disease), na^vco 



200 



INDEX I. 



{labor 6) ; xaftovficu, x&x- 
{dj'acc, exapov, 183. 

— in my right mind, gcq- 
cpQortco, 125. 

— ■ in a passion or rage, #a- 
Xsnuipco, dat., 183. 

— Hi safety, iv rep aacpaXeT 
styi, 299. 

— in the habit of perform- 
ing, nqaxTixog {eI[m), with 
gen. See 149. 

indignant, ayavaxiicoy 

337. 

— informed of, alad-dvo- 
fi«i(?), 190 

00 

Am likely, piUco (?), 283*. 

— lost, Gi£QOvfiai 9 168*. r. 

(m.) 

Am mad, \iaivo\iai (?), 125. 

my own master, ipav- 

toy elpi, 162*. i. 

(n.) 

Am named after, wopa %cp 

fW twos, 288. 
near, oh'yov dt f od, or oA/- 

701; o^Zy, 283*. 
next to, e%opcu, gen. 

149. d. 

not a man to, 283. b. 

afraid of, tfaoot'co 



Am of service to, ooyslta 

(ace), 82. 

a character (to), el^u 



{ace), 138. 

(0.) 

Am of opinion, vofxi^oo, 52. 



oiog, 283. 6. 
off, oyofAai (?), per/*. 

meaning, 206. 
on my guard, qjvldiTea- 

&cu, ace. 190. 
on his side, ei[u nqog 

(gen.), 319. 
on an equal footing 

with, opowg elpi, 227. b. 

(p-) 

Am pained at dlyico, 20. 

persuaded, nmoi&a, 193. 

pleased with, rjdopat, 

dat. 20. 

present, ndoeitu, 52. 



produced. See 214. 

prosperous, Evrv%tw, 92. 

punished, dixtp dtdovcu, 

or dovvcu : gen. of thing ; 

dat. of person by whom, 

228. 

, (S A 

Am safe, iv tw acrqpatar ei/K«. 

slow to, &c, <yjjoij/- (6y 

leisure), with a verb, 1 12. 

suffering (from a dis- 
ease). See ' am ill of.' 

surprised at, &av[*d£cx 

(F. M.), 8. 

(t.) 
Am thankful for, ydqiv oloa, 
gen. of thing, 222. For 
olda see 73, note q. 



; 



INDEX I. 



201 



Am the slave of, dovlevco, 
dat. 359. 

there, naQEijii, 92. 

to, intiXu (?), 283*. 

(u ; } 

Am undone, oXcala, dnolco- 

la, 193. 
unseen by, lav&dvca (?), 

ace. 154. 

(v.) 

Am vexed, ax&oftai (?) (dat. 
but ini in construction ex- 
plained in 19*. c), 20. 

(w.) 

Am wholly wrapt in, ^o? 

Tovrq) olog si pi, 319. 
■ wise (= prudent), cm- 

(pQOVECO, 125. 

with you, TiccQEtfM, 92. 

within a little, oliyov 

deco, 283*. 
without fear of, daQQsco, 

ace. 138. 
Ambassador, nQEafivg, 259. 
Ambitious, cpdotTuog, 214. 
Among the first, translated 

by aQ^dpevog (having be 

gun). See 100. 
And that too, xalravra, 206. 

yet, ara, mux a, 315. 

nevertheless, €?rcc, etzei- 

ra, 315. 
Ancestor, ^(fyo^, 156. 
Animal, ^coov, 65. 
Annoy, Ivnsco, 41. 
Answer, dnov.oivoiiai (?),278. 

9< 



Apart, ^oo^tV, 309. 
Apollo, 'Anolltov (!), 341. 
Appear (with part.), ycti'vo- 

fiaiy 239. 
Apt to do, or perform, nqew- 

ziKog (gen.), 150. 

govern, <xQxwog(gen.), 



150. 

Arbitration, dicura, 132. 
Are there any whom . .? 

269. d. 
Arise, iyeiQOficu (pass.), 193. 
Arms, onla, 168*. 
Army, arQazEv^a, to, 24. 
Arouse, ^f^co (perf. with 

Attic redupl.), 193. 
Arrange, rdo6co (later Attic 

7«770)), 96. XOOfAtW, dlCC- 

xoGfisco (to arrange, with 
a view to a pleasing ap- 
joeara»ceofelegance,sym- 
metry apt arrangement, 
&c), 206. 
Arrive, dcpixvEO[iui (?), 144. 
first, cp&rjvai (?) «<p- 



ixofxsvog, 242. 6?. 

, but only, &c., 



358. 6. 
Art, Ts'yvtj, 214. 
As he was, 351. 

— his custom was. See 
Custom. 

— many as, oaoi, 175. 
possible, o6oi 



tzXeTgtoi, 174. c. 

— silently as possible, aiyy 
cog dvvarov, 174. b. 

— far as they are concerned, 
to mi rovrotg eivou, 206. 






202 



INDEX I. 



As far at least as this is con- 
cerned, tovtov ye evexa, 
250. 

As far as depends on this, 
tovtov ye evexa, 250. 

— as much as any body. 
See 100. 

— the saying is, to leyope- 
vov, 137. d. 

— possible ( after superla- 
tives), cog, oti, 171. 

— he possibly could, 174. c. 

— fast as they could, cog tci- 
%ovg etyov, 278. 

— soon as he was born,ev- 
-Ovg yevo/uevog, 309. 

— long as, sots, 306. 

— to, cogtb, with inf., 211. 

— (before partic), die, me 
hr h 242. a. 

Ask, fjQOfirjr, aor. 2 : eqcotccco 
used for the other tenses, 
73. 

for aireco {two accusa- 
tives), 87. 

Assist in the defence of, ^o?]- 
titco, dat. 121. 

Assistance. See Fly or Run. 

Associate with, 6{tT)Jco, dat. 
183. 

Assuredly (in protestations), 
?/ fxi]v, 343. 

(will not), oh \ir], 

287*. 

Astonished (to be), -tfea/mfco 
(F. M.) 

At, 319. 

— all, tXQxfo, or ttjv aoy/iv, 
92, 132. 



At. Not at all (ohdev ti). 

— a little distance, di otiyov, 
270. 

— a great distance, did nol- 
lov, 270. 

— any time, ttotL 

— ease about, ftanneiv neql, 
283*. 

— first, aQ%6(xevog, 235. 

— home, evdov, 125. 

— last, to TeleviaTov, 34* ; 
Tele vtcZv, 235. 

— least, )'/, 73. 

— once, "fir}, 65— How to 
translate it by the partic. 
cp&daag, or by ovx dv cpdd- 
poig] see 242. e.f 

— the beginning, aQioixevog, 
235. 

— the suggestion of others, 
an dvdQcov eieocov, 243. 

Athens, 'Jdijvai, L5. 

(O) Athenians, co dvdoeg 

'^tdrjvaiot, 337. 
Attach great importance to, 

7iqo ttoIXov TzoitTodai, 243. 

— 718Q1 ttoXIov noielodai or 

rjyeio&cu, 283*. 
Attempt, Tzeiodofxcu, 121. — 

(= dare) Tol{idco, 239. 
Attend to, tov vovv nqo^iyeiv, 

331. 

a master, elg 8(- 



Saaxdlov cpoirdv, 259. 
Avoid = fly from, cpevyetv, 35. 

B. 

Bad, xaxog, 20. 

Banished (\6bQ\(pevyeiv y 270. 






INDEX I. 



203 



Banishment, tpvyrj, 156. 

Barbarian, fiaQpaQog, 132. 

Bare, xpTlog, 235, 

Bathe, Xovopcu, 188 (1). 

Battle, \i&m, 73. 

Base, ai(j%Qog, 35. 

Bear, cpeQew (?), 60. — dvtjo- 
[icjLi (= endure) refers to 
our power of enduring 
{labours, insults, &c), 
214. — Tolfidco (=susti- 
nere), to 6ear £o o?o what 
requires courage, 239, 
note y. 

Beautiful, xaAo's, 20. 

Beauty, y.dXXog to, 8. 

Because (&« ro, &c), 221. 
b. <^# 5 «*>, 267. 

Become, ylyvo^ai (?), 15. 

Before,t nqiv or ^Jy ^, 307. 

(= in preference to), 

ngo (gen.), 243] dvri,gen. 
213. e. 

Beget, yevvdco, 239. 

Begin, aoxopai, 100. 

Beginning, <%£ 132. 

Behave ill to, xcwoo^ noieTv, 
ace. 35. 

Behold, dsdofxai, 87. 

Belong to, g-e?*. with efocu. 

Belly, yaGTrjQ, rj (?), 235. 

Benefit, cocfeXeco (ace), 82. 

Beseech, dtopai, 150, (g-era. 
149. 6.) dci]60fj,ai, idstj&fjv. 

Besides, mi(dat.), 288. rca^a 
(ace), 299. 



Best, 



£„' see Good, 35. 

Better, $ ' 



Bethink myself, rcoomtro, 

288. 
Between, psra%v, 28. 
Beyond, Trc^a (ace.) 299. 
Bid, xsXevco, 112. 
Bird, oQvig. See 15, note g. 
: young — ,vEoac6g,2\L 



Birth, ysvog, to, 150. 

Black, psXag,87. 

Blame, psptyopcu, dat., iyxa- 

Xsco, dat. 183. 
Body, tfOQfta, 138. 
Boldly, &ccqq<x>v, part. 331. 
Both, apyco, dftcporeoog. See 

28. 
Both — and, xai — uai, or re 

— xc«, 112. 
Both in other respects — and 

also, dXXwg re xai, 278. 
Boy, Ttaig, 15. 
Brave, drdgeTog, 175. 
a danger, xivdvveveiv mv- 

dvvov, 131. cf. 
Bread, dgrog, 299. 
Break, ayvvpi, Kardyvvui (?), 

193. 

(a law), naoafialvco, 228. 



Breast, gteqvov, 193. 
Bring, cfyoa, 341. 

assistance to, imxovQzco, 



dat. also ace. of the thing, 
239. 

forth, r/xroo, (?), 15. 

- up, TQs'cpco, 190. — nai- 



bevco, 214. 

r^sgpco relates to physi- 
cal, TtaidcvcQ to moral 
education : i. e. tqI gpco 



t How to translate ' before' by <pddva) } see 242, d. 



204 



INDEX I. 



Byl 



to the body , ncudevG) 
to the mind. 
bad news, vecoteqov ri 

ayytlletv, 318. g. 
Brother, adelyog, 20. 
Burn out, ixxaico, 341. xavaco, 

&c. — ixuvdrjv. 
But, ds— (a fxev should be in 

the former clause), 38, 

note h. 

— for, si pi] did, with ace. 

125. 
Buy, ayood^co, 163. 

{mo, with gen. of 

agent, 326. 
nqog, after to be prais- 
ed or blamed by. 

— (= close by), agog, 319. 

— (= cause), V7i6, gen. and 
after passive verb, 326. 

— Jupiter, <fcc. vrj Aia, v\ 

tov Jla, 341. 

— the hands of, vno, gen. 

326. 

— the father's side, nqog 
Tzargog, 319. 

— fives, <fcc, ava ttbvts, 259. 

— what conduct? %i dv 

Tzotovvrtg ; 310. a. 

— compulsion, vii dvdyxrjg, 

326. 

C. 

Calculate, Xoyl&o&ai nQog 

savior, 319. 
Calumniously : to speak — 

of, 7*o 1 8 OQbOfica, dat. 1 83. 
Can, dvvufKa (possum), 87. 

— o'tog T6 tlfAi (queo), 283. 



The former relates to 

power, the latter to con- 

d it ion or qualification. 

Aug. of duva^in^ 
Can ; that can be ] 

taught, I . . 

Capable of being f M «*"* 

taught, J 

Care for, xqdofxai (gen.), 156. 
Carefully provide for, tyec- 

&ai y gen. 149. rf. 
Cares, qgovridtg, 150. 
Carry a man over, tteqcuovv, 

188 (1). 
Catch (in commission of a 

crime), dlioxoficu (?), 73, 

note s. 
Cause, aiTiov, 100. 
to be set before me, 

TTUQaTldSflCU, 188. 

Cavalry, \nnug (pi. of in- 

ntvg), 96. 

Cease, navouaioi what may 
be only a temporary, 
Xrjyco of 3. final cessation, 
at least for the time. Ir/yco 
terminates the action ; 
navofxai breaks its con- 
tinuity, but may, or ?nay 
not, terminate it. They 
govern gen., 154. 188(1). 
Tzavopai with partic. 239. 

Certain (a), tig, 12. d. 

Character: of a — to, ehai 
olog (in fin.), 283. 

Charge (enemy), tluvvuv tig, 
sometimes «W, 96. 

with, ?yxa)Jo3, dat. 



of pers., ace. of thing, 183. 



! 



INDEX I. 



205 



Chavge,xar?iyoQ8G>Jgen.l56. 

: prosecute on a — , 

diaxeiv, gen. of crime, 35. 
: am tried on a — , 



cpsvyeiv, gen. of crime, 35. 

Chase, fifea, 154. 

Chastise, xoU^m, F. M., 121. 

Chatter, lals'a, 288. 

Child, natdiov, 150. 

Childless, anaig, 150. 

Choose, atQs'ofjicu (?), 190. a. 

: what I choose to 

do, a doxsl (poi), 96. See 
Diff. 33. 

Citizen, nolhfjg (*). 8. 

City, nohg, r\. 8. — ccgtv, to. 
24. "Agvv refers to the site 
or buildings', nohg to the 
citizens. Hence aarv 
never means 'state, 7 as 
nohg so often does. The 
aarv was often an old or 
sacred part of a 7nft/£. 

Clever, (roqpo'tf, 20. dstvog, 214. 

Cleverness, aoqiia, 24. 

Cling to, Exeadai.gen. lA9.d. 

Close by, «W, oW. 288. n^oV, 
319. 

Collect, a&Qoiteo, 175. 

Combat, a disorder, imxov- 

QHV VOGCp, 239. 

Come, tQiofxai (?), 112, note 
b. 

: am, — j^cco, jper/". 

meaning, 206. 

(=be present to as- 
sist), nctQuvai, 92. 



Come for this (to effect it), 

ilfttlv E7ZI TOVICp. 

(to fetch it), 

sk&UV 8711 TOVTO. 

off, aTzaXlaTTco (in or 

an 6), 154. 
Come on or up, nodosal, 175. 

next to, fyea&ai, gen. 

said that he would- 



tcprj rfitiv, 91.6, or tlnev on 

riioi, 205. e. 
Command (an army), oroa- 

TrfltoD, 52. 
Commence a war, agaa&ai 

nolefiov ngog, ace. 188. 
Commit, smTQtTZoo, dat. 132. 
a sin, apuoidvco (?) 



(slg or moi, with ace), 154. 
an injury, adwelv 

adixiav, 138. 
Company, opUia, 112. 

: keep — , 6/xT)Jco, 



dat. 

Complaint (a),acr#*Wa (■== a 
weakness, an infirmity), 
319. 

Concerned, as " 

far as this is, 
as far 

at least as 



. tovtov ys 
evexa, 250. 



this is. 
Condemn, narayiyvcoGKm (?), 

156, obs. 
Condition : on — , icp o) or 

(pre, 267. 
Confer benefits on, ev noiuv, 

ace. 35. 



t See note on Accuse. 






206 



INDEX I. 



Confess, 6{ioloytca, 190. 

Confide to. imzQBnco, 132. 

Conquer, vTxd<o (vincere ; 
gain a victory over ene- 
wzies ;) 7ze.Q\yiyv£G$ai (?), 
overcome {gen.) 33=' In' 
omitted after conquer 
when it stands before 
1 battle.' 

Consider, oxonim (of care- 
fully examining and re- 
flecting on a point, 100. — 
cfQovrl^co (of anxious con- 
sideration^, 288. — with 
oneself, #«£ savior {axon- 
eiv or (JX87iT8G&ai) 9 319. 

Considerable, av^vog, 163. 

Consideration, d^icofAa, 144. 

Constitution, nolizeia, 206. 

Consult, fiovleveiv, 190. 

together, fiovlevsa- 

&ai, 190. 

Consume, dvaliGxco (?), 235. 

Contemporary with, to be. 
See 183. 182. a. 

Contend with, sg/fo), aW. 
183. 

Contention, #g<£, f#o£, 183. 

Continuous, ov%vog, 163. 

Contrary to, ^a(>a (ace.) 299. 

Contrivance, Tf/^,214. 

Corn, oirog, 259. 

Corpse, vaxQog, 150. 

Country, /oopa (a country), 
24. — nazQig (native coun- 
try or native city), 228. 

Crocodile, xooxodsilog, 28. 

Cross (a river), neQcuova&ai, 
with aor. pass. 188 (1). 



Crowded, daavg, 150. 
Crown, aztqjavog, 144. 
Cry, xlaico (?), 150. daxovoo^ 

283*. 
Cultivate, aencero, 121. Aor. 

mid.? 190. d. 
Custom : ac- ] 
cording to — , I xazd zo 
: as his [ elm&og, 52. j 

was, J 
Cut, TEfJlVm (?), 46. 
OUt, 8XX07ZltQ, 132. 

— to pieces, xazaxonzco, 
132. 

Cyrus, Kvoog, 24. 

D. 

Damage: to inflict the most, 
nXeiata xaxovoyslv (accu- 
sative.) 

Damsel, xoqtj, 15. 

Dance, %0Q8vcn 9 168*. 

Danger, xivSvvog, 132. 

(to brave, incur, ex- 



pose oneself to a), xivdvvsv- 

aiv xivdvvov. 
Dare, zoXftdco, 239. 
Daughter, ftvyavriQ (?), 20. 
Dead, vtxoog, 150. 
Death, ftdvazog, 41. 
Deceive, dnazdeo, i^aTzazdoo, 

41. 
Decide, k^W (?), 92. 
Defend, dfxvvsiv with aW. 

only, 222. 
Deliberate, fiovleveG&ai tzeqi, 

gen. 190. 
Delight, zeoTiG), 41. 
Deny, dgrsopat, 293. 






INDEX I. 



207 



Depends on you, h col hti, 

259. 
Deprive of, anoaTsosco, 125. 

67SQSC0, 168*. 

Desire, sm&vus'co, gen. sm- 

ftvuia, 156. 
Desist from, lriyco,gen. 154. 
Despicable, yavlog, 144. 
Despise, ohycoosoo, gen. 

xaracpoovsw, gen. 156. 
Destroy, diacp&si'oco (?), 92. 

anollvni (?), 193. 
Determined (when or 

though we have, &c), 

do^av fjfuv, 249. c. 
Die, ftrtjaxco, aTzo&vrfixco (?), 

125. 
Differ, diacpsoa) (?), gen. 154. 
Difficult, %alsnog, 65, 214. 
Dine, dsinvm, 288. 
Dining-room, avcoyscov, to, 

96. 
Directly, ev&vq, 309. 

, fo/ cp&dvco, 240. 

to, £i#v {gen.), 309. 

Disappear : to make to — , 

acpaviZco, 306. 
Disappeared, cpoovdog, 65. 
Disbelieve, am6taco f dat.l32. 
Disease, voaog, r h 154. 
Disgraceful, aio^Qog, 35. 
Dishonour, aiiud^m, 319. 
Disobey, aniGTEm da£. 132. 
Disposition, rftog, to, 138. 

Toonog, 150. 
Dispute with, ££/£«>, e/a£. 

183. 
Do, 8, TiQatreiv (=agere 

and gerere) denotes gen- 



erally the exertion of 
power upon an object : 
to do ; to employ oneself 
about something already 
existing ; hence, to man- 
age or administer any 
thing; to conduct a busi- 
ness. Hence used with 
general notions, as ovdsv, 
uijdsv, and with adverbs, 
si, &c. — noistv (facere), 
to make, to prepare, &c: 
also 'do' generally, when 
the object is a neuter pro- 
noun, as in 'what must I 
do V—ttqvlttsiv denotes 
activity generally ; noislv, 
productive activity. 

Do the greatest injury, ra 
ftiyiGtu ^Idnxsiv {ace.) 

— : to be doing well or ill, 
sv or xaxcog nqdxTsiv. 

— any thing whatever for 
the sake of gain, dnb nav- 
rog xsodaivsiv, 283. 

— evil towards, xaxovoysco, 
222. 

— good to, svnoisXv, ace. 35. 

— harm to, xwxovoysco, 222. 
injustice to, udixeco, 138. 

— kind offices to, sv noislv, 
ace. 35. 

nothing but, ovdsv alio 

?] (noislv often omitted), 
356. e. 

— service to, cocpslsoo, 82. 

— with (a thing), /^ao^ar, 
dat. (contraction!) 138. 

Dog, kvojvQ), 41. 



208 



INDEX I. 



Doors : in — , evdov, 125. 

Down, xriroa, 28. 

from, xaid (gen.), 

274. 
Downwards, xdrco, 28. 
Drachma, dga^^ 163. 
Draw up (of an army), zda- 

aw, 96. 
, = arrange, xoa- 

fitco, 206. 
Drawn up four deep, im 

TETtdotOV T8ld%&(U, 288. 

Drink, nivm (?), 144. 
During the disease, xatd ttjv 

TO GOV, 274. 

Dwell, oixtco, 274. 

E. 

Each, nag, 46. 
Eagle, dsTog, 36. 
Ear, ovg, corog, to, 20. 
Early in the morning, nocoi, 

193. 
Easy, (ydoiog. See 65. 
Eat, io&ia (?), 144. 
Educate, naidsva), 214. 
Egg, 09o'», 15. 
Elect = choose, aloeicd-cu (?), 

(uvxi), 190. a. 
Elephant, ilk$ag,v7og,l, 35. 
Empty, fAuraiog, 206. 
Enact laws: when &eTrai 

vopovgl when ftioQail 

See 188. 
Endeavour, neiQaoficu, 121, 

206. 
Endure, dvt'yofiai (?), 214. 
Enemy, (the), oi ttoXifuoi, 

46. 



Engage in a war, aoaG&ai 
noltfjLOv ngog, ace. 188. 

Enjov, a;zoAat;a> (genitive), 
259. 

Enough: to be — , aom>, 
175. 

: more than enough, 

7180177 d 7CQV doKOVVTWV, 

174./. 

, rtf a^xowa, (i. e. 

things that suffice). 
Entrust, ini7Q8 f nm, niG78voo, 

132. 

to, 87ii7q8Ti(o, (lays 



more stress on the entire 
giving up of the thing in 
question, so that it is now 
quite in the other person's 
hands). — mareim (gives 
more prominence to the 
fact that I put sufficient 
confidence in the other 
person to entrust the thing 
in question to him), 132. 

Envy, q>dovqg: (v.) qptfoyew, 
dat. 183. 

Equestrian exercises, 7a In- 
nvxd, 163. 

Equivalent to, dv7i, adv. 

Err, dfjL(tQ7dvco (?), 154. 

Escape from, cpevym, ace. 87. 

Especially, dllwg 78 xal, 
278. 

: and — , xai, re- 

f erring to dXXog, 346. 

Even, xai, 82. 

Ever, no78, 87. dg^v or 7tjv 
dgxfjv, 132. 

Every, nag, 46. 



INDEX I. 



209 



Every body, nag rig, 52. (ov- 

delg oarig ov, 277.) 
■ day. dva ndoav, fye- 

Qciv, 259. 
five years, did nevre 

8T0JV, 269. 

Evidently. See 239. 
Evil-doer, xanovgyog, 222. 
Evils [=bad things), xaxd, 

20. 
Exact (payment), ngdxreo'- 

<&cu, 163. 
Examine (a question, &c), 

(J'/.07z£a), 100. 

Except, 7ih)v {gen.) 

if, nVr { v el, 309. 

Excessive, 6 dyav [adv. with 

art.), 228. 
Excessively, dyav, 228. 
Exclude from, eigyco, 154. 
Exercise, daxeca, 121. 
Existing things, rd ovra, 65. 
Expediency, rb av^eoov, 

228. 
Expedient, 228. Vide jfei*. 
Expedition (to go on an), 

GTQCiTBVCO, 65. 

Expose myself to a danger, 
xudvveveiv xivdvvov, 132. 

External (things), rd e%co, 
125. 

Extremely (like). See 87. 

Eye, ocf&alpog, 132. 

F. 
Faith, niaiig, fj, 132. 
Faithful, nivrog, 87. 



Fall, 7T17TTCO, (?), 293 % 
in with, ivrvy%dvco, (?), 

rfa£. 183. 
Fall into a person's power, 

yi'yveo&ai ini rivi, 293. 
Family, yevog, to, 150. 
Far, far on, koqqcq : = much, 

noli, 144. 

from it, nollov 6^,283*. 

Fast, Ta^vV, 35. 
Father, nar^o, (?), 20. 
Fault : to find — with, inm- 

pdeo, dat. 183. 
Fear, cpofieopai, (fut. mid. 

and pass. : aor. pass.), 41. 

— deidoo (of a lasting ap- 

prehensionor dread), 293*. 

(snbst.) cf.ofiog. 

deogj to, 326. 



Feasible, dwatog, 175. 
Feel grateful or thankful, 

idoiv elder ai,t gen. of 

thing, 222. ^ 

pain, dlyeco, 20. 

sure, nenoi&a (nei&co), 

120. 
Fetch (of thing sold), evoiaxco 

(?),87. 
Fight, iid*io\mi (?), 73. 

agah]st,j7oo'£Twa,319. 

on horseback, ag/ &r- 



flrw^, 243. 
with, iidiofxai X dat, 

183. 
Find, evQiaxco, 87; to be 

found guilty, dX<x>vai,with 

gen. 73. 



t For conjug. of tlbivai, see p. 36, note q . 
X For conjug. see 73. 



210 



INDEX I. 



Find a man at home, Svdov 

XOCTCtlaftHV, 125. 

fault with, imTtfidco, 

dat. 183. 

Ollt, EVQIOXEIV (?). 

Fire, ttvq to, 41. 

First (ihe — of all), lv rolg 

nQocnog. Sec 259. 
Fit to govern, uQ%ix6g, gen. 
Five-and-five, ava tcevte. 
Fix, n/jyrvfM, 193. 
• : am fixed, nEnrjya, 

perf. 2. 
Flatter, xolaxeico, 87. 
Flatterer, xoXai, 87. 
Flesh, xoiag, to, (G. aog, cog,) 

144, 
Flog, [AaazTyoco, 235. 
Flow, ()sco (?), 132. 

- with a full or strong 



stream. See 132. 
Fly from, cpEvyco, 35. 
■ for refuge, xazacpEvyco, 

41. 
to the assistance of, 

ftorfttco, dat. 121. 
Follow, tnopcu, dat. 1S3. 
Folly, fjicoQia, 156. 
Fond of honour, yiXotlpog, 

214, 
gain, cfiXoxEodrjg, 

319. 
Food (for man), oTtog, 259. 
Foot, novg, TToSog^ o,20. 
For (=in behalf of), ttqo, 

243. 
For, yuQ, 41 ; for one's inte- 
rest, 319. 
such a man as me at 



least, oicp ys ipoi, 279, 

note t. 
For the sake of, evexvl gen. 

214. %&qiv gen. 250. 
For my sake, ydgiv ipfy>, 250. 

praise, in inaivco, 288. 

the present at least, 70' 

ys vvv eivm, 206. 
this cause or reason, 

ix ravnjg jjjg aiiiag, ex rov- 

rov, 224. 
your years, nobg rd hri, 

175. 
a long time, gen. xqovov 

cjvpov, noXXcov yptpcov, 

162*. e. 
Force, xQcirog, 70', 41. 
Forefather, nQoyovog, 156. 
Foresee, nooyiyvcicxEiv. See 

235. 
Forget, EmlavOdvofxai, (?) 

gen. 156. 
Form an alliance, cv^axov 

7T0i£L<j&ai riva, 188 (2). 
Former, 6 ttqlv, 156 (27). 
Formerly, ndXcu, 28. 
Forth from, ex, l£, gen. 
Fortify, r^/foo, 222. 
Fortune, ti5/^, 92. 
Forwardness, 70 noo&vpov, 

adj. 60. 
Fountain, jt^, 132. 
Fourth, TETctQTog, 52. 
Fowl. See 15, note g. 
Free, eXEvtfeQog, 150. 

from, dnaXXdrrco, gen. 



154. 

Freedom, eXev^eqU, 150. 
Frequently, noXXdxig, 8. 



INDEX I. 



211 



Friend, epilog, 20. 

From (after receive, learn, 

bring, come), naod, 299. 

vtto {gen.), 326. 
(after hear,) nqog 

(gen.), 319. 
our very birth, ev&vg 

yevopevoi, 309. 

fear, vno dt'ovg, 326. 

(of cause), sign of dat. 

Front, 6 Trooa&ev, 283*. 

Full of, peaiog, 150. 

Full speed (at), dvd xodzog, 

41. 
Future (the), to pallor. 235. 

G. 

Gain, xeodctivod, xeodog, to, 
283*. 

Gate, Tivlt], 193. 

General, GToarrtyog, 52. 

Gentle, nodog (?) 138. 

Geometer, yecopstQrjg, ov, 24. 

Get, xt dopou (of what will 
be retained as a posses- 
sion), 87. — Tvyydvnv with 
gen. (of what. is obtained 
accidentally, by g'oorf 
Zwdfc, &c.) 183, note b. — 
evQiansa^ai (to get posses- 
sion of an object sought 
for). 

— Tvyxdvw, g*ett. 183, note 
b. evQicxopai, 188. 

hold of, xoaTeco, 163. 

off, ec77«n«r7<x> sx or dno, 

154. 
Get (teeth, &c.) qpvco, 214. 

— taught, diddaxopcu, 188. 



Get the better of, mqiyiyvopai 
(gen.), 87. neqiupi (gen.), 
156. 

Gift, flcSoo*', 175. 

Give, didcopi, 41. 

one trouble; ;roVo*> or 



nodypaTa naqi^uv, 214. 

orders, iniTaTTco, 359. 

a share of, psTadidcaui, 

175. 

some of, psTadldcopi, 



175. 

a taste of, ysvew, ace. of 

pers., gen. of thing. 
■ to taste, ysvw (gen. of 



thing), 150. 
Given : to be — , doTt'og, 144. 
Gladly, rfitcog. 
Go, 8Q%opai (?), 112. 

— away, amipi (=will go 
away. See 65, note g). 

— d778Q%Opai f 112. 

in tO, £l68O%0pCU Tzaou,, 

111. d. 

— into, 8i6eQ%opai, L12. 

— on an expedition, cttooc- 

T8VCO, 65. 

— and do a thing, 350 (h), 
349. 

God, Qeog. 

Gold, XQvaog, 6, as a sum of 

gold money, xqvglov, 35. 
Golden, %ovo~eog, ovg, 144. 
Good, uyu&og — dpsiicov, dqia- 

Tog, 35. 
Govern, ao/co (gen.), 150. 
Government, ao/jy, 132. 
Gratify, %uQi'C > opai, 273. 
Great, ^a£ (?). 



212 



INDEX I. 



Greater, greatest, fxel^cov, 
[ityiorog, 46. 

Greatly (with injure, bene- 
fit, &,c.),iAeya. 

=far, nolv, 156. 

Greece, 'Elldg, ddog, rj 9 144. 

Greek, "EhXrjv. ?]vog, 144. 

Grudge, cp&ovz'co, gen. of ob- 
ject, dat. of pers. 183. 

Guard, cpvldzroo, 190. e. 

against, (pvldiTEG&ai, 

ace. 190. 

Guard, 

Guardian, 



opvla'S, (h). 



H. 

Habit : in the — of perform- 
ing, 7TQaxTMog,ge?i.l4:9. a. 

Hair, OqB; 9 7Qi%6g, tj 9 175. 

Half, rjfAiavg. See 59. 

Hand, piq f rj, (?) 20. 

Hang oneself, aadyxopeu, 
188, (1). 

Happen, Tvy%dv(afi 242. b. 

Happened : what had — , ro 
ysyovog. 

Happy, svdui'pcQv, ovog, 20. 

Harass, novov or nqdyfiata 

7iaQ£%£lV, 214. 

Hard, xalenog, 65, 214. 

Hare, Xayoig. See 15. 

Harm : come to some — , 
naduvti (suffer some- 
thing). 

Haste, GTzovdrj, 183. 

Have, ijto. See 15, note i. 

a child taught, didda- 

KOfiaif 125, t. 



Have an opportunity: when 
or though you have, &c. 
nctQov, 250. 

a narrow escape, naqa 



[uxqov iX&eiv, 299. 

-7zaQ oXlyov 



diacpsvysiv, 299. 
any regard for, wjdo- 

pai, gen. 156. 
confidence in, ninoi#a 9 

193. 

done supper, dno Sstn- 



vov ysvsG&at, 243. 
— in one's hand, did %ei- 
Qog s^eiv, 269. 

lost, G78Q8G), 168*. 

no fear of, tfce^oo, ace. 



138. 



slain a man with one's 

own hand, avro^eiQ ehai, 
299. 

the tooth ache (= suf- 
fer pain in my teeth), 
dXyoi rovg oftovTctg. See 
19*. b. 

Head, xecpalrj, 20. 

Hear, dxovco, F. M. 92. — on 
its government, see 148. 

Hearing: there is nothing 
like — , ovdsv olov dxovcai, 
278. 

Heavy, fiaQvg, 183. 

Heavy-armed soldier, ottXi- 
TTjg, 154. 

Hen, oQvig. See 15, note g. 

Henceforth, to dno rovde, 

34 /• 

Hercules, 'HQaxXijg, 183. 



t For conjug. of rvyxdvu, see 183. 



INDEX I. 



213 



Here, ev&dde, 28. 
Hide, dood, 35. 

XQV7I7CO, a7T0'AQV7ZT(O ) 

125. 
Hill, Xoyog, 288. 
Hinder, xcolvco, aTToxcolvco, 

293. 
Hire, ptG&ovfJicu, 188. 
Hit (a mark), Tvyxdvco, 183, 

noteb. 
Hold a magistracy or office, 

&QX81V olqx^v^ 132. 

cheap, bliycooico {gen.) 



156. 

■ my tongue 

CICOTTdcO, F. M. 87. 



about, 



(without ace), 

aiydco, F. M. 270. 
Home : at — , svdov, 125. 
to find a man at — , 

hbov Ka7cda@Ew, 125. 
Honey, psh, nog, to, 132. 
Honorable, xalog, 32. 
Honour, tt^, 150. 
Hope, Htt%cq, 87. 
Hoplite, 07iXhijg, 154. 
Horn, xs'oag, to, (?) 35. 
Horse, Innog, 15. 

soldier, iJinevg, 96. 

House, ohog, 41. 
How much, tzogov, 87. 
Hunting, drjoa, 154. 
Hurt, PAtito), 82. 

I. 

I at least, eycoys, 156. 
I for my part, sycoys, 156. 
Idle, %<fe, 299. 



If any body has. . . it is you, 
si rig xal dllog {sxeig, &c.) 

— it is agreeable to you, s 

601 @0vl0[A,8Vq) £6Tl, 206. 

— it should appear that I . . . 
iav qjuivcofiai, <fec. with 
partic. 239, note c. 

— you are willing, et cot 

fiovlofAWCp E6TI, 206. 

Ill, xaxoog, 8. 

— adj.= weak) : <xa&Evrig,3l9. 
Imitate, fxifxsofxai. 
Immediately, ev&vg, 309. — 

how to translate it by 
y&daag, &c, see 242./. 
on his arrival, 



ev&vg 7jxoov, 309. 
Immortal, d&dvaTog, 125. 
Impiety, aaafiua, 156. 
Impious, dvoGiog, 299. dae- 

Afe 156. 
Impossible, ddvvetTog, 65. 
Impudence, dvaidsia, 87. 
Impunity : with — , idiom* 

{rejoicing). 
In addition to, lni{dat^) 288. 

nqhg TovToig, 319. 

— (in answer to where ?) iv, 
dat. 259. 

— (a man's) power, Inlwith 
dat. of the person, 65. 

— (after to conquer), omit- 
ted, 131. e. 

— all respects, ndvTa, 134. 
xaTa ndvTa, 274. 

— an uncommon degree, 
diacpEQovTcogy 235. 



t For conjug. of Tvyx&vu, see 183. 



214 



INDEX I. 



In behalf of, tiqo, 243. 

— comparison of, nQog, 319. 

— (== in doors), tvdov, 125. 

— preference to, avii, 214. 

— proportion to, xazd (ace), 
2.74. 

— reality, t& ovn, 65. 

— reference to, tig, 259. 
TTQog, ace. 319. 

— (space of time), dvd, 259. 

— the time of, ml with gen. 
65. 

habit of doing, ttqcm- 

rixog, 150. 
world, who ? tig nore, 

150. 
Incur a danger, mvdvveveiv 

xwSvvov, 132. 

danger, xivdvvsveiv 9 l3l. 

Indeed, ^iv, 38, note f. 
Infinitely many, ixvqioi, 228. 
Infirmity, da&s'vaia, 319. 
Inflict damage on, xaxovQ- 

7 m, 222. 
Injure = hurt, fildnrw, 82. 

ddtxeoo, 138. 
Injury : do an — to, ^Idrrrco. 
Injury: to commit an — , 

ddixeiv udixiav, 138. 
Injustice, adixia, 82. to do — 

to, ddtxb'co, 138. 
Insolence, vfetg, rj, 138. 
Insolent person, v^Qiar^g. 
Instead of, dvil, 214. 
Insult, v@qI£co, ace. vfioig, 7], 

138. 
Interest for a man's — to be 

translated by nQog, with 

the gen. of person, 319. 



Intermediate, \izia\v, 26. 
Into, sis, ace. 
Intoxication, ped-tj, 326. 
Is a good 
thing for, 

— advantage- 
ous to, 

— character- l ! aTl ^°o,n 
istic of, (™°s)> 3 

— consistent 
with, 

— like, 

— enough, or sufficient for, 
olqxeT, 175. 

— to be, pellei Sgsg&cu, 
283. h. 

— of a character to, icrlv 
olog, 283. b. 

It being disgraceful, ala^Qov 
or, 250. 

— being evident, dyXov or, 
250. 

— being fit, TtQoaijxov, 250. 

— being impossible, ddvva- 
tov ov, 250. 

— being incumbent, nooolq- 
kov, 250. 

— being plain, dljXov ov,250. 

— being possible, dvvarbv 
ov, 250, 

— depends on you, iv aol 
8G71, 259. 

— is allowed (licet), s%ecfti, 
112. 

— is expedient, Gvpcpeoei, 
dat. 228. 

— is necessary, dvdyxrj 
(omitting the verb), 65. 
- is not a thing that every 



INDEX I. 



215 



body can do, ov navrog 

8671, 158. 
It is not every body that 

can, 163, 283. 
— is possible, olov7eia7i,283. 

— is profitable, ovpcpsQei, 
dat., 228. 

— is right, oQ&ag ejjM, 222. 

— is right that, diaaiov iart, 
358. a. 

— is the nature of, n(yvY.a, 
eqivv, 214. 

— is the part of, tazi (gen.), 
162*. h. 



Jaw, yva&og, rj, 20. 

Journey (v.), noQevofiai, 24. 
titiklopai^l), 188 (1). 

Judge, xQiTyg (general term), 
8. — diy.acirjg (only of a 
judge in the strict sense), 
239, x: (verb) xqivm, 92. 

Jupiter, Zeitg, diog, &c. voc. 
Zei, 193. 

Just, dixaiog, 87. 

Just as he was, ^neq or wV 
7Z8Q £i%ev, 351. 

K. 

Keep company with, o/m- 

Xtco, dat. 183. 
(for one's self), uiqecf- 

#cu, 188. 

Kill, a7T0X7£lVCQ (?), 82. 

King, fiaoilevg, 24. 
Knee, yovv, yovct.7, to, 20. 
Knock out, ixK07T7co (aor. 2 
pass.), 132. 



Know, oWa (of positive 
knowledge), 73. — ycyvcoa- 
xco (seek to become ac- 
quainted with), aor. ty- 
rcov, know (from ac- 
quaintance with it) : 
(with partic, 229.) 

(yiyvcooxco), 235. 

how, miG7uixai (?), 



293. 



-: Idon't- 
om oida, 67. 



-, ova e%co, or 



L. 

Labour, novog, (v. ttoveco,) 

154. 
Laid myself down, xazerM- 

frqv, 190. 
Lamb, apvog, 41. 
Large, fiiyag. 
(At) last, to 7elev7aiov, 34*. 

/■ 

Laugh, ysldco, aaopcu, ' 
222. 

at, xaT«y£2«oe>, 



P. 

M. 

278. 

Laughter, ^'Aeo^, coro^/278. 
Law, vofxog, 132. 
Lawful, #*?/«£, (=fas), 65. 

O(7*0£, dUaiog, 293. 
Lay down, xajati^fu, 163. 

eggs, r/xrco (?), 15. 

to the charge of, xarq- 

yoQ8(x) i 156. 

waste, 7t'juvoo (?), 46. 

Lazy, agyog, 299. 

Lead, ay to, 341. 

Lead (of a road), qp/ow, 73. 

Leaf, yvllov, 214. 



216 



INDEX I. 



Leap, allofxat, 273. 
Learn, (with partic.) \iav- 

tf«Va>(?), 239. 
Leather bottle, daxog, 15. 
Leave off, l/jyco, gen., 154. 

mwoftai, 1S8 (1 ). 
Leisure, apl//, 112. 
Let for hire, [aigO-ow, 188. 
Liberty, ilev&EQia, 150. 
Lie down, Haiaxlivofjiai (xa- 

Tsxlt&rjv), 190. 
Life, fitog, 28. by in fin., to 

ti]v, 150. 
Lift up, atgeiv, 188 (2). 
Like a dog, kwo? 8/x^, 

250 ; 

oixoiog, (dat.), 183. 

ayanaco, 52. 

to do it = do it gladly 

(rjdecog). 

should like to . . . ijds- 



cog dv, 87. 
-, should extremely like 



to . . . rfiiar dv, 87. 
Likely, elxog (neut. part.), 

331. 
Lily, xgivov (?), 144. 
Little (a little), oXfycp, 168*. 
Live, £aoo, 131. d. note b. 
• (= spend one's life), 

diarelm, 60. 
about the same time, 



Kara rov avrov yoovov ye- 

vto&ca, 183. 
Long (of time), ov%vog, 163. 

[AuxQog, 214. 
ago, ndXai, 28. 



Loss : to be at a — , dnogm, 
99. 

Love, cpileco (of love arising 
from regard, and the per- 
ception of good and ami- 
able qualities), 20. — dya- 
ndco (stronger: implying 
affection arising from the 
heart, &c), 52. — igdmt 
(of the passion of love), 
274. 

Lover of self, yllavrog, 222. 

Lower, 6 xdico (art. with 
adv.) 

M. 

Madness, Liavla, 24. 
Magistracy, aQxrj, 132. 
Maiden, KOQtj, 15. 
Maintain, r^gw (?), 190. 
Make to cease, navco, gen. 
of that from which, 154. 
to disappear, aq>ari£oj 9 



206. 

a great point of, tteqI 

noVkov noiuadai or r^ua- 
Gcu, 283. 

progress, 77qo%coqzco, 



274. 



immense (or aston- 
ishing) progress, tfavpaG- 

70V 060V 7TQ0%COQ8lV, 273. C. 

self-interest the object 



of one's life, nobg to gv[x~ 

Cp8Q0V £f[V, 228. 

for one's interest, efocu 



nQog (gen.), 319. 



t Aorist generally of sensual love, but ipaadai rvpawiSos common. 
(Pape.) 



INDEX I. 



217 



Male, dgfov, 150. 
Man, 46. (Obs.) 
: am not a man, 283, 

note a. 
Manage, Trgdrtco, 8. 
Many, nolvg, 46. the many, 

ol noXXoiy 46. 
times as many or 

much, nollartldoioi (at, a), 

175. 

numerous, noX~ 



XaTildaioi, 175. 
March, ilavvco (?), noqevo- 

[AOU, 24. 

of a single soldier, 

4«(?),96. 

Mare, innog, rj, 15. 

Mark, ffxorco'e, 183, b. 

Market-place, dyogd, 154. 

Master, daGTzorrjg, 222. 

diddoxalog (= teach- 
er), 168. 

(v.) Hoarem, (gen.), 



156, 

May (one—), 2£*m, 222. 
(though or wAe?* I 

may), ttc^oV, 250. 
Meet, htvyftdvcQ, dat. 183. 
Might (one—), itfv, 222. 
(when or though I, 

&c. might,) ttc^oV, 250. 
Mild,^5off(?), 138. 
Milk, T'c&a, yc&axr, ro, 132. 
Mina, pva, 82. 
Mind (as the seat of the 

passions), dvpog, 121. 
Mine, ipog, 20. 
Minerva, Aftr\va, 341. 
Misdeed, xccxovpy^a, ro,222. 

10 



Miserable, «%, 273. 
Misfortune, dvanodyta, 125. 
Miss, dpaotdvoo, (gen.), 154. 
Moderate (in desires, &c), 

Gcoyomv, 125, u. 
Moderation, ? ctoyooavvri, 
Modesty, $ 125, u. 
Molest, 970PO? or nodynatu 

7ZaQ8%8lV, 214. 

Money, jemima, 125. 

Month, W V, 6, 138. 
More than (= beyond), na- 
Q d (ace), 299. 

— than, fidlXov — r\, 



41. 



than any other single 

person, 174. e. 

enough, tzeqiztcc 



tStv doxovvtrnv, 174, f. 

could have been 



expected, &c, 168. d. 
More (after a numeral.) hi 9 

193. 
Morning : early in the — , 

TZQCOl, 193. 

Morrow (the), 7] avoiov, 26. 
Mortal, OwpoQi 125. 
Most, nluGToi, 175. 

of all, fxdhara ndvzcov, 

309. 

his time, %d aolld, 



137. 

Most men, or people, ol no\- 

Xoi> 46. 
Mostly, rd nolld, 137, 282. 

Mother, jwfcw(?), 20. 
Move, uvea), 28. 
Mourn for, itXXec&ai (ace), 
188 (1). 



218 



INDEX I. 



Much, nolvg, 46. 

(with compar.), ttoX- 

Xcp, 168*. 
Multitude (the), ol nolloi, 

46. 
Murder (to be tried for), 

yevyeiv yovov, 35. 
Murderer (the actual — ), 

avx 6%eiq, 299. 
Must (= ought), for, 60. 
, how translated by 

verbals in reog, 114. 
My, ipog, 20. 

N. 
Name (by name), ovopa, to, 

138. 137. a. 
Named : to be — after, ovopa 

ejeiv mi iivog, 288. 
Nation, i&vog, to, 65. 
Natural. See 331. 
Nature: it is the — of, &c, 

213. a. 
Near, mlag, 28. ttXtjgiov, 

309. iyyvg, gen. 150. 
Nearly, bXlyov delv or bXiyov 

alone, 283*. 
related to, iyyvrara 

ehai ytvovg, 149, e. 
Necessary : it is — , avdyx?], 

65. 
, it would be — to, 

(verbal in rs'og), 114. 
Necessity, dvdyxrj, 65. 
Need, if there is any, lav ri 

derj, or el ti dtoi, 92. 
Neighbour, 6 nl^aiov, 28. 
Neither — nor, ovte — ovte, 

\ir\TE — \it\te, 112. 



Neither — nor yet, ovte — ov- 

6V, \iy\te — [irfii, 112. 
Neptune, TIovEidcov, covog (?), 

341. 
Nevertheless, o^cog, 288. 
Next, 6 E%6fxEvog, gen. 149. 

d. 
day, rj avQiov, 26. on 

the — , rift varEQaia, 183. 
Nightfall, about, vno vmru, 

326. 
Nightingale, <x^coV(?), 341. 
No, by Jupiter, &c, pd Ala, 

341. 

— longer, ovxeti, ixtj^eti, 
112. 

Nobody, ovdeig, prjdeig, 112. 

Nose, Qig, (jivog, tj, 35. 

Nostril, 35. 

Not, 107-111. 

Not a single person, ovds 

elg, pqds Eig, 112. 
at all, ovds'v (ti), [ArjdEv 

— even, ovot, 82. prfe, 112. 

— only — but also, ov% oil 
— alia xal, 82. 

— yet, ovnm, 214. 
Nourish, tQscpco, 190. 
Now, vvv, 28. (== already) 

^drj, 65. 

O. 

O Athenians, w avdoEg *A&r[- 

valoi. 
Obey, 7iEi$EG$ai, dat. 120. 
Obtain, Tvyidvco, gen., 183, 

note b. 
Occasion: if or when there 



INDEX I. 



219 



is any — , idv n dsrj, or a 

7i dsoi, 92. 
Of (themselves, myself* 

(fee), ay s avToov, 243. 
Of old, (as adj.) ) 6 adieu, 

times, ) 26. 

Of those days, 6 tore, 26. 
Offer, naQt'xoj, 214. 

for sale, Ttcoltco, 86*. c. 

Offices : do kind — to. See 

Do. 
Often, noUdxig, 8. 
Ointment, pvgov, 150. 
Old, ol 7i dlai, 26. 
On account of, did (ace), 

269. tvexa, {gen.), 214. 

— an understanding that, 
im 7w, 288. 

— condition that, icp cp, 267. 
$te, 2S8. 

. — condition of being . . . , 
em rep thai, &c. 

— horseback, icp Innov or 

1717100, 288. 

— (space or time), dvd, 259. 

— the contrary, 137. d. 

— the father's side, nqbg 
Tiarohg, 319. 

— the next day, ry vats- 

QUlCi, 183. 

— the plea that, cog ovrcog, 
86*. e. 

— your account, did at, 
269. 

Once, dna%, 341. 
One, slg (fjiia, tv), 87. 
One = a person, rig. 

may, ?|scm, 222. 

might, «g§r, 222. 



One more, s<n etg, 193. 

who has never tasted, 

&c, ayevarog, 150. 
who has slain another 

with his own hand, avto- 

X*V, 29. 
One's neighbour, 6 nltiaiov, 

28. 

own things, id savrov. 

Only, fjiovov. 

Open, dvoiyco, dvecp^a, Perf. 1. 
stand — , dvecpya, 



Perf. 2. 
Openly, dno rov Tzoowavovg, 

243. 
Or, (in double questions), ^, 

after ttoteqov, 328. 
Or both, rj d^oraQa, 345. 
Order, xeiciJco, (the toeakest 

word = 6irf, tell,) 112.— 

rac7(7co, 96. imtdzTCQ, 

359. ro^£, 96. 

(in good), avrdxreog, 



96. 

Other (the— party ), ol heooi, 

46. 
Others (the), ol dlloi, 46. 
Ought, dec, XQ t (?), 60, 92 : 

117. 

: what we — , rd da- 



orra, d %Qrj, 206. 
Ours, rjiitTEoog, 24. 
Out of, ix, sj, g^tt. 224. t%eo, 

309. &*o' f 326. 

the way, iixnodcov, 



293. 
Outside, S-oi, 125. 



220 



INDEX I. 



Outside: the people outside, 

t try 

01 €§Q}. 

Outward (things), rd e%co, 

125. 
Overcome, Trsoiyiyvoftai, 

{gen.), 156. 
Overlook, imaxonim, 206. 
Own, to be translated by 

gen. savxov^avTovAeavrmv, 

&c.) 



Pain (v.), XvTiecoy 41. 
Pained , to be — , ulysoo, 20. 
Parent, yovsvg, 121. 
Part (the greater), 59. e, and 

58. 
(it is the), Ian, with 

gen. 163. 
Passion (anger), ftvtiog, 121. 
Passions (the), na^ea,?], 150. 
Pay, (n.), (ua&og, 87. 
attention to, rov vovv 

noQasxeiv, or Tzooofysiv, dat. 

331. 
close attention to, nqog 

rolg TTQuyfiaGt yiyvaa&cu, 

319. 
Peace, eiQrjvi], 214. 
Peacock, racog, 341. 
Peloponnesus, neXoTrovvrj- 

aog, ?), 60. 
People, 24; = persons (ol 

— ), see 29, z. 
Perceive, aia&uvopcu, (?), 

190, 239. 
Perform a service, v7tq/]8T8co, 

52. 
Perfume, ju^oi>, 150. 



Perish, an-ollvficu, 193, s. 
Permit, «aco (augm.?), 121. 
Persian, FleQa^g, ov, 24. 
Person, owpa, 138. 
Persuade, ;m#<» (ace), 120. 
Philip, &iXi7Z7iog, 24. 
Philosopher, yiloaocpog, 15. 
Physician, largog, 154. 
Piety, svaefieia, 156. 
Pious, evae^g, 1 56. 
Pitcher, ^vroa, 193. 
Pity (v.), 150; ^phrase) 269. 

OIXT81QCD, dl OiXTOV 8%81V. 

Place guards, xaTaanqaaa- 

&cu (pvlaxag, 188 (2). 
Place on, mixi$mii, dat. 144. 
Plea. See 86*. Examp. c. 
Pleasant, ^^, 214. 
Please, aoeaxco, dat. 331. 

what I — , a jioi do- 



x8i, 96. 

Pleasure, to take, qdopai. 

Plot against, imftovlevoo, dat. 
183. 

Pluck, riUsw, 188 (1). 

Plunder, 8iao7zd£co,fut. mid. 
(sometimes daco, B.), (gen- 
eral term plunder, rob,) 
144. — Irjt&pcu (make 

■ booty), 235. 

Poet, 7Toititrjg, 24. 

Possess, K8xr?i[A,ai, 87. Fut. ? 
See 199. 

Possession, xrr^ia, to, 87. 

Possible, dvvarog, 65. 

it is, OJoV 78 8GTI, 



283. a. 



84. 283. a. 



(it is not), ovh ianv, 



INDEX I. 



221 



Pot, %vtqol, 1^3. 

Power: in the — of, im, with 
dat. of person, 65. 

Powerful, dvvarog, 168*. 

Practise, dansco, (general 
term) 121. — pelezdco, (re- 
fers to the carefulness 
with which the thing is 
practised,) 163. 

Praise, maivtco, F. M., 60. 

Praiseworthy, inaiverog, 60. 

Pray do?i > t do this, ov \n,r\ 
with fut. 287*. e. 

Preference : in — of, dvzl 
{gen.), 214. 

Present, tzciqwv, partic. 

Present circumstances, con- 
dition, &c, ra TzaQovra, 
52. See 293*. 

, as adj. 6 vvv, 26. 

Prevent, ifmodav eh at [ir\, or 
(jirj ov, (with injin.) xooXvoo, 
a7zoKooXvcx>. See 293*. 

Procure, avQiaxopcu, 188 (2). 

Produce (laughter), noiico. 

Production, egyov, 121. 

Pronounce happv, evdcupon- 
fw, 150. 

Property : — generally omit- 
ted, the art. being put in 
neut. pL See Diff. 10. 

Prosecute, dioixsw, 35. 

Prosecuted (to be), ysvyew, 
35. 

Prosper, zvxv%tw y 92. 

Protect myself, d(ivvo^ai, 
222. 



Provide, Tzaoaaxevd^oo, 188 
(2). 

for one's safety, t^- 

ea&ai acoTt]Qiag, 150. 

Prudent, aoiqjQoov (one whose 
thoughtfulness and sound 
sense has become a habit), 
125, u. — cpQovipog (one who 
pays attention to his con- 
duct and character), 144.f 

Punish, xoldfa, F. M., 121. 

Punished (to be), dixqv dido- 
vai, or dovvcu, gen. of 
thing, dat. of person by 
whom, 228. 

Pupil, lAU&qTTJQ, 168*. 

Purchase, dyoQa^w, 163. 

Pursue, diooHco (fut. mid. 
best), 35. 

Put forth (naturally), cpv<n, 
214. 

off, ixdvco, 125. 

on, ivdvcn, 125. 

to death, dnoxtdvw (?), 

82. 

: to — a man over a riv- 
er, 7Z8QCUQVV (TWO), 188. 

Q. 

duick, Ta%vg, 35. 
Quickly, tap), 35. 
(partic), 242. /. 

R. 

Race, ysvog, to, 100. 
Rail at, XoidoQsopcu, dative 
183. 



t ippovinov Sei yeviadai tov iaeWovtcl owtypova k'aeadaij (Cyrop. iii. 1, 10). 



222 



INDEX I. 



Raise a war, ivetoetv noXefxov, 
193. 

Rank, rd&g, r\, 96. 
Rascal, xaxovQyog, 222. 
Rather than, pdXXov //, 191. 

V- 
Ravage, i^vco (?) : 46. 
Ready, iiolpog, 65. 
Reality (in), jcp ovn, 65. 
Really, tcq ovti, 65. 
Rebuke, min^dco, dat. 183. 
Receive, Tvy%dvco, 183, b. Xa- 

peiv,l9Q.l).dt'xotiai,l90.3). 
Reconcile, dicdvetv, 190. 
Reconciled: to be — to each 

other, SiuXveo&cu nqog 

{ace), 190. 
Rejoice, ydopai, (refers to the 

feeling of delight; to its 

sensual gratification), 20. 

— laiqco, (general term), 

239. 
Relations, Trgoa^xovzeg, 283. 
Remain, with, naoaixivco, 

222. 
Remarkably, diacpeoovrcag, 

235. 
Remember, ps'iAvrjficuJ gen. 

156, 239. 
Repel, dfivvofxai (ace), 222. 
Repent, fxezafxeXsi pot, 239. 
Reputation, uh'cofxa, to, 144. 
Require, see Want. 
Requite, d[j,vvo[icu(acc), 222. 
Rest (of the), 6 aXXog, 46. 
Restore an exile, xardyco, 

331. 



Restrain by punishment, 

xoXdfa, F. M., 120. 
Return from banishment, 

xazt'Qxofjtcu, KaTEifAt 269*. 
Return like for like, roTg 

opoioig dpvvsa&ai, 222. 
thanks for, ^dow 

eldsvai (gen. of thing), 222. 

See 73, note q. 
Revenge myself, apvropcu, 

ace, 222. 
Reverence, aldsopcu, ace, 

138. 
Rhinoceros, QivoxeQwg, corog, 

35. 
Rich, TiXovaiog. 
Ride, iXavvsiv (?), 41. 
on horseback, icp in/ico 

d%ti(j&()u, icp Inncx) Tzoosvev- 

&ai, 288. 
Right, oaiog, dlxcuog, 293. 
, it is, oo&wg fyei, 

222. 
River, norapog, 132. 
Road, 6dog, tj, 73. 
home, rj oixude odog, 

331. 
Rock, niroa, 235. 
Roman, 'PcopaTog, 293. 
Rule over, ao/co, (gen.) 
Run, tq^co (dQafx), 65. 
to the assistance of, 

fioii&eoo (dat.), 121. 
away from, dnobid- 

odaxcQ, ace 138. 
Running, the act of, dQopog, 

183. 



t Forfut. see 199. 



INDEX I. 



223 



Safe, aocpaXqg, 299. 
Safety, docpdXeia, 193. 
(from danger), aa- 

cpdXeia, 299. 
Said, H7TOV, 60. 
Sail away, anonlito (?), 188. 
Sale. See Offer. 
Same, o avrog, 41. 
Say, &c. tayco (= speak, of 

a connected speech ; also 

tell). E17T8LV (60, C), CflJlAl 

{= say). — XaXuv (= chat- 
ter, talk: especially of 
children who are begin- 
ning to speak). — cpdaxco 
( = glve out; intimating 
that the thing is not so). 
222. 

Science, 87Tiazrj(ji7], 293. 

Scold, XoidoQsofJiai, dat. 183. 

Scourge, pavzTyocQ, 235. 

Scythian, 2nv&7]g, ov, 24. 

Sea, &dla(j(ja, 154. 

Secretly, 242. c (2); part. 
la&cav, 241. 

Security, daydXeia, 299. 

See (= behold), ftedofica, 87. 

(with part.), ogdco (?), 

73, 239. 

Seek, £j7r£<», 100. 

Seems (good, videtur), doxei, 
96. 

Self, afoo's, 39 (1). 

love, cpilavria, 228. 

loving, yilaviog, 228. 

restraint, ocoqjQoavvr], 

125. 

Selfish, qlXavrog, 228. 



Selfishness, cptlaviia, 228. 

Sell, ffcoi/eo, 87. 

Send, aze'XXsiv, 188, (1). 

(a boy) to a master, 



se$ dtdaoxdXov nsfiTtsiv, 259. 
for, {A8ia7isfX7io[Aat, 259. 



Senseless, dvorjiog, 214. 
Sensible, cpgovipog, 140. 
Sensual pleasures, ca >ca7cc 

ro aoo^a fjdovai, 274. 
Serve, vnriQETeco, dat. 52. 
Service: do a — to, acpsXeco, 

ace. 
Set about, inixeiQico dat. 121. 

OUt, TIOQSVOfAai, 24. 

Severe, /Ja^, 183. 
Shameless, dvaid/jg, 87. 
Shamelessness, dvaideta, 87. 
Shed tears, daxQvco, 282. 
Sheep, ofe, 41. 
Ship, rav? (?), 125. 
Should, oa (?), 60. 
Shown, having, imdedsiype- 

vog y 188, 3, 
Shun = fly from, cpevyoo, 35. 
Silence, many, 96. 
Silently, aiytj, 175. 
Sin, dfAaQidvco, elg or negi 
(with accus.),against,154t. 
Sing, £«», F. M. 168*. 

better, udXXiov adeiv, 



168* 
Single (not a single person), 

ovde elg: p^de tig, 112. 
Slave, SovXog, 20. 
Sleep (to), xoipdofxcu, sub. 

vTzvog, 132. 
Slow, p Q a8vQ, 175. 
. am slow to do it ^= 



224 



INDEX I. 



will do it by leisure, cpA??, 

112. Diff. 35. 
Slowly, cxoXr} (literally by 

leisure: see 112.) — fiqa- 

dsmg, 175. 
Smell of, 3 fa (?), 150. 
So — as to, (Sale with infin., 

212. 

— great, rrjXixovrog, 22S. 

— many, rovog, roaoade, 
Toaovrog, 65. 

— powerful, rr]h>iovTog, 228. 

— that, Sots with infin. or 
indie, 212. 

— , to be, ovzcog s%eiv. 

— to say, oog mog sinew, 144. 
Socrates, JScoxQdrrjg. See 15, 

note f. 
Soldier, oTQaitcoTtjg, ov, 228. 
Solon, ^oXoov, covog, 183. 
Some, eativ ol, ivioi, 264. 
others, ol \iiv — ol 

8i, 41. 
Sometimes, tariv ors, 264. 
Somewhere, eaziv ottov, 264. 
Son, noug (general term, 

15). — vlog 9 (with respect 

to his parents). — often 

omitted, 23. b. 
Sophroniscus, Zcoyoovlaxog, 

24. 
Soul, ypvyj]. 
Spare, yeidoficu (genitive), 

156. 
Speak, Xiyco, 35. 
— calumniously of, Xoi- 

dooiofiai, dat. 183. 

ill of, xaxobg Xe'ysiv, 



ace. 35. 



Speak well of, ev Xeyeip, ace. 
35. 

the truth, dXij&evoo, 82. 



Spear, dogv, to, (?) 193. 
Spend, avaliaxm (?), 235. 
Spring, eao, to, gen. rjoog, 

341. 
Stadium, ozddiog, or craSiov, 

136. 
Staff, QdpdoQ, y, 138. 
Stag, eXacpog, 35. 
Stand open, dvs'qtya, Perf. 2. 

193. 

by and see, &c. ? 



moioodco, 331, note o. 
State, noXtg (eosg), rj, 8. 
Stay (in a town), diargi^ 

96. 
Steal, hXmtco, F. M., (hsxXo- 

qpa,) 73. 
Stick, gdpdoQ, ri, 183. 
Still, hi, 168*. 
Stomach, yaar^Q, 8Qog (?), fj, 

235. 
Stone, Xi&og, niroog, 235. 
Stop, (trans.) navco, (in- 

trans.) navofxeu, 188(1); 

with partic. 239. 
Stove, xdfATvog, 282. 
Straight to, zv&v (gen.) 309. 
Strange, davpaarog, 259. 
Strangle, kndyiuv, 188 (1). 
Stream: flows with a full 

or strong — , noXvg qbT. 
Strength, xodtog, 41. 6&£vog y 

to, 319. 
Strife, eoig, idog, tj, 183. 
Strike, aXqoom (used by the 

Attics in the perf. act. 



INDEX I. 



225 



and in the pass. nardoaeiv 
being used for the other 
tenses), — rtWco. 
Vomel says rv7tzoo the 
general term for strik- 
ing on any thing : 
ttcuco to strike a per- 
son : to give blows 
for correction : con- 
nected with 7zcug(l). — 
tjX/jitco is rvntco and 
na!(x) strengthened. 
Strip, ixdvoo, 125. 
Strong, la^vQog, 35. 
Succour, imxovQsoo, dat. also 

ace. of the thing, 239. 
Such a man as you, 6 olog 

ov avrjQ, 271. 
Suffer (= allow), idoo, 121. 
— Tidaxco (of suffering 
painful things), 168*. 
a thing to be done, 

fTSQIOQUCQ, 331. 

from a disease, xdfAvwJ 

183. 

pain, dlyeco, 20. 

punishment, dUrjv dido- 

vcu, gen. of thing, dat. of 

person by whom, 228 
Suffering, nddog, 150. 
Sufficient: to be — , doxeiv, 

175. 
Sufficient: more than — , 

nEQlJld 70dV aOXOVVTOW, 

174, f. 

Suggestion, 243. 
Superhuman (of — size), pet- 



£cov $ v.at av&Qconov, 168. 

d. 
Superintend, imaxomm, 206. 
Supply to, ticcqsxco, 214. 
Surpass, neQieifxi^gen.), 156. 
Surprised (am), davudfa, 

F. M., 8. 
Surprising, davpaarog, 259. 
Surprisingly, $av{iu<5mg cog, 

273. d. 
Suspect, vnonrEvco, ace. of 

pers., 293*. 
Swallow, %sXidoiv, ovog (?), 

341. 
Swear by, opvvfii, ace. (?), 

351. 
Sweet, rjdvg, 214. 

T. 

Table, rqdne'Qa, 188. 
Take, Xa^dvco(l), 92. al- 
qeiv, 190. 

away from, dcpaiQsco, 



125. 



- place. See Happen. 

- care, q)QovTi%co, 288. 
hold of, lafitG&ai, 163. 



in hand, im%8iQ8G), 

dat. 121. 
myself off, dnalXdr- 

Topcu, 154. Aor. 190. 4. 
off, exdvco, 125. 



pleasure in, Tjdopcu, 

dat. 20. 

Up, aiQBlV, 188 (2). 



Talent, rdlavxov, 82. 
Talk, lalzco, 35. 



10* 



226 



INDEX I. 



Task, tyov, 121. 

Taste : give to — , allow 

to — , yevco (ace. of person, 

gen. of thing). 
Tasted, one who has never, 

ayevGzog, with gen. 150. 
, to have never,= ta 

be dyevGtog (with gen.) 
Taught, that can be — , 

didaxiog, 293*. 
Teach, 8t8d<n<o (?), 125. 
Teacher, diddaxalog, 168*. 
Tear, ddxgvov, 168*. 

shed, — , daxQvco, 282. 

Temper, dvfxog, 121. 
Temperance, goocpqogvvt], 

125, u. 
Temperate, Go&cpQwv, 125, u. 
Temple, vaog (vecog, Att.), 

41. 
Ten thousand, [ivqioi, 228. 
Terrible, deivog, 214 
Thales, Qaltjg (?), 183. 
Than any other single per- 
son, Big dvi]Q, 174. e. tig ye 

dvtjQ gov, 172. 
ever, avzog with gen. 

of reciprocal pronoun, 

167. 
Thankful, to be or feel, 

idoiv el8evai,t gen. of thing, 

222. 
Thanks, to return, ydqw 

sidivcuj genitive of thing, 

222. 
That, ixeivog, 46. 
, in order that, iva, 73. 



That (after verbs of tel- 
ling), on, 73. 
The — the, (with compar.), 

OGCt) TOGOVTCp, 168*. 

The one — the other, 6 ^iv 

— 6 de, 38. 
The morrow (the next day), 

7] avQiov, do. 
Thebans, Orjpatoi, 125. 
Theft, xlomj, 73. 
Then (time), rote, 92. 
(of inference), ovv, 

100. 



in questions, elza, 

318. h. eneira, 318. i. 
(See 315.) 

There, ixei, 28. 

(am), ndoetfit, 92. 

being an opportuni- 
ty, tiolqov, 250. 

— , to be, ndqei\ii. See 



91.6. 
Therefore, ex ravTfjg rijg al- 

t tag, ix rovtov, 222. 
Thick, daovg, 150. 
Thickly planted with trees, 

dctGvg dtvdQcov, 150. 
Thine, uog, 20. 
Thing, TiQciypa, 8. 
Things that are ; existing 

things, vet fivra, 65. 
Think, vo^/fco, 52. oiopai 

(2 sing, oiu), 87. 
happy, evdcupovi^co, 

150. 
Third, rgirog, 52. 
This, ovtog, ode, 46. 



t For siSivai, see 73, note q. 



INDEX I. 



227 



This being determined, do- [ 
%av ravra, 249. c. See 
note o. 

being the case, in tov- 

7ov, 224. 

Three, rgsig, rota, 15. 

Through (of space, time, 
and means), dia (tov), 
269. — (cause), dia [top), 
326. V7i6, gen. 

- (the whole coun- 
try), ava naoav ttjv vr\v, 
259. 

Throw, qi7ttoo, 235. 

Thy, cog, 20. 

Till late in the day, {as'xqi 
ttoqqco Tijg fjpsgag, 144. 

Time, %o6vog, 28. 

■ , it is, cooa, 65. 

, in my, &c. in i(xov, 

65. 

To, 288, 319. 

To Sardis, Chios, &c, im 
^uodecov, im rrjg Xiov,288. 

To speak generally, cog mog 

E17I8LV, 144. 

Together with, avv (omit- 
ted before avteo, avi^, &c), 
345. 

Toil, novog, 154. 

To-morrow, avoiov, 28. 

Too (and that — ), xal ravra, 
206. 

great for, &c., compar- 
ative with rj nara before a 
sabst., q 006TS before in- 
fin., 168. 

soon (after cannot), 

242. e. 



Tooth, bdovg, G. odovrog, 6, 
20. 

Touch, anTOfxai, 150. 

Towards, after Ho act in- 
solently ',' eig, 319. 

nqog, 319. eig, 



259. 



home, in oixov, 



288. 

Town, aaxv, to, 96. 
Transact, nqaTTco, 8. 
Transgress, naga^aivoj, 

228. 
Treat ill, xaxw^ noisTv, ace. 

35. 

well, €v noieTv, ace. 35. 



Treaty, onovdai, pi. 228. 
Tree, fcVfyov (?), 144. 
Trick f tiivri, 214. 
Trouble, jtoVo^, 154. 
True, alij&ng, 274. 
happiness, r\ cog aXt}- 

&cog svdaifiovicc, 274. 
Trust (1) (= am confident), 

nenoi&a, 119, note i ; 193. 
(have confidence in), 



niarsvco, with dat. only, 

132. 
Truth (the), to ahfik, 274 

, alrj&eia, 274. 

Try (for murder), dicoxsiv 

cpovov, 35 ; (am tried,) cpEv- 

yeiv, gen. 
, neiodopcu (governs 

gen.\ 121. 
Tunic, %itc6v, 125. 
Turn, TQt'nco, 73. 
Turned (am — into), yfyvopai 

(?), 15. 



228 



INDEX I. 



Twice as many, Smldaioi, 
175. 

Two by two, nar a dvo, 274. 

U. 
Uncommon degree (in an), 

diacpeQovTmg, 235. 
Unconsciously, 242. c. 

Uncovered, \pdog, 235. 
Under, vno, 326. 
Undergo, vnofxivcoy 214. 
Understanding, on an, ln\ 

rep ehai, &c. 227, n. 
Undertake an expedition, 

TzoQsvopai, 24. 
Unexpected, anQooboxritog, 

224. 
Unexpectedly, «£ dnQoadox- 

7\%ov, 224. 
Unfortunate, xanodaipcov, 

144. 
Unjust, ddixog, 138. 
Unknown to myself, 

242. c. 
Unless, el ^ 112. 
Until, a%Qi, [MjQh $ m $9 * are > 

306. 
Up (adv.), arm, 28. dvd 

(prep.), ace. 259. 
Upper, 6 «Vco, 28. 
Upper-chamber, vneqtyov, 

96. . 
Upwards, &co, 28. 
Use, xQaopoUj dat. (contr. ?) 

138. 
Used to, imperf., 95, t. 
Useless, {xdiuiog, 206. 
Utility, to aviA,q)eQOp, 228. 



Vain, [idrcuog, 206. 
Value, ttfxdofjiai, 163. 
Value very highly, ^o fifol- 

2.0t> 7101816&CU) 243. 7T£(M 

ttoMoi; noma&cu or rjyua- 

&at, 282. 
Vanished, yoovdog, 65. 
(A) vast number, ^o/o«, 228. 
Very, rca™, 214. /n-o, 78. 
highly, nluorovj 

162*. 6. 

many, pvoioi, 228. 

well, aQMsra. 



Vexed, am — at. dx&opcu (?) 7 

da£. 20. 
Victory, nxrj, 132. 
Villages, in — , xaid xcopag, 

274. 
Villain, xaxovQyog, 222. 
Villainy, xaxovoyia,222. 
Violet, &r y 144. 
Virtue, ccost?/, 8. 
Voluntarily, i'&elovt^g, ov 7 

299. 
Volunteer (as a), i&elovwig, 

299. 

W. 

Wall, 2;. T8ix%<x>, (sub st.) ret- 

%og, to, 222. 
Want, oVo^ca, 150. 
Wanted, if I am, <fcc, saV 

Tt tfq?, or si ri dsoi, 91. a. 6. 
War, nolepog. 
Ward off, dpvreiv ri rin, 

222. 

from myself, dpv- 



vopcu, ace. 222. 



INDEX I. 



229 



Was near (= almost), bliyov 
detv, 283. c. 

Wash, iovw, 188(1). 

Watch over, zyQijyoQtvai n8Qi, 
gen. 193. 

Water, vdcug, to, 15. 

Way, odog, r\, 154. 

Weak, a<s&evrjg, 319. 

"Weakness, ao&evsia, 319. 

Wealthy, jt^oJct/oc,', 20. 

Weep for, xaianlaisiv (?), 168 
(2), 278. 

Weigh anchor, aigsiv (an- 
chor, subaud.), 188. 

Well, ev, 8. 

to be, xalmg s%uv. 

What? 7i ; 

kind of? noTog ; 



comes from (the 

gods), TOL 703V &8COV, 54. 

comes next (to), ra 



ixopsva, gen. 149. d. 

induces you to . . ? ti 



fia&cov ; 31 3. 

possesses you to . . ? 

riTzadcov; 318. 

-, to — place, not, otioi, 



144, 72, p. 

we ought, a %Qrj, 91. 

C. — ra dt'ovru, 206. 
Whatsoever, oatig, 92. ei rig, 

269. 
When, ore, ineidy, i7reiddv,92. 

? note ; 92. 

■you, ^ may, ) ndqov, 



he, &c. \ might, $ 250. 
— you ought, &c, dkv, 



250. 



When it is your duty, ds'ov, 
nQoaf^ov, 250. 

— or whereas it was 

said, siQ^tvov, 250. 

thereis any occasion, lav 

n derj (or, after an histori- 
cal tense, biti de'oi), 91. a. b. 

Whence, no&sv, 100. 

Whenever, ottote, 96. 

Where, ttov, 144. ottov, 72. p. 

Whether, <>f, 335. idv, 336. 

Which way = whither, not; 
— in dependent questions 
regularly, onoi, 72, p. 

Whilst, &xqi, img, 306. 
he was walking, ^g- 

Ta%V 7TEQl7TaTG)V, 288. 

Whither, ttoi, 73, 144, in 

dependent sentences, onoi, 

72, p. 
Who? z/£/ in dependent 

sentences, regularly ocras, 

72, note p. 
in the world ? 27V note ; 

150. 
Whole (the), 6 ^a?, or ^0, 

45. 

, olog, 138. 

Whosoever, oang, 92. sf */$, 

269. 
Why? n Vidian; 183. 
Wicked, novr^og, (immoral, 

vile), 188. — dvoaiog (one 

who breaks the divine 

and natural laws. See 

feu*, in 293*,) 299. 
Wickedness, novrjQia, 188. 
Widow, #^{>«> 235. 
Will certainly, 358. d. 



230 



INDEX I. 



Willing : if you are — , u 
ooi ftovlofxtvcp iart, 206. 

Willingly at least, fxooV thai, 
144. 

Wine, ohog, 15. 

Wing (214), 7zz8qv% =ala, 
the wing with reference 
tothe wing-joint. — nrtQov 
=penna, the wing with 
reference to the wing- 
f eat hers (Doderlein.) 

Wisdom, Gocpiu, 24. 

Wise, aocpog, 20. 

Wish, 100 [distinction be- 
tween fiovloficu and idsla, 
100]. 

With, gvv (dat.), perd (gen.), 
24. 

■ (by partic), fym; 

aywv, cptQcov, %oc6[A8vog, 235. 

With a view to, kqiq (ace), 
319. 

■ what object or view, 

it fiovXopevog, 341. 

■ impunity, %alo(ov, 154. 

■ three others, i&aoTog 

avrcg, 68. 

■ you (us, &c.), to be, 

naQn\ii. See 91. b. 

Within, hoov, 125. 

Without, ^oa, gen. 125. avsv, 
gen. 150. icoQig, 309. dfya, 
309. 

being dis- 



covered 



served, 



ob- 



, 242. c. 
'241. 



seen, 



knowing it, d 



Wolf, Imog, 41. 

Woman, yvvr], R. yvvaw, V. 

yvvai, 15. 
Wonder at, tfa^ccfca, F. 

M. 8. 
Work, %or, 121. 
Worthless, yavlog, 144. 
Worthy of, &£ l0 g, 65, 150. 
Would probably have been, 

ixivdvvsvGEv av (with in- 

fin.), 359. 

rather — than, r]biov 



«y — rj, o7. 

that ! eiBs, ei& wcpelov 

(tg,e), el yao wyeXov, wg oxpf- 
lov or Scptlov alone, 206. 

Wound, riTowijxco, 269. 

Wretched, xaxodaipcov, (ill- 
fated), 144. ctoJlios, 274. 

Wrong, avoaiog, 299. See 
293. 



Year, hog, to, 144. 

You are joking, nuiQug s%ow y 

350. g\ 
do nothing but, ovbh 

alio r] — , 357. 
— — there ! ovtog (avzq) ! 

325, d. 
Young, vsog, ]68*. 

bird, veoacog, 214. 

Yours, vptTEQog, 24. 
Yourself, 48, 49. 

Z. 

Zeal, to TZQo&vpov, (adj.), 

60. 
Zealous, nqodvixog, 221. e. 



INDEX II. 



List of Phrases and Words explained/!* 



A. 

(6) ay ocv opofiog, 228. 

dyanav tolg naqovai or ra 

TTctQovra, 73. 

fycov (=with), 235. 

, , ^ noiuv ) p. 107, 

ai6 X vvonai j nQ ^ v J nQte K 

alreTa&ai (mid.), not with 
two accusatives, 124, note 

V ', 
'Ale%avdQog 6 &ili7T7zov 9 23. 

alio ri 7j — / dllon ; 318. 

dllcog re xai 278. 

aXaivcu xlo7zrjg, 73. 

a^q)0T8Q0v ( -a), 345. 

ai>#' co*>, 267. 

avco, 8. 

«770 aot; dg^dfievog, 100. 

dunvov yeve'v&ai; 243. 

toD TiQOCpavovg, 243. 

a7Todidodox8iv tivd, 138. 

OQxofispog, 235. 

avrolg avdQaoiv, 350. 

avzog, 39. aviog aviov, 166. 

a<p iaviojv, 243. 



(3/ov €V 7/X£W, 206. 



dsdoytis'vov, 249, note n. 
detvorarog aavrov qa&a, 168, 

note m. 
fc'ov, 249. a. 
SiJXos a^j, 239. 
dialmwv xqovov, 235. 
fo 3 6^7^ %sw, &c.j 270. 
dcxawg ei/u, 358. 
fi/x^v didovai (gen.), 228. 
diCQxetv qioiov, 35. 
Soxow, 249, note n. 
#o£a^ (flo§#*> rai>rtf, &c), 

249. c. 
<5o(>£ sAw, 193, note u. 
dvvaTcotEQOi avroc avzmv, 

168. c. 
duo^ dsovra (not deovioiv), 

283. 

savtov elvaty 162*. i. 



t Phrases not found here may be looked for in their Alphabetical 
place in the last section. 



232 



INDEX II. 



iyxalelr rl Tin, 183. 
et goi (iovXofitvcp egtiv, 206. 
el {ihllu ytrtG&ai, 283. 
el (A)j did, 125. 

— rig, 268. 

xal dllog, 174. d. 

*/'#' dSyelov (eg, e), 206. 
eiQyco, tioyco, 154, note b. 

ElQljfXb'l'OV, 250. 

clg ur/jQ, 174. e. 
eig dtdaaxdlov {nifxnEiv, cpoi- 
tuv\ 259. 

T1JV <Ih\l7l7TOV, 23. 

sun? o* Uyovrtg ) 263, note 

dl XtyovGi ) a. 

exiiovtevGev dv diacp&aQjjvai, 

359. 
£*oaj> £??tft, 144. 
Efxnodojv thai, 293*. 
iv TOig TTQWTOg, 259. 
tVeXCC TUiV 8T8(J(OV, 250. 

tvdov xazalafitiv, 125. 

i% dnooodoxrjTOV, 224. 

£ '§oV, 249. b. 

in f(Uo/, 65. 

«V l\iov, 65. 

^77^ 7o5 B^ca, 227. b. 

ETltXOVQHV TOGO), 239. 

EGTIV 01 (== evioi), 263. 

ovGTivag . . . . ; 269. rf. 

£vi>i/ 7/^ nolzwg, 309. 
ehftvg tjkwv, 309. 
£<p a5 or wt£, 266. 
fyeo&aiTirog, 149. rf. 
6/coj; (J=with) : 235. 

77. 

77 avQiov, 27. 

?} xara, with ace. 168. cZ. 



§ wars, with i??jfm. 168. e. 
7} noXktj T?jg xwQccg (not 70 

noli), 58. 
{jde'ojg dv d^saaaiftrjv, 86*. 
#;7fc£ €?x €i; » ^1* 

0. 

ftavpaGag g/co, 350. 
'davpaoicng wg, 273. rf. 
ftavfxaGTOV ogov, 273. c. 
ftzivai } r 1 oo /o \ 

toWai 5 ^°^' 188j (30 

K. 

xcu og, 40. c. 
— Tama, 206. 
v.aziqyo\iau 270. 
xw7oo, 28, note x. 
xf^o^ St'w/v, 250. 

A. 

lavddvco, with partic. 242. c. 
KyEiv, (tv, xaxcog, &c), 35. 
XrjQtTg iypv, 350. g\ 

M. 

iua z//a, 341. 

pav&dvG) (with /?ar£.) 239. 

fxsydla cocpsXeiv, fildnTEiv, &C. 

82, O&s. 
fxillco yodcpEiv, &c, 283. 
lierafiekei (with part.), 239. 
(jiEza^v nEQinaToov, 288. 
jm*^ noiJQca Ttjg TjfiEQag, 144. 

[JtVQIOl, [AVQIOl, 228. 



y^ Jta, 341. 



JV. 



INDEX II. 



233 



0. 
6 Sj f 40. 

6 7][M6Vg TOV IQ0V0V, 59. 6. 

6 ocog gv avrjQ, 273. 

ol apq)i "Avvxov, 283*, note x. 

yqv 8%0V7sg, 278. 

— noXXoi, 45. 

7TQ0G1j'A0VT8g, 249. 

o!og xi etj&M, 283. 

oj'ooj,' (= on TOIOVTCOV), 258. 6. 

bXiyov dew, dew, &c, 283. 

ofxrvj-ii (xovg xteovg), 351. 

ottco^ a*ijg s<?£«3 287*. 

ooro^ oi>, 125. 

otfotJ£ tjdvraro nXeiGxovg^ TA.c. 

OGCp TOGOVTCp, 168*. 

on [xt'yiGxog, 174. 6. 

ot> ^ Xah'jGeig ; &c, 287*. 

— natxog shut, 162*. ^. 

ov, not simply reflexive, but 
used in dependent sen- 
tences to denote the sub- 
ject of the principal sen- 
tence, 50. p. 29. 

— e not u?ed by Attic proSe- 
writers, except Plato, 50, 
p. 29. 

ovx sgziv, 86*. d. 

— ■ tyco (±- non habeo), 72. &. 

ovde)g oGxig ov, 277. 

ovdev olov axovGcu, 278. 

__ 7I> 150. 

ovrog ! 325. ri. 
ovxcog e%etv, 72. c. 
0i»/ ort — «?J.« x«/, 82. 

77. 

j7«oa fjuxQov iX&ew, &c. 299. 
frao' cXiyov dieyevyov, &C.299. 



7taGCL !] ttoXiq, 45. d>. 

Tiohg, 45. c?. 

neimzog avxog, &c, 51. G?. 

77£0 1 TloXXov 770181G&CU, 283*. 

718QIOQCIV) 331. 

7ZEQITTU XOJV (XQXOVVZCQV, 174. jf. 

nicpvxe, 208. 

noiew (gv, xaxco^), 35. 

noXXanXaGioi fjpaip, 174. jf. 

TtoXvg Q81, 132. 

ttoqqco xijg fjXiMag, 143. 

7700 ttoXXov TioieiG&ai, 243. 

TTQOGtJEW, 331. 

ttqogT]'aov, 250. 

Gvroida e\iavxty (Gtxpog &v or 

(7o^q5 6Vr/.), 238*. 6. 
ff£olj7 (^of^aoa), 112. 

T. 

xayyxeqa ij GoqjoireQa, 174. a. 
rg^ffrooi', 235. 

XI [Mtdwv / 317. 

— Tta&cov ; 317. 
rtV JTo^s; 150. 

70 (X770 TOvde, 34*. y. 

}'£ ?W £&#{, 206. 

— £77/, xovxoig ehui) 206. 

— tiqo&vhov, 60. 

— xeXevxcuov, 34*. /". 
zoi> (with infin.), 216. 
rovvavxiov, 137. 

TOVVO\IOL, 137. 

xovxov ye evexa, 250, 
r(p 6V77, 65. 

gp/ooo^ (ioith\ 235. 



234 



INDEX II. 



ysQcov, 350. h. 
Cftvytiv cpjvov, 35. 

, = tpvyeft, 270. g. 

q>&dva> (&c) 242. d. e.f. 358. 
b. c. d. 

X 

XitQLP ifi^r, 250. 
yQcojievog {=with) ) 235. 



53. 

CO£ fWo? E17T81V, 444. 

(JVVsXovn €171 fTt, 444. 

— TayiGia, 174 A. 

— T&iovg e/yov, 278. 

0O(777£() eZjffiV, 351. 

wcpeXov, 206. 



INDEX III. 



List of Words that have some irregularity of Declen- 
sion or Conjugation. 



A. 
ayvvfu, 193. 
adw, F. M., 168*. 
dfjdcdv, 341. 
aiQtco, 190. 
alo&dvoficu, 190. 
dxovco, F. M„ 92. 
aliaxofjiai, 73. 
aXXofjicu, 274. 
a/jiaQzavoo, 154. 
avsxofjiaij 214, note i. 
dvkoya, avecpyiJicu,193 } noteq. 
avoiyco, 193. 
aTToy.Qivopiai, 278. 
cb7o2.ai;G0, 259. 
'AnolXtov, 341. 

(XQ8GXCO, 337. 

a^eco, F. /aw, 175. 
a%&o[iat, 20. 



0a*Va>, 228. 



£. 



yc^.a, 132. 

yeXdco, daofiai, 278. 

yiyvofiai, 15. 



yiyvwGxco, 156. 
yoVf , 20. 
yt;^, 15. 

J. 

for, 60. 

teflw, 293*. 
devdQOV, 144. 
diddoxco, 125. 

dldQUGXCQ, 138. 

dnpdco, 131, note b. 
£o(w, 193. 
doxsco, 96. 
dvvctfiai, 87. 
fo^co, 125. 

£«(}, 341. 

sT^u (i6o), 65. 

a^o^, 60. 

iXavvcoy 24. 

mcuvsm, gen., F. M., 60. 

imGzapcu, 293*. 

eaoficu, 183. 

£££0), 274. 

eoftOficu, 112. 
l<7#/a>, 144. 



236 



INDEX III. 



evQIGXCD, 87. 

Z. 

fccco, 131 3 note b. 

H. 

IjXGd, 206. 

rjfAiovg, 58. 
'Hyaxltjg, 183. 

TJQOflT]T, 73. 

0. 
OaX?jg, 183. 
frprjaxco, 125o 
ftvyatriQ, 20. 

7. 

Ixveopcu, 242, note k. 

xlaico, 150. 

jd£J77C0, F. M., 73. 

xoJlafr, F. M., 121. 

XQIVOV, 144. 

xiW, 41. 



XapfidvcQ, 92. 
lav&dvco, 154. 
Wco, 190. 



^/. 



M". 



[xaivofiai, 125. 

[4,d%0[ACU, 73. 

ffltyQ* 20. 



yaJ^, 125. 



JV. 



O. 

odovg, 20. 

6'frj, 150. 

o/fta, 73, note q. 

oixads, 331. 

OiOfxat, 87. 

ofe, 41, note 1. 

o'l'lotAai, 206, note a. 

oXXvfAi, 193. 

ofiwfxi, 343, note s. 

oQaco, 73. 

oews, 15. 

ofe,20. 

ocpeiXco, 206. 

77. 
7Ta%G), 343, note u. 

;7CC(T#C0, 168*. 

Tieivdco, 131, note b. 
ni]yvv\ii) 193. 
thVoo, 144. 
7Z17ITG), 293*. 

Tzta'co, 188. 

TTOQEVOfACCl, 24. 

Floosidcov, 341. 
flTOl>£, 20. 

TZQaog, 138. 

opaa, F. M., 269*. 
arz-otf, 259, note v. 
(7XO770O, 336, note i. 

GTeQOVfACU, 168*. 
^coxQarrig, 15. 

T. 

renvoi), 46, note q. 

TIXTG), 15. 
TITQWOXOO, 269*. 



tQS%(D, 65. 

Tvy%dv(Q, 183. 



vdcoQ, 15. 



cpeQtt), 60. 



r. 



0. 



INDEX III. 

cp&avca, 241. 
ysiiScoy, 341 . 



X. 



#£/.«flcOf, o41 . 

XQaopcu, 131, noteb. 
X?ay, 91, note i. 



237 



THE END. 



Appletons' Catalogue of Valuable Publications. 

CLASSICAL 56 SCHOOL B O O K S— Continued. 
OLLENDORFF.— NEW GERMAN GRAMMAR. 

A New Method of Learning to Read, Write, and Speak the German Language. 
By H. G. Ollendorff Reprinted from the Frankfort edition ; to which is added a 
Systematic Outline of the different Parts of Speech, their Inflection and Use, with 
full Paradigms, and a complete list of the Irregular Verbs. By G. J. Adler, Prof, of 
the German Language in the University of the City of New York. 12mo-, $1,50. 

" Ollendorff's New Method of Learning to Read, Write, and Speak the German Language, has 
had an extensive circulation in England, and its demand in this country also has constantly been 
increasing of late. Nor is its popularity undeserved; for it supplies a deficiency which has been 
long and deeply felt by all those who have engaged in either teaching or learning the German. 

" The German has hitherto been treated too much like a dead language; and hence many, dis- 
gusted with the cumbrous terminology and crabbed rules which in the very outset met their eye, 
have given up the acquisition of the language in despair. Ollendorff has completely remedied 
this evil. Beginning with the simplest phrases, he gradually introduces every principle of Gram- 
mar ; and he does it by interblending the rules with such copious exercises and idiomatic expres- 
sions, that, by a few months' diligent application, and under the guidance of a skilful instructor, 
any one may acquire every thing that is essential to enable him to read, to write, and to converse 
in the language." ftCf A Key to the above, in a separate volume, uniform ; price 75 cents. 

OLLENDORFF.— NEW FRENCH GRAMMAR. 

A New Method of Learning to Read, Write, and Speak the French Language. By 
H. G. Ollendorff. With an Appendix, containing the Cardinal and Ordinal Num- 
bers, and full Paradigms of the Regular and Irregular, Auxiliary, Reflective, and 
Impersonal Verbs, by J. L. Jewett. One volume, 12mo., $1,50. 

" The plan pursued in teaching the French is snbstantially the same with that developed in the 
German Method. Avoiding the exclusively didactic character of the older treatises on the one 
hand, and the tedious prolixity of detail which encumbers modern systems on the other, Ollendorff 
combines and thoroughly teaches at once both the theory and practice of the language. The 
student who pursues his method will therefore be relieved from the apprehension of either for- 
getting his rules before practice has grounded him in their principles, or of learning sentences by 
rote which he cannot analyze. Speaking and writing French, which in other systems is delayed 
until the learner is presumed to be master of Etymology and Syntax, and consequently is seldom 
acquired, by this method is commenced with the first lesson, continued throughout, and made the 
efficient means of acquiring, almost imperceptibly, a thorough knowledge of grammar; and this 
without diverting the learner's attention for a moment from the language itself, with which he is 
naturally most desirous of becoming familiar. 

The text of Ollendorff, carefully revised and corrected, is given in the present edition without 
abridgment. To this the American editor has added an Appendix, containing the cardinal and 
Ordinal Numbers, and full conjugation of all the Verbs. The work is thus rendered complete, and 
the necessity of consulting other treatises is wholly obviated." 

OCT* A Key to the above, in a separate volume, uniform ; 75 cents. 

OLLENDORFF.— NEW ITALIAN GRAMMAR. 

A New Method of Learning to Read, Write, and Speak the Italian Language. By 
H. G. Ollendorff. With Additions and Corrections, by Felix Foresti, Prof, of the 
Italian Language in the University of the City of N. Y. One vol., 12mo. (In Press.) 

M. Ollendorff's System, applied to the study of the Italian Language, possesses all the advan 
tages of his method of learning the German and French, and will undoubtedly, as its merits be 
come known, take the place of all other Grammars. 

$CF~ A Key to the above, in a separate volume, uniform. 

REID.— A DICTIONARY OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE ; 

Containing the Pronunciation, Etymology, and Explanation of all Words authorized 
by eminent writers ; to which are added a Vocabulary of the Roots of English 
Words, and an accented list of Greek, Latin, and Scripture Proper Names. By 
Alexander Reid, A 31 , Rector of the Circus School, Edinburgh. With a Critical, 
Preface by Henry Reed, Prof, of Eng. Lit. in the Univ. of Pa. 12mo., near 600 p., $1. 
The attention of Professors, Students, Tutors, and Heads of Families is solicited to this volume. 
Notwithstanding its compact size and distinctness of type, it comprises forty thousand words. 
In addition to the correct orthoepy, this manual of words contains four valuable improvements: — ■ 

I. The primitive word is given, and then follow the immediate derivatives in alphabetical or- 
der, with the part of speech appended. 

II. After the primitive word is inserted the original term whence it is formed, with the name 
of the language from which it is derived. 

III. There is subjoined a Vocabulary of the Roots of English words, by which the accurate 
'"■•" Tport of them is instantly discoverable. 

IV. Ar. accented List, to the number of fifteen thousand, of Greek, Latin, and Script lire Pro- 
per Names, is added. 

32 



Appletons' Catalogue of Valuable Publications. 

CLASSICAL 56 SCHOOL BOOKS— Continued. 

SHRRENNE.— THE STANDARD PRONOUNCING D1C 
TIONARY OF THE FRENCH AND ENGLISH LANGUAGES, in two parts. 
Part one, French and English ; part two, English and French; the first part com- 
prehending words in common use — terms connected with Science — terms belonging 
to rhe Fine Arts — 4000 Historical names — 4000 Geographical names — 11,000 terms 
lately published, with the pronunciation of every word according to the French 
Academy, and the most eminent Lexicographers and Grammarians ; together with 
750 Critical Remarks, in which the various methods of pronouncing employed by 
different authors are investigated and compared with each other. The second part, 
containing a copious Vocabulary of English words and expressions, with the pro- 
nunciations according to Walker. The whole preceded by a practical and compre- 
hensive system of French pronunciation. By Gabriel Surrenne, F.A.S.E., French 
Teacher in Edinburgh, Corresponding Member of the French Grammatical Society 
of Paris. One volume, 12mo., nearly 900 pages, neatly bound — $1,50. 

"This work must have been one of very great labor, as it is evidently of deep research. We 
have given it a careful examination, and are perfectly safe in saying, we have never before seen 
any thing of the kind at all to compare with it. Our space will not permit us give more than 
this general testimony to its value. Long as the title is, and much as it promises, our examination 
of the work proves that all the promises are fulfilled, and we think that no student of the French 
language should, for a moment, hesitate to possess himself of it. Nor, indeed, will it be found less 
useful to the accomplished French scholar, who will find in it a fund of information which can 
no where be met with in any one book. Such a work has for a long time been greatly needed, 
*nd Mr. Surrenne has supplied the deficiency in a masterly style. We repeat, therefore, our well- 
digested opinion, that no one in search of a knowledge of the niceties of the French language, 
should be without it." — National Magazine for May, 1846. 

TAYLOR— A MANUAL OF ANCIENT AND MODERN 

HISTORY ; comprising, I. Ancient History, containing the Political History, 
Geographical Position, and Social State of the Principal Nations of Antiquity, care- 
fully digested from the Ancient Writers, and illustrated by the discoveries of Modern 
Scholars and Travellers. 

II. Modern History, containing the Rise and Progress of the principal Euro- 
pean Nations, their Political History, and the Changes in their Social Condition ; 
with a Hisiory ot the Colonies founded by Europeans. By W. Cooke Taylor, 
LL. D., ol Trinity College, Dublin. Revised, with additions on American History, 
by C. S. Henry, D.D., Professor of History in the University of N. Y. One hand- 
some vol., 8vo., of 800 pages, $2,25. $r^» For convenience as a class-book, the 
Ancient or Modern portion can be had in separate volumes. 

This Manual of History is fast superseding all other compends, and is already adopted as a 
text-book in Harvard, Columbia, Yale, New- York, Pennsylvania, and Brown Universities, and 
several leading Academies. 

WARNER— RUDIMENTAL LESSONS IN MUSIC. 

Containing the Primary Instruction requisite for all Beginners in the Art, whether 
Vocal or Instrumental. By James F. Warner, translator of " Weber's Theory of 
Musical Composition," " Kiibler's Anleitung zum Gesang-Unterrichte," [Boston 
Acejdemy's Manual,] &c, &c One vol., 18mo., cloth, 50 cents. 

" We do not know how we can do a more substantial service to teachers and scholars in music- 
vocal or instrumental, than by urging them to adopt this volume as a class book, ft is full and 
complete on every topic connected with the subject, clear in its arrangement, and concise in ex- 

f session. The illustrations are numerous and ingenious, and must prove very valuable aids to the 
earner, in comprehending the subject, as well as to tbe teacher in imparting instruction." — Tribune 

WARNER,— FIRST STEPS IN SINGING. 

The Primary Note Reader, or First Steps in Singing at Sight. By James F. War 
ner. 12rno , 25 cents. 

Thi3 volume of musical exercises is designed as a supplement to the author's " Itudimental 
LeMOM i i Music." The tw i \v ;rks. t iken together, fire intended to furnish the beginner in vocal 
music, with a complete set of books adapted to his purpose. 

WRIGHT.— PRIMARY LESSONS : 

(n which a Single Letter is first Tauaj^with|^3 %°^4jf '■> thajAnother Letter ia 
Taught in the same manner, and the t^HWibirpd $t(& Wftr^^n application of 
he letters being made in words as fast Wtney are learned. The words thus learned 
are arranged into easy sentences, so that the .earner is immediately initiated into 
Reading Lessons. By Albert D. Wright, author of " Analytical Orthography," 
Phonological Chart, &5. 

33 






A^ 















•w 




,; 









r> 



!*■ 



><?« 


















^ ^ 



^ 












Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: July 2006 

PreservationTechnologies 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 

1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township. PA 16066 
(724)779-2111 


















•r , 


















''.'■: 





















LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 




003 037 612 2 



